WGS-5225-8T2SV - NAS Planet - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL WGS-5225-8T2SV Planet

Industrial Wall-mounted Gigabit Ethernet Switch

WGS-5225-8P2S/WGS-5225-8P2SV/

WGS-5225-8T2SV

Industrial chemical plant with tall distillation towers and storage tanks under a clear sky (no visible text or symbols)

Front view of a black JPNKT network switch device with multiple ports and indicator lights (no visible text or symbols)

Front view of a black wireless network device with ports and a digital display (no visible text or symbols)

Front view of a black PiSmart network device with multiple Ethernet ports and a digital display (no readable text or symbols)

Trademarks

Copyright © PLANET Technology Corp. 2018.

Contents are subject to revision without prior notice.

PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp. All other trademarks belong to their respective owners.

Disclaimer

PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications, and makes no warranty and representation, either implied or expressed, with respect to the quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User's Manual is accurate; PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred.

Information in this User's Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET. PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User's Manual. PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User's Manual, and reserves the right to make improvements to this User's Manual and/or to the products described in this User's Manual, at any time without notice.

If you find information in this manual that is incorrect, misleading, or incomplete, we would appreciate your comments and suggestions.

FCC Warning

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

CE Mark Warning

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Energy Saving Note of the Device

This power required device does not support Standby mode operation. For energy saving, please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit. In view of saving the energy and reducing the unnecessary power consumption, it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active.

WEEE Warning

To avoid the potential effects on t he environment and human health as a r esult of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment, end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol. Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately.

Revision

PLANET WGS-5225 Series User's Manual

Model: WGS-5225-8P2S/WGS-5225-8P2SV/WGS-5225-8T2SV

Revision: 1.0 (March, 2018)

Part No: EM-WGS-5225 series_v1.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION.... 10

1.1 Packet Contents .... 10
1.2 Product Description....11
1.3 How to Use This Manual....18
1.4 Product Features....19
1.5 Product Specifications ....22

2. INSTALLATION 26

2.1 Hardware Description ....26

2.1.1 Physical Dimensions ...... 26
2.1.2 LED Indications .... 29
2.1.3 Wiring Power Input 31

2.2 Installing the Wall-mount Managed Switch ....32

2.2.1 Wall-mount Installation 32
2.2.2 Magnet Installation ....33
2.2.3 DIN-rail Installation 33
2.2.4 Installing the SFP Transceiver....35

3. SWITCH MANAGEMENT .... 39

3.1 Requirements ....39
3.2 Management Access Overview....40
3.3 Remote Telnet Management....41
3.4 Web Management and LCD Touch Screen 41
3.5 SNMP-based Network Management....44
3.6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility ....45

4. WEB CONFIGURATION.... 47

4.1 Main Web Page....50
4.2 System....52

4.2.1 System Information....53

4.2.2 IP Configuration....54

4.2.3 IP Status....56

4.2.4 Users Configuration....57

4.2.5 Privilege Levels 60

4.2.6 NTP Configuration....61

4.2.7 Time Configuration 62

4.2.8 UPnP 64

4.2.9 DHCP Relay 66

4.2.10 DHCP Relay Statistics....67

4.2.11 CPU Load 69

4.2.12 System Log....70

4.2.13 Detailed Log 71

4.2.14 Remote Syslog 72

4.2.15 SMTP Configuration....73

4.2.16 Fault Alarm 74

4.2.17 Web Firmware Upgrade....75

4.2.18 TFTP Firmware Upgrade....76

4.2.19 Save Startup Config ....77

4.2.20 Configuration Download 77

4.2.21 Configuration Upload....78

4.2.22 Configuration Activate....78

4.2.23 Configuration Delete....79

4.2.24 Image Select....79

4.2.25 Factory Default....80

4.2.26 System Reboot....81

4.3 Simple Network Management Protocol....82

4.3.1 SNMP Overview 82

4.3.2 SNMP System Configuration....83

4.3.3 SNMP Trap Configuration....85

4.3.4 SNMP System Information 87

4.3.5 SNMPv3 Configuration 88

4.3.5.1 SNMPv3 Communities 88

4.3.5.2 SNMPv3 Users 89

4.3.5.3 SNMPv3 Groups 90

4.3.5.4 SNMPv3 Views....91

4.3.5.5 SNMPv3 Access....92

4.4 Port Management 94

4.4.1 Port Configuration....94

4.4.2 Port Statistics Overview....96

4.4.3 Port Statistics Detail 96

4.4.4 SFP Module Information 98
4.4.5 Port Mirror....101

4.5 Link Aggregation....103

4.5.1 Static Aggregation .... 105
4.5.2 LACP Configuration....106
4.5.3 LACP System Status....109
4.5.4 LACP Port Status 110
4.5.5 LACP Port Statistics 111

4.6 VLAN....112

4.6.1 VLAN Overview....112
4.6.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN....113
4.6.3 VLAN Port Configuration 116
4.6.4 VLAN Membership Status 122
4.6.5 VLAN Port Status 124
4.6.6 Private VLAN 125
4.6.7 Port Isolation....127
4.6.8 VLAN setting example:....129

4.6.8.1 Two Separate 802.1Q VLANs....129
4.6.8.2 VLAN Trunking between two 802.1Q aware switches....131
4.6.8.3 Port Isolate 134

4.6.9 MAC-based VLAN 135
4.6.10 MAC-based VLAN Status....137
4.6.11 IP Subnet-based VLAN....137
4.6.12 Protocol-based VLAN 139
4.6.13 Protocol-based VLAN Membership 141

4.7 Spanning Tree Protocol....142

4.7.1 Theory 142
4.7.2 STP System Configuration 148
4.7.3 Bridge Status....150
4.7.4 CIST Port Configuration....151
4.7.5 MSTI Priorities....154
4.7.6 MSTI Configuration....155
4.7.7 MSTI Ports Configuration 156
4.7.8 Port Status....158
4.7.9 Port Statistics....159

4.8 Multicast....160

4.8.1 IGMP Snooping....160
4.8.2 Profile Table....164
4.8.3 Address Entry 165

4.8.4 IGMP Snooping Configuration....166
4.8.5 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration....168
4.8.6 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering....170
4.8.7 IGMP Snooping Status....171
4.8.8 IGMP Group Information....174
4.8.9 IGMPv3 Information....175
4.8.10 MLD Snooping Configuration....176
4.8.11 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration 177
4.8.12 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering....179
4.8.13 MLD Snooping Status....180
4.8.14 MLD Group Information....183
4.8.15 MLDv2 Information 184
4.8.16 MVR (Multicaset VLAN Registration)....185
4.8.17 MVR Status .... 188
4.8.18 MVR Groups Information....189
4.8.19 MVR SFM Information....190

4.9 Quality of Service....191

4.9.1 Understanding QoS....191
4.9.2 Port Policing 192
4.9.3 Port Classification....193
4.9.4 Port Scheduler....195
4.9.5 Port Shaping....196

4.9.5.1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers 197

4.9.6 Port Tag Remarking....199
4.9.6.1 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking....200
4.9.7 Port DSCP....201
4.9.8 DSCP-based QoS 203
4.9.9 DSCP Translation....204
4.9.10 DSCP Classification....205
4.9.11 QoS Control List 206

4.9.11.1 QoS Control Entry Configuration 208

4.9.12 QCL Status....210
4.9.13 Storm Control Configuration 212
4.9.14 QoS Statistics....213
4.9.15 Voice VLAN Configuration 214
4.9.16 Voice VLAN OUI Table....216

4.10 Access Control List....217

4.10.1 Access Control List Status....217
4.10.2 Access Control List Configuration....219
4.10.3 ACE Configuration....221

4.10.4 ACL Ports Configuration 231
4.10.5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration 233

4.11 Authentication......234

4.11.1 Understanding IEEE 802.1X Port-based Authentication....235
4.11.2 Authentication Configuration 238
4.11.3 Network Access Server Configuration....239
4.11.4 Network Access Overview 250
4.11.5 Network Access Statistics....251
4.11.6 RADIUS 258
4.11.7 TACACS+ 260
4.11.8 RADIUS Overview 261
4.11.9 RADIUS Details 263
4.11.10 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration....269
4.11.11 802.1X Client Configuration ....274

4.12 Security 277

4.12.1 Port Limit Control....277
4.12.2 Access Management 281
4.12.3 Access Management Statistics....282
4.12.4 HTTPS 283
4.12.5 SSH....284
4.12.6 Port Security Status....285
4.12.7 Port Security Detail 287
4.12.8 DHCP Snooping 288
4.12.9 Snooping Table....290
4.12.10 IP Source Guard Configuration....290
4.12.11 IP Source Guard Static Table....292
4.12.12 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table....293
4.12.13 ARP Inspection....294
4.12.14 ARP Inspection Static Table....296
4.12.15 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table....296

4.13 MAC Address Table....298

4.13.1 MAC Table Configuration....298
4.13.2 MAC Address Table Status 300

4.14 LLDP 302

4.14.1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol 302
4.14.2 LLDP Configuration 302
4.14.3 LLDP MED Configuration 305
4.14.4 LLDP-MED Neighbor....311
4.14.5 Neighbor 315

4.14.6 Port Statistics....316

4.15 Network Diagnostics....319

4.15.1 Ping 320
4.15.2 IPv6 Ping 321
4.15.3 Remote IP Ping Test....322
4.15.4 Cable Diagnostics....323

4.16 Power over Ethernet 325

4.16.1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device 325
4.16.2 System Configuration ....327
4.16.3 Power Over Ethernet Configuration....328
4.16.4 Port Sequential....330
4.16.5 Port Configuration....331
4.16.6 PoE Status....333
4.16.7 PoE Schedule....334
4.16.8 LLDP PoE Neighbours....337
4.16.10 PoE Alive Check Configuration....338

4.17 Loop Protection....340

4.17.1 Configuration 340
4.17.2 Loop Protection Status 342

4.18 RMON....343

4.18.1 RMON Alarm Configuration 343
4.18.2 RMON Alarm Status 345
4.18.3 RMON Event Configuration....346
4.18.4 RMON Event Status....347
4.18.5 RMON History Configuration 348
4.18.6 RMON History Status ....349
4.18.7 RMON Statistics Configuration....350
4.18.8 RMON Statistics Status....351

4.19 PTP 353

4.19.1 PTP Configuration ....353
4.19.2 PTP Status ....357

4.20 Ring....358

4.20.1 MEP Configuration .... 359
4.20.2 Detailed MEP Configuration 360
4.20.3 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch 363
4.20.4 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch Configuration....365
4.20.5 Ring Wizard 368
4.20.6 Ring Wizard Example: 369

4.21.1 LCD Management ....371

4.22 ONVIF....373

4.22.1 ONVIF Device Search 373
4.22.2 ONVIF Device List....374
4.22.3 Map Upload / Edit....376
4.22.4 Floor Map 377

5. SWITCH OPERATION 378

5.1 Address Table 378
5.2 Learning 378
5.3 Forwarding & Filtering 378
5.4 Store-and-Forward 378
5.5 Auto-Negotiation ....379

6. TROUBLESHOOTING.... 380

APPENDIX A: Networking Connection 381

A.1 Switch's Data RJ45 Pin Assignments - 1000Mbps, 1000BASE-T ....381
A.2 10/100Mbps, 10/100BASE-TX ....381

APPENDIX B : GLOSSARY 383

1. INTRODUCTION

The descriptions of PLANET L2+ Industrial Wall-mount Managed Switch series, such as WGS-5225-8P2S, WGS-5225-8P2SV, and WGS-5225-8T2SV are as follows:

WGS-5225-8P2S	Industrial L2+ 8-Port 10/100/1000T 802.3at PoE + 2-Port 100/1000X SFP Wall-mount Managed Switch
WGS-5225-8P2SV	Industrial L2+ 8-Port 10/100/1000T 802.3at PoE + 2-Port 100/1000X SFP Wall-mount Managed Switch with LCD Touch Screen
WGS-5225-8T2SV	Industrial L2+ 8-Port 10/100/1000T + 2-Port 100/1000X SFP Wall-mount Managed Switch with LCD Touch Screen

"Wall-mount Managed Switch" is used as an alternative name for the above models in this user's manual.

Model Name	10/100/1000TCopper Ports	802.3at PoEPorts	100/1000XSFP Ports	2.4" LCD
WGS-5225-8T2SV 8	-		2	■
WGS-5225-8P2SV	8	8	2	■
WGS-5225-8P2S	8	8	2	-

1.1 Packet Contents

Open the box of the Wall-mount Managed Switch and carefully unpack it. The box should contain the following items:

Model NameItem	WGS-5225-8P2S	WGS-5225-8P2SV,	WGS-5225-8T2SV
The Wall-mount Managed Switch	■ ■ ■
Quick Installation Guide	■ ■ ■
DIN-rail Kit	■ ■ ■
Wall-mounted Kit	■ ■ ■
Magnet Kit	■ ■ ■
SFP Dust Caps	2 2 2
RJ45 Dust Caps	8 8 8

If any of these are missing or damaged, please contact your dealer immediately; if possible, retain the carton including the original packing material, and use them again to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair.

1.2 Product Description

Wall-mount PoE Managed Switch with Advanced L2+/L4 Switching and Security

PLANET WGS-5225 Series is an Industrial Wall-mount Managed Switch with LCD Touch Screen featuring PoE or non-PoE models to improve the availability of industrial applications. It provides IPv6/IPv4 dual stack management and built-in L2+/L4 Gigabit switching engine along with eight 10/100/1000BASE-T ports and two additional 1000BASE-X SFP ports. The PoE model features 36-watt PoE and a total power budget of up to 240 watts for different kinds of PoE applications. With operating temperature ranging from -20 to 70 degrees C in a compact but rugged IP30 metal housing, the WGS-5225 Series is an ideal solution to meet the demand for the following network applications:

■ Building/Home automation network
■ Internet of things (IoT)
IP surveillance

System PoE Interfaces Smart LCD 3-pin Terminal Block PLANNET Interwiting & Communication PoE & Fiber Masterpad WCS-1225-RP28V DC Input Range 48-56V Ground V- V+ DC Plug-in 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 Ports 2 100/1000BASE-X SFP Ports

Intuitive LCD Control (WGS-5225-8P2SV/ WGS-5225-8T2SV)

The WGS-5225 Series comes with an intuitive touch panel on its front panel that facilitates the Ethernet or PoE PD management that greatly promotes management efficiency in large-scale networks, such as enterprises, hotels, shopping malls, government buildings, and other public areas. It also features the following special management and status functions:

■ IP address, VLAN and QoS configuration
■ PoE management and status
■ Port management and status, and SFP information
■ Troubleshooting: cable diagnostic and remote IP ping
■ Maintenance: reboot, factory default and save configuration

System PoE Interfaces PoE Port Management 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 PoE Port Status 01 17.9W 05 17.8W 02 0.0W 06 0.0W 03 18.0W 07 17.8W 04 0.0W 08 0.0W Total Usage: 72W/240W PLANET Port 03 Port: 1/3 Description: Link Status: UP, 1G/dx Speed & Duplex, Auto Flow Control: disabled Auto Apply

Redundant Ring, Fast Recovery for Critical Network Applications

The WGS-5225 Series supports redundant ring technology and features strong, rapid self-recovery capability to prevent interruptions and external intrusions. It incorporates advanced ITU-T G.8032 ERPS (Ethernet Ring Protection

Switching) technology, Spanning Tree Protocol (802.1s MSTP), and dual power input system into customer's industrial automation network to enhance system reliability and uptime in harsh factory environments. In a certain simple ring network, the recovery time of data link can be as fast as 20ms.

graph TD
    A["Factory"] --> B["Industrial MAN Switch"]
    B --> C["Office"]
    C --> D["8-Port MAN Switch"]
    D --> E["Control Center"]
    E --> F["Highway"]
    F --> G["Industrial PoE Switch"]
    G --> H["Industrial MAN Switch"]
    H --> I["E.R.P.S. Ring for Metropolitan Area Network Application Recovery Time < 50ms"]
    I --> A

Convenient and Smart ONVIF Devices with Detection Feature (WGS-5225-8P2S/8P2SV only)

PLANET has newly developed an awesome feature -- ONVIF Support -- which is specifically designed for co-operating with video IP surveillances. From the WGS-5225 Series' GUI, you just need one click to search and show all of the ONVIF devices via network application. In addition, you can upload floor images to the switch and can remotely locate where the PDs are. Moreover, you can get real-time surveillance information and online/offline status; the PoE reboot can be controlled from the GUI.

Built-in Unique PoE Functions for Powered Devices Management (WGS-5225-8P2S/8P2SV only)

As it is the managed PoE switch for surveillance, wireless and VoIP networks, the WGS-5225 Series features the following special PoE management functions:

■ PD alive check
■ Scheduled power recycling
■ PoE schedule
■ PoE usage monitoring

Intelligent Powered Device Alive Check (WGS-5225-8P2S/8P2SV only)

The WGS-5225 Series can be configured to monitor connected PD status in real time via ping action. Once the PD stops working and responding, the WGS-5225 Series will resume the PoE port power and bring the PD back to work. It will greatly enhance the network reliability through the PoE port resetting the PD's power source and reducing administrator management burden.

Step 1

graph LR
    A["PD Status Good!!"] -->|Ping Request| B["PT PoE Camera"]
    A -->|Ping Echo| B

Step 2

No Response...... Ping Request Check alive status for 3 times

Step 3

graph LR
    A["Alarm Notification"] --> B["On"]
    B --> C["OFF"]
    C --> D["Robot Icon"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Step 4

graph LR
    A["PD Alive!!"] --> B["On"]
    B --> C["PoE"]
    C --> D["ON"]
    D --> E["Target Device"]
    style A fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f9f9,stroke:#333

Scheduled Power Recycling (WGS-5225-8P2S/8P2SV only)

The WGS-5225 Series allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras or PoE wireless access points to reboot at a specific time each week. Therefore, it will reduce the chance of IP camera or AP crash resulting from buffer overflow.

Automatically Reboot Every Friday 23:00 S M T W T F S PoE ON OFF ON CPU/Buffer Load 85% CPU/Buffer Load 10% PoE PT Camera

PoE Schedule for Energy Saving (WGS-5225-8P2S/8P2SV only)

Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to environmental protection, the WGS-5225 Series can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power. The “PoE schedule” function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMBs or enterprises save power and budget. It also increases security by powering off PDs that should not be in use during non-business hours.

graph TD
    A["BAM"] --> B["Switch"]
    C["SPM"] --> B
    B --> D["Power On 6 Watts"]
    B --> E["Power On 6 Watts"]
    B --> F["Power On 12 Watts"]
    B --> G["Power On 12 Watts"]

graph TD
    A["5PM"] --> B["Switch"]
    C["8AM"] --> B
    B --> D["Power Off 6 Watts"]
    B --> E["Power Off 6 Watts"]
    B --> F["Power Off 12 Watts"]
    B --> G["Power On 12 Watts"]
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:2px
    note right of B Save 24 watts/hr during off-business hours
        * Total Saved = 10800 Watts/month
    end

Innovative Wall-mount Installation

The WGS-5225 Series is specially designed to be installed in a narrow environment, such as wall enclosure or electric weak box. The compact, flat and wall-mounted design fits easily in any space-limited location. It adopts the user-friendly "Front Access" design, making the installing, cable wiring, LED monitoring and maintenance of the WGS-5225 Series placed in an enclosure very convenient for technicians. The WGS-5225 Series can be installed by fixed wall mounting, magnetic wall mounting or DIN-rail mounting, thereby making its usability more flexible.

Interior view of an open industrial control box with a digital display and wiring, no visible text or symbols on the main components.

SMTP/SNMP Trap Event Alert

The WGS-5225 Series provides event alert function to help to diagnose the abnormal device owing to whether or not there is a break of the network connection, or the rebooting response.

SMTP/SNMP Trap Event Alert

graph TD
    A["WGS-5225-8P2SV"] --> B["E-mail Alert"]
    B --> C["Malfunction"]
    C --> D["PoE IP Camera"]
    C --> E["PoE IP Camera"]
    D --> F["Hand holding phone"]
    E --> F
    F --> G["PLANET-event from PoE Switch"]

Layer 3 IPv4 and IPv6 Software VLAN Routing for Secure and Flexible Management

To help customers stay on top of their businesses, the WGS-5225 Series not only provides ultra high transmission performance and excellent Layer 2 technologies, but also IPv4/IPv6 software VLAN routing feature which allows to cross over different VLANs and different IP addresses for the purpose of having a highly-secure, flexible management and simpler networking application.

Robust Layer 2 Features

The WGS-5225 Series can be programmed for advanced switch management functions such as dynamic port link aggregation, Q-in-Q VLAN, private VLAN, Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, Layer 2 to Layer 4 QoS, bandwidth control and IGMP snooping. The WGS-5225 Series provides 802.1Q tagged VLAN, and the VLAN groups allowed will be maximally up to 255. Via aggregation of supporting ports, the WGS-5225 Series allows the operation of a high-speed trunk combining multiple ports. It enables a maximum of up to 2 trunk groups with 2 ports per trunk group, and supports fail-over as well.

graph LR
    A["L2/L4 Managed Switch"] --> B["MSTP"]
    A --> C["LACP"]
    A --> D["Q-in-Q"]
    A --> E["QoS"]
    A --> F["LLDP"]
    A --> G["MLD"]
    A --> H["IGMP"]
    I["L2/L4 Managed Switch"] --> J["Next Node"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#bbf,stroke:#333

Efficient Management

For efficient management, the WGS-5225 Series is equipped with console, Web and SNMP management interfaces. With the built-in Web-based management interface, the WGS-5225 Series offers an easy-to-use, platform-independent management and configuration facility. For text-based management, the WGS-5225 Series can be accessed via Telnet and the console port. Moreover, it also offers secure remote management via any standard-based management software by supporting SNMPv3 connection which encrypts the packet content at each session.

graph LR
    A["Network Equipment"] -->|Secure Management| B["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| C["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| D["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| E["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| F["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| G["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| H["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| I["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| J["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| K["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| L["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| M["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| N["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| O["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| P["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| Q["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| R["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| S["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| T["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| U["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| V["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| W["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| X["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| Y["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| Z["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AA["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AB["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AC["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AD["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AE["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AF["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AG["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AH["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AI["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AJ["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AK["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AL["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AM["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AN["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AO["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AP["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AQ["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AR["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AS["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AT["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AU["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AV["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AW["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AX["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AY["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| AZ["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BA["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BB["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BC["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BD["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BE["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BF["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BG["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BH["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BI["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BJ["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BK["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BL["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BM["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BN["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BO["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BP["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BQ["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BR["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BS["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BT["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BU["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BV["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BW["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BX["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BY["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BZ["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| CA["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| CB["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| CC["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| CD["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| CE["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| CF["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| CG["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| DH["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| DI["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| DJ["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| DK["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| DL["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| DN["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| DO["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| DB["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| DC["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| DV["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| DW["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BXN["Computer"]
    A -->|Secure Management| BZN["Computer"]

Powerful Security

The WGS-5225 Series offers a comprehensive Layer 2 to Layer 4 Access Control List (ACL) for enforcing security to the edge. It can be used to restrict network access by denying packets based on source and destination IP address, TCP/UDP ports or defined typical network applications. Its protection mechanism also comprises 802.1x Port-based and MAC-based user and device authentication. With the private VLAN function, communication between edge ports can be prevented to ensure user privacy. The network administrators can now construct highly-secure corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before.

Modbus TCP Provides Flexible Network Connectivity for Factory Automation

With the supported Modbus TCP/IP protocol, the WGS-5225 Series can easily integrate with SCADA systems, HMI systems and other data acquisition systems in factory floors. It enables administrators to remotely monitor the industrial Ethernet switch's operating information, port information and communication status, thus easily achieving enhanced monitoring and maintenance of the entire factory.

Flexibility and Extension Solution

The additional four mini-GBIC slots built in the WGS-5225 Series support dual speed, 100BASE-FX and 1000BASE-SX/LX SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) fiber-optic modules, meaning the administrator now can flexibly choose the suitable SFP transceiver according to not only the transmission distance but also the transmission speed required. The distance can be extended from 550 meters (multi-mode fiber) to 10/50/70/120 kilometers (single-mode fiber or WDM fiber). They are well suited for applications within the enterprise data centers and distributions.

Intelligent SFP Diagnosis Mechanism

The WGS-5225 Series supports SFP-DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitor) function that greatly helps network administrator to easily monitor real-time parameters of the SFP, such as optical output power, optical input power, temperature, laser bias current, and transceiver supply voltage.

Digital Diagnostic Monitor (DDM)

Voltage V Ammeter mA Temperature 25°C 75°C dBm Power Receiver Power Transceiver

1588 Time Protocol for Industrial Computing Networks

The WGS-5225 Series is ideal for telecom and Carrier Ethernet applications, supporting MEF service delivery and timing over packet solutions for IEEE 1588 and synchronous Ethernet.

1.3 How to Use This Manual

This User's Manual is structured as follows:

Section 2, INSTALLATION

The section explains the functions of the Wall-mount Managed Switch and how to physically install the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

Section 3, SWITCH MANAGEMENT

The section contains the information about the software function of the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

Section 4, WEB CONFIGURATION

The section explains how to manage the Wall-mount Managed Switch by Web interface.

Section 5, SWITCH OPERATION

The chapter explains how to do the switch operation of the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

Section 6, TROUBLESHOOTING

The chapter explains how to do troubleshooting of the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

Appendix A

The section contains cable information of the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

Appendix B

The section contains glossary information of the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

1.4 Product Features

Physical Port (WGS-5225-8P2SV/WGS-5225-8P2S)

■ 8 10/100/1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet RJ45 ports with IEEE 802.3at PoE+ Injector
■ 2 100/1000BASE-X mini-GBIC/SFP slots for SFP type auto detection

Physical Port (WGS-5225-8T2SV)

■ 8 10/100/1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet RJ45 ports
■ 2 100/1000BASE-X mini-GBIC/SFP slots for SFP type auto detection

Power over Ethernet (WGS-5225-8P2SV/WGS-5225-8P2S)

■ Complies with IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus/end-span PSE
■ Up to 8 IEEE 802.3af/802.3at devices powered
■ Supports PoE power up to 36 watts for each PoE port
■ Auto detects powered device (PD)
■ Circuit protection prevents power interference between ports
■ Remote power feeding up to 100m
■ PoE management features
- Total PoE power budget control
- Per port PoE function enable/disable
- PoE admin-mode control
- PoE port power feeding priority
- Per PoE port power limit
– PD classification detection

■ Intelligent PoE features

– Temperature threshold control

- PoE usage threshold control

- PD alive check

- PoE schedule

Layer 2 Features

■ Prevents packet loss with back pressure (half-duplex) and IEEE 802.3x pause frame flow control (full-duplex)
■ High performance of Store-and-Forward architecture, and runt/CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth
■ Storm Control support
- Broadcast/Multicast/Unicast

■ Supports VLAN

-IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN
- Up to 255 VLANs groups, out of 4094 VLAN IDs
-Provider Bridging (VLAN Q-in-Q) support (IEEE 802.1ad)
- Private VLAN Edge (PVE)
-Protocol-based VLAN

-MAC-based VLAN

- Voice VLAN

■ Supports Spanning Tree Protocol

-IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
- IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
- IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), spanning tree by VLAN
-BPDU Guard

■ Supports Link Aggregation

-802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

-Cisco ether-channel (static trunk)

–Maximum 2 trunk groups with 2 ports per trunk group

-Up to 2Gbps bandwidth (duplex mode)

■ Provides port mirror (1-to-1)
■ Port mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port
■ Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops
■ Supports ERPS (Ethernet Ring Protection Switching)

Layer 3 IP Routing Features

■ Supports maximum 32 static routes and route summarization

Quality of Service

■ Ingress Shaper and Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control
■ 8 priority queues on all switch ports
■ Traffic classification
- IEEE 802.1p CoS
- IP TOS/DSCP/IP precedence
- IP TCP/UDP port number
- Typical network application

■ Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) CoS policies
■ Supports QoS and In/Out bandwidth control on each port
■ Traffic-policing on the switch port
■ DSCP remarking

Multicast

■ Supports IGMP snooping v1, v2 and v3
■ Supports MLD snooping v1 and v2
■ Querier mode support
■ IGMP snooping port filtering
■ MLD snooping port filtering
■ MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)

Security

■ IEEE 802.1x Port-based/MAC-based network access authentication
■ Built-in RADIUS client to cooperate with the RADIUS servers
■ TACACS+ login users access authentication
■ RADIUS/TACACS+ users access authentication
■ IP-based Access Control List (ACL)
■ MAC-based Access Control List
■ Source MAC/IP address binding
■ DHCP snooping to filter distrusted DHCP messages
■ Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding
■ IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks
■ IP address access management to prevent unauthorized intruder

Management

■ Switch Management Interfaces
- Telnet Command Line Interface
- Web switch management
- SNMP v1 and v2c switch management
- SSH/SSL and SNMP v3 secure access
- 2.4-inch color LCD touch screen (WGS-5225-8P2SV/WGS-5225-8T2SV)

■ Four RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events)
■ IPv6 IP address/NTP/DNS management
■ Built-in Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) client
■ BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment
■ Firmware upload/download via HTTP/TFTP
■ DHCP Relay and DHCP Option 82
■ User Privilege levels control
■ Network Time Protocol (NTP)
■ Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
■ SFP-DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitor)
■ Cable diagnostic technology provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues
■ Reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default

PLANET Smart Discovery Utility for deployment management

1.5 Product Specifications

Product	WGS-5225-8P2SV	WGS-5225-8P2S	WGS-5225-8T2SV
Hardware Specifications
Copper Ports	8 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 auto-MDI/MDI-X ports
SFP/mini-GBIC Slots	2 1000BASE-SX/LX/BX SFP interfaces (Port-9 to Port-10)Compatible with 100BASE-FX SFP
PoE Injector Port	8 ports with 802.3at/af PoE injector function with Port-1 to Port-8		—
Switch Architecture	Store-and-Forward
Switch Fabric	20Gbps/non-blocking
Throughput (packet per second)	14.88Mpps@ 64 bytes packet
Address Table	8K entries, automatic source address learning and aging
Shared Data Buffer	4Mbits
Flow Control	IEEE 802.3x pause frame for full duplexBack pressure for half duplex
Jumbo Frame	9Kbytes
Reset Button	< 5 sec: System reboot> 5 sec: Factory default
ESD Protection 6KV DC
Enclosure	IP30 aluminum case
Installation	DIN rail kit and wall-mount
Connector	Removable 3-pin terminal block for power input- Pin 1/2 for Power (Pin 1: V+ / Pin 2: V-) - Pin 3 for earth groundDC power jack with 2.0mm central pole
LED Indicator	System:PWR(Green)Ring (Green)Ring Owner (Green)Per 10/100/1000T RJ45 PoE+ Ports:PoE-in-Use (Orange)LNK/ACT (Green)Per SFP Interface:100 LNK/ACT (Orange)1000 LNK/ACT (Green)		SystemPWR(Green)Ring (Green)Ring Owner (Green)Per 10/100/1000T RJ4510/100LNK/ACT (Green)1000 LNK/ACT (Orange)Per SFP Interface:100 LNK/ACT (Orange)1000 LNK/ACT (Green)
Dimensions (W x D x H)	180 x 24.4 x 140 mm
Weight	686g 681g 642g
Power Requirements	Dual 48~56V DC (>51V DC for PoE+ output recommended)		Dual 12~48V DC
Power Consumption	Max. 7.2 watts/24.7BTU(Power on without anyconnection)Max. 251 watts/861.2BTU(Full loading with PoE function)	Max. 6.6 watts/22.6BTU(Power on without anyconnection)Max. 250.4watts/859.1BTU (Full loading with PoE function)	Max. 4.5 watts/15.4BTU(Power on without anyconnection)Max. 8.5 watts/29.1BTU(Full loading with Ethernet)
Power Over Ethernet
PoE Standard	IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus/PSE		-
PoE Power Supply Type End-span			-
PoE Power Output	IEEE 802.3af Standard- Per port 48V~51V DC (depending on the power supply), max. 15.4 wattsIEEE 802.3at Standard- Per port 51V~56V DC (depending on the power supply), max. 36 watts		-
Power Pin Assignment	1/2(+), 3/6(-)		-
PoE Power Budget	240W maximum (depending on power input)		-
Max. Number of Class 2 PDs	8		-
Max. Number of Class 3 PDs	8		-
Max. Number of Class 4 PDs	8		-
Layer 2 Function
Basic Management Interfaces	Console; Telnet; Web browser; SNMP v1, v2c
Secure Management Interfaces	SSH, SSL, SNMP v3
Port Configuration	Port disable/enableAuto-negotiation 10/100/1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selectionFlow control disable/enablePower saving mode control
Port Status	Display each port's speed duplex mode, link status, flow control status, auto negotiation status, trunk status
Port Mirroring	TX/RX/both1 to 1 monitor
VLAN	802.1Q tag-based VLAN, up to 255 VLAN groupsQ-in-Q tunnelingPrivate VLAN Edge (PVE)MAC-based VLANProtocol-based VLANVoice VLANMVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)Up to 255 VLAN groups, out of 4094 VLAN IDs
Link Aggregation	IEEE 802.3ad LACP/static trunkSupports 2 trunk groups with 2 ports per trunk group
QoS	Traffic classification based, strict priority and WRR8-level priority for switching- Port number- 802.1p priority- 802.1Q VLAN tag- DSCP/TOS field in IP packet
IGMP Snooping	IGMP (v1/v2/v3) snooping, up to 255 multicast groupsIGMP querier mode support
MLD Snooping	MLD (v1/v2) snooping, up to 255 multicast groupsMLD querier mode support
Access Control List	IP-based ACL/MAC-based ACLUp to 256 entries
Bandwidth Control	Per port bandwidth controlIngress: 500Kb~1000MbpsEgress: 500Kb~1000Mbps
SNMP MIBs	RFC 1213 MIB-IIIF-MIBRFC 1493 Bridge MIBRFC 1643 Ethernet MIBRFC 2863 Interface MIBRFC 2665 Ether-Like MIBRFC 2819 RMON MIB (Groups 1, 2, 3 and 9)RFC 2737 Entity MIBRFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIBRFC 2933 IGMP-STD-MIBRFC 3411 SNMP-Frameworks-MIBIEEE 802.1X PAELLDPMAU-MIB
Layer 3 Function
IP Interfaces	Max. 8 VLAN interfaces
Routing Table	Max. 32 routing entries
Routing Protocols	IPv4 software static routingIPv6 software static routing
Standards Conformance
Regulatory Compliance	FCC Part 15 Class A, CE
Stability Testing	IEC60068-2-32 (free fall)IEC60068-2-27 (shock)IEC60068-2-6 (vibration)
	IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T
Standards Compliance	IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX/100BASE-FXIEEE 802.3z Gigabit SX/LXIEEE 802.3ab Gigabit 1000TIEEE 802.3x flow control and back pressureIEEE 802.3ad port trunk with LACPIEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree ProtocolIEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree ProtocolIEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree ProtocolIEEE 802.1p Class of ServiceIEEE 802.1Q VLAN taggingIEEE 802.1X Port Authentication Network Control
	IEEE 802.1ab LLDPIEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (WGS-5225-8P2S and WGS-5225-8P2SV)IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus(WGS-5225-8P2S and WGS-5225-8P2SV)ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection SwitchingRFC 768 UDPRFC 793 TFTPRFC 791 IPRFC 792 ICMPRFC 2068 HTTPRFC 1112 IGMP v1RFC 2236 IGMP v2
Environment
Operating Temperature	-20 ~ 70 degrees C	-40 ~ 75 degrees C	-20 ~ 70 degrees C
Storage Temperature	-20 ~ 70 degrees C	-40 ~ 85 degrees C	-20 ~ 70 degrees C
Humidity	5 ~ 95% (non-condensing)

2. INSTALLATION

2.1 Hardware Description

The Wall-mount Managed Switch provides three different running speeds - 10Mbps, 100Mbps and 1000Mbps and automatically distinguishes the speed of incoming connection.

This section describes the hardware features of Wall-mount Managed Switch. For easier management and control of the Wall-mount Managed Switch, familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports. Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators. Before connecting any network device to the Wall-mount Managed Switch, read this chapter carefully.

The front panel provides a simple interface monitoring the Managed Switch. Figures 2-1-1 to 2-1-3 show the front panels of the Wall-mount Managed Switches.

WGS-5225-8P2SV

System PoE Interfaces Smart LCD Ground V- V+ DC Input Range 45-30V PLANET Networking & Communication PoE + Fiber Managed Magnet Mounting WG5-1225-8P25V Rig● PWR R.O ● EVS 9 SFP 10 1000 LAM ACT 100 LAM ACT 2 4 6 8 ← LINKAST → PoE Index 1 3 5 7 PoE SFP 10

Figure 2-1-1: Front Panel of WGS-5225-8P2SV

WGS-5225-8P2S

PLANET Networking & Communication Ground V- V+ ⊕⊕⊕ DC Input Range 48-50V PoE + Fiber Managed Magnet Mounting WGS-3225-BP25 Ring ● PWR R.O ● SYS 9 SFP 10 1000 ○ LIAA ● ACT 100 ○ LIAA ● ACT 2 4 6 8 ← LINK/ACT → PoE Invase 1 3 5 7 Out ← SFP 10

Figure 2-1-2: Front Panel of WGS-5225-8P2S

WGS-5225-8T2SV

Switching Diagnostic Maintenance Smart LCD PLANET Networking & Communication Fiber Managed Magnet Mounting WG5-5225-8125Y RG● PWR R O ● 30Hz 3FP 1000 LHP ACT 100 LHP ACT 2 4 6 8 1 LP/ACT 100 87P 10

Figure 2-1-3: Front Panel of WGS-5225-8T2SV

■ 1 Gigabit TP interface

10/100/1000BASE-T Copper, RJ45 twisted-pair: Up to 100 meters.

■ 1 Gigabit SFP slot

1000BASE-SX/LX/BX mini-GBIC slot, SFP+ (Small Factor Pluggable Plus) Transceiver module supports from 300 meters (multi-mode fiber) up to 10 kilometers (single mode fiber)

Reset 9 10

Reset button

The bottom of the Wall-mount Managed Switch comes with a reset button designed for rebooting the Managed Switch without turning off and on the power. The following is the summary table of reset button functions:

Reset Button Pressed and Released	Function
< 5 sec: System Reboot	Reboot the Managed Switch.
> 5 sec: Factory Default	Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration.The Wall-mount Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings as shown below:Default Username: adminDefault Password: adminDefault IP Address: 192.168.0.100Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0Default Gateway: 192.168.0.254

2.1. LED Indications

WGS-5225-8P2S/WGS-5225-8P2SV

System PoE Interfaces Smart LCD PLANET Networking & Communication PoE+ Fiber Managed Magnet Mounting WGS-5225-8P25V Ground V- V+ DC Input Range 48.66V Ring PWR R.D. SVS 9 6FP 10 1000 LNK ACT 100 LNK ACT 2 4 6 8 LINK/ACT PoE In use 1 3 5 7 End SFP 9 10

■ System

LED Color Function
PWR Green		Lights to indicate that the Switch has power.
SYS Green		Lights to indicate the system is working.
Ring	Green	Lights to indicate that the ERPS Ring has been created successfully.
R.O.	Green	Lights to indicate that Switch has enabled Ring Owner.

Per 10/100/1000BASE-T Port

LED Color Function
LNK/ACT Green		Lights:	To indicate the link through that port is successfully established.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
PoE	Orange	Lights:	To indicate the port is providing DC in-line power.
		Off:	To indicate the connected device is not a PoE Powered Device (PD)

■ Per SFP Interface

LED Color Function
1000LNK/ACT	Green	Lights:	To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 1000Mbps.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
100LNK/ACT	Orange	Lights:	To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 100Mbps.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.

WGS-5225-8T2SV

Switching Diagnostic Maintenance Smart LCD PLANET Networking & Communication Fiber Managed Magnet Mounting WGS-5225-8T2SV Ground V+ V+ DC Input Range 12:48V Ring PWR R.O. SYS SFP 10 1000 LNK ACT 100 LNK ACT 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 SFP 9 10

■ System

LED Color Function
PWR	Green	Lights to indicate that the Switch has power.
SYS	Green	Lights to indicate the system is working.
Ring	Green	Lights to indicate that the ERPS Ring has been created successfully.
R.O.	Green	Lights to indicate that Switch has enabled Ring Owner.

Per 10/100/1000BASE-T Port

LED Color Function
LNK/ACT Green		Lights:	To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 10/100Mbps.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
1000LNK/ACT	Orange	Lights:	To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 1000Mbps.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.

■ Per SFP Interface

LED Color Function
1000LNK/ACT	Green	Lights:	To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 1000Mbps.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
100LNK/ACT	Orange	Lights:	To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 100Mbps.
		Blinks:	To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.

2.1. Wiring Power Input

The Wall-mount Managed Switch features a strong dual power input system (Terminal block and DC jack) incorporated into customer's automation network to enhance system reliability and uptime.

Model\Power Input Range	3-pin Terminal Block DC Jack
WGS-5225-8T2SV	12~48V DC	12~48V DC
WGS-5225-8P2SV	48~56V DC	48~56V DC
WGS-5225-8P2S	48~56V DC	48~56V DC

System PoE Interfaces Smart LCD PLANET Networking & Communication PoE+ Fiber Managed Magnet Mounting WGS-5225-RF25V Ground V- V+ DC Input Range 48-56V Ground V- V+ DC Input Range 48-56V Ring○ ○PWR R.O:○ ○SYS SFP 10 1000 × LNK ● ACT 100 × LNK ● ACT 2 4 6 8 ← LNK/ACT → PoE In-use 1 3 5 7 SFP DC Plug-in 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 Ports 2 100/1000BASE-X SFP Ports

To install the 3-pin Terminal Block Connector on the Wall-mount Managed Switch, simply follow the following steps:

Step 1: Insert positive DC power wire into V+, negative DC power wire into V-, and grounding wire into Ground.

Ground V - V+

Step 2: Tighten the wire-clamp screws for preventing the wires from loosening and plug them into the Wall-mount Managed switch

1. The wire gauge for the terminal block should be in the range of 12 \~ 24 AWG.

2. When performing any of the procedures like inserting the wires or tightening the wire-clamp screws, make sure the power is OFF to prevent from getting an electric shock.

2.2 Installing the Wall-mount Managed Switch

This section describes how to install your Wall-mount Managed Switch and make connections. Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented.

2.2.1 Wall-mount Installation

To install the Wall-mount Managed Switch on the wall, simply follow the following steps:

Step 1: There are 4 holes with 8mm diameter on the wall; the distance between the 2 holes is 165mm and the line through them must be horizontal.

Step 2: Install a conductor pipe inside the board hole and flush the edge of the conductor pipe with the wall surface.

Step 3: Screw the bolts into the conductor pipe. The Wall-mount Managed Switch is between bolts and conductor pipe, as shown below.

System PoE Interfaces GREEN LCD PLANET Monitoring & Communication PoE 4 Fiber Managed Member Mounting WGS-2770-EPTV RnO Open RnO Byte SFP VDD PLANE + ACT VDD +LINE + ACT +1.36/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC +1.52/PC + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2.2.2 Magnet Installation

To install the Wall-mount Managed Switch on a magnetic surface, simply follow the following diagram:

System PoE Interfaces Smart LCD PLANET Smacking & Communication PoE ▲ Fiber Managed | Magnetic Mounting W: 5222-09735 DC Input Range 40 GB 1 2 3 4 5 6 ● Compact ● PNC Bracket 1 2 3 4 5 6 MgO ○ Pout MΩ ○ P1S SF ● HC 10S × 10MP ● ACD 10S × 10MP ● ACD SP ● SP ●

2.2.3 DIN-rail Installation

The DIN-rail kit is included in the package. When the wall-mount application for the Wall-mount Managed Switch needs to be replaced with DIN-rail application, please refer to the following figures to screw the DIN-rail on the Wall-mount Managed Switch. To hang up the Wall-mount Managed Switch, follow the steps below:

Step 1: Screw the DIN-rail on the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with mounting flanges and internal components (no text or symbols)

Step 2: Lightly insert the button of DIN-rail into the track.

PLANET PLANTET ① Push ② Click

Step 3: Check whether the DIN-rail is tightly on the track.

PLANNET NATI 100 MHz/240 MHz (W/100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/240 MHz (W/100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/240 MHz (W/100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/240 MHz (W/100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/240 MHz (W/100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/240 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/240 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/240 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/240 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/240 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/235 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/235 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/235 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/235 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 100 MHz/235 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 105 MHz/235 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 105 MHz/235 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 105 MHz/235 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 105 MHz/235 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATI 105 MHz/235 MHz (W-100 MHz) NATTEN PLANNET NATTEN PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNET PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNETY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNENSITY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHY PLANNETHYT PLANNETHYT PLANNETHYT PLANNETHYT PLANNETHYT PLANNETHYT PLANNETHYT PLANNETHYT PLANNETHYT PLANNETHYT PLANNETHYT

2.2.4 Installing the SFP Transceiver

The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot. The SFP transceivers are hot-pluggable and hot-swappable. You can plug in and out the transceiver to/from any SFP port without having to power down the Managed Switch, as Figure 2-2-4 shows..

MGB-SX/LX 1 2 1000Base-SX/LX LC Fiber

Figure 2-2-4: Plug in the SFP/SFP+ Transceiver

■ 2.2.5 Approved PLANET SFP/SFP+ Transceivers

PLANET Managed Switch supports both single mode and multi-mode SFP transceivers. The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication:

Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver (1000BASE-X SFP)

Model	Speed (Mbps)	Connector Interface	Fiber Mode	Distance	Wavelength (nm)	Operating Temp.
MGB-GT	1000	Copper	--	100m	--	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-SX	1000	LC	Multi Mode	550m	850nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-SX2	1000	LC	Multi Mode	2km	1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-LX	1000	LC	Single Mode	10km	1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-L30	1000	LC	Single Mode	30km	1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-L50	1000	LC	Single Mode	50km	1550nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-L70	1000	LC	Single Mode	70km	1550nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-L120	1000	LC	Single Mode	120km	1550nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-TSX	1000	LC	Multi Mode	550m	850nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MGB-TLX	1000	LC	Single Mode	10km	1310nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MGB-TL30	1000	LC	Single Mode	30km	1310nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MGB-TL70	1000	LC	Single Mode	70km	1550nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C

Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver (1000BASE-BX, Single Fiber Bi-directional SFP)

Model	Speed (Mbps)	Connector Interface	Fiber Mode	Distance	Wavelength (TX/RX)	Operating Temp.
MGB-LA10	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	10km	1310nm/1550nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-LB10	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	10km	1550nm/1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-LA20	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1310nm/1550nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-LB20	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1550nm/1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-LA40	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1310nm/1550nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-LB40	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1550nm/1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-LA60	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	60km	1310nm/1550nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-LB60	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	60km	1550nm/1310nm	0 ~ 60 degrees C
MGB-TLA10	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	10km	1310nm/1550nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MGB-TLB10	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	10km	1550nm/1310nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MGB-TLA20	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1310nm/1550nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MGB-TLB20	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	20km	1550nm/1310nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MGB-TLA40	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1310nm/1550nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MGB-TLB40	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	40km	1550nm/1310nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MGB-TLA60	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	60km	1310nm/1550nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C
MGB-TLB60	1000	WDM(LC)	Single Mode	60km	1550nm/1310nm	-40 ~ 75 degrees C

It is recommended to use PLANET SFP on the Wall-mount Managed Switch. If you insert an SFP transceiver that is not supported, the Wall-mount Managed Switch will not recognize it.

1. Before we connect the Wall-mount Managed Switch to the other network device, we have to make sure both sides of the SFP transceivers are with the same media type, for example, 1000BASE-SX to 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX to 1000BASE-LX.

2. Check whether the fiber-optic cable type matches with the SFP transceiver requirement.

To connect to 1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver, please use the multi-mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type.
To connect to 1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver, please use the single-mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type.

■ Connect the Fiber Cable

1. Insert the duplex LC connector into the SFP transceiver.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to a device with SFPtransceiver installed.
3. Check the LNK/ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Wall-mount Managed Switch. Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly.
4. Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link fails. To function with some fiber-NICs or Media Converters, user has to set the port Link mode to "100M Force" or "1000M Force".

■ Remove the Transceiver Module

1. Make sure there is no network activity anymore.
2. Remove the Fiber-Optic Cable gently.
3. Lift up the lever of the MGB module and turn it to a horizontal position.
4. Pull out the module gently through the lever.

MGB-SX/LX 1 2

Figure 2-2-5: How to Pull Out the SFP Transceiver

Note

Never pull out the module without lifting up the lever of the module and turning it to a horizontal position. Directly pulling out the module could damage the module and the SFPmodule slot of the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

3. SWITCH MANAGEMENT

This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Wall-mount Managed Switch. It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device (workstation or personal computer) and the system. It also contains information about port connection options.

This chapter covers the following topics:

• Requirements
  ■ Management Access Overview
  ■ Remote Telnet Access
  ■ Web Management Access
  ■ SNMP Access
  ■ Standards, Protocols, and Related Reading

3.1 Requirements

■ Workstation running Windows XP/2003, Vista, Windows 7/8/10, MAC OS X, Linux, Fedora, Ubuntu or other platform is compatible with TCP/IP protocols.
■ Workstation is installed with Ethernet NIC (Network Interface Card)
■ Ethernet Port
- Network cables -- Use standard network (UTP) cables with RJ45 connectors.
■ The above workstation is installed with Web browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug-in

It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8.0 or above to access Wall-mount Managed Switch.

3.2 Management Access Overview

The Wall-mount Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods:

■ Remote Telnet Interface
■ Web browser Interface
■ An external SNMP-based network management application

The remote Telnet and Web browser interfaces are embedded in the Wall-mount Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use. Each of these management methods has their own advantages. Table 3-1 compares the three management methods.

Method	Advantages	Disadvantages
RemoteTelnet	• Text-based• Telnet functionality built into Windows XP/2003, Vista, Windows 7/8/10 operating systems• Can be accessed from any location	• Security can be compromised (hackers need only know the IP address)
Web Browser	• Ideal for configuring the switch remotely• Compatible with all popular browsers• Can be accessed from any location• Most visually appealing	• Security can be compromised (hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask)• May encounter lag times on poor connections
SNMP Agent	• Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level• Based on open standards	• Requires SNMP manager software• Least visually appealing of all three methods• Some settings require calculations• Security can be compromised (hackers need only know the community name)

Table 3-1: Management Methods Comparison

3.3 Remote Telnet Management

The Wall-mount Managed Switch also supports telnet for remote management. The switch asks for user name and password for remote login when using telnet; please use "admin" for both username and password.

Default IP address: 192.168.0.100
Username: admin
Password: admin 

Username: admin Password: WGS-5225-8P2S#

Figure 3-3-1 Wall-mount Managed Switch Telnet Login Screen

3.4 Web Management and LCD Touch Screen

The Wall-mount Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Wall-mount Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer. After you set up your IP address for the Wall-mount Managed Switch, you can access the Wall-mount Managed Switch's Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

graph LR
    A["Managed Switch\nIP Address: 192.168.0.100"] -->|RJ-45/UTP Cable| B["PC / Workstation\nwith Web Browser 192.168.0.x"]

Figure 3-4-1: Web Management

You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Wall-mount Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location; the Web Management requires Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0 or later.

PLANET Networking & Communication 2 4 6 8 Ring PWRL R.O. PWR2 FAULT WCS-5225-8P2S System SNMP Port Management Link Aggregation VLANs Spanning Tree Multicast QoS Access Control List Authentication Security MAC Address Table LLDP Diagnostics POE Loop Protection RMON PTP Ring Industrial Protocol HELP Logout Welcome to PLANET WGS-5225-8P2S Industrial L2+ 8-Port 10/100/1000T 802.3at PoE + 2-Port 100/100 Managed Gigabit Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 11F., No.96, Minquan Rd., Xindian Dist., New Taipei City 231, Taiwan (R.O.C.) Tel: [phone] Fax:[phone] Email: [e-mail] Copyright©2017 PLANET Technology Corporation. All rights reserved.

Figure 3-4-2: Web Main Screen of Wall-mount Managed Switch

LCD Touch Screen

The WGS-5225-8P2SV and WGS-5225-8T2SV have a 2.4-inch color LCD touch screen with management functions. Tap the LCD touch screen to wake the LCD touch screen.

System PoE Internet

Figure 3-4-3: To wake the LCD touch screen

The factory default LCD configurations are shown as follows.

Default LCD: Enable

Default Touch Screen: Enable

Default Backlight Timeout: Enable

Default Backlight Timeout Time: 300

Default Read Only Mode: Disable

Default Screen: Main Menu

Default Time Interval: 10

Default Color Scheme: Dark

Default Pin Number: 1234

You can use the Web management interface and click LCD, and then in the LCD Management, change LCD configuration.

LCD LCD Management

LCD Management

LCD	Enable ▼
Touch Screen	Enable ▼
Backlight Timeout	Enable ▼
Backlight Timeout Time	300
Read Only Mode	Disable ▼
Default Screen	Main Menu ▼
Time Interval	10
Color Scheme	DarkLight
Pin Number	1234

3.5 SNMP-based Network Management

You can use an external SNMP-based application to configure and manage the Wall-mount Managed Switch, such as SNMP Network Manager, HP Openview Network Node Management (NNM) or What's Up Gold. This management method requires the SNMP agent on the Wall-mount Managed Switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string. This management method, in fact, uses two community strings: the get community string and the set community string. If the SNMP Network Management Station only knows the set community string, it can read and write to the MIBs. However, if it only knows the get community string, it can only read MIBs. The default gets and sets community strings for the Wall-mount Managed Switch are public.

graph LR
    A["IP Address: 192.168.0.x"] --> B["Internet"]
    C["PC / Workstation with SNMP application"] --> B
    D["Managed Switch\nSNMP Agent Status: Enabled"] --> B
    B --> E["IP Address: 192.168.0.100"]

Figure 3-5: SNMP Management

3.6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility

To easily list the Wall-mount Managed Switch in your Ethernet environment, the Planet Smart Discovery Utility from user's manual CD-ROM is an ideal solution. The following install instructions guide you to running the Planet Smart Discovery Utility.

1. Open the Planet Smart Discovery Utility in administrator PC.
2. Run this utility and the following screen appears.

PLANET Smart Discovery Lite File Option Help Refresh Exit PLANET Networking & Communication MAC Address Device Name Version DeviceIP NewPassword IP Address NetMask Gateway Description Select Adapter: 192.168.0.10 (00:30:4F:97:72:2D) Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Device Update Multi Update All Connect to Device Device Message

Figure 3-6: Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen

If there are two LAN cards or above in the same administrator PC, choose a different LAN card by using the "Select Adapter" tool.

1. Press "Refresh" button for the currently connected devices in the discovery list as the screen is shown as follows.

PLANET Smart Discovery Lite File Option Help Refresh Exit PLANET Networking & Communication MAC Address Device Name Version DeviceIP NewPassword IP Address NetMask Gateway Description 1 00-30-01-02-03-04 WGS-5225-8T2 1.366180123 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.100 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 PLANETWGS-5225-8T2 Select Adapter : 192.168.0.10 (00:30:4F:97:72:2D) Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Device Update Multi Update All Connect to Device Device : WGS-5225-8T2SV (00-30-01-02-0) Get Device Information done.

Figure 3-7: Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen

1. This utility shows all the necessary information from the devices, such as MAC Address, Device Name, firmware version and Device IP Subnet address. A new password, IP Subnet address and description can be assigned to the devices.

2. After setup is completed, press "Update Device", "Update Multi" or "Update All" button to take affect. The meaning of the 3 buttons above are shown below:

■ Update Device: use current setting on one single device.
■ Update Multi: use current setting on choose multi-devices.
■ Update All: use current setting on whole devices in the list.

The same functions mentioned above also can be found in "Option" tools bar.

1. To click the "Control Packet Force Broadcast" function, it allows new setting value to be assigned to the Web Smart Switch under a different IP subnet address.
2. Press "Connect to Device" button and then the Web login screen appears in Figure 3-7.
3. Press "Exit" button to shut down the planet Smart Discovery Utility.

This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web-based management.

About Web-based Management

The Wall-mount Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Wall-mount Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer.

The Web-based Management supports Internet Explorer 7.0. It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reducing network bandwidth consumption, enhancing access speed and presenting an easy viewing screen.

By default, IE7.0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets. The user has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports.

The Wall-mount Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection, making sure the manager PC must be set on same the IP subnet address with the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

For example, the default IP address of the Wall-mount Managed Switch is 192.168.0.100, then the manager PC should be set at 192.168.0.x (where x is a number between 1 and 254, except 100), and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.

If you have changed the default IP address of the Wall-mount Managed Switch to 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 via console, then the manager PC should be set at 192.168.1.x (where x is a number between 2 and 254) to do the relative configuration on manager PC.

graph LR
    A["Managed Switch\nIP Address: 192.168.0.100"] -->|RJ-45/UTP Cable| B["PC / Workstation\nwith Web Browser 192.168.0.x"]

Figure 4-1-1: Web Management

■ Logging on to the Wall-mount Managed Switch

1. Use Internet Explorer 7.0 or above Web browser. Enter the factory-default IP address to access the Web interface. The factory-default IP Address is as follows:

http://192.168.0.100

1. When the following login screen appears, please enter the default username "admin" with password "admin" (or the username/password you have changed via console) to login the main screen of Wall-mount Managed Switch. The login screen in Figure 4-1-2 appears.

Windows Security The server 192.168.0.100 at Logging requires a username and password. Warning: This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner (basic authentication without a secure connection). admin ...... Remember my credentials OK Cancel

Figure 4-1-2: Login Screen

Default User name: admin

Default Password: admin

After entering the username and password, the main screen appears as Figure 4-1-3.

PLANET Ritability & Transaction WGS-5225-8P2S Welcome to PLANET WGS-5225-8P2S Industrial L2+ 8-Port 10/100/1000T 802.3at PoE + 2-Port 100/100 Managed Gigabit Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 11F, No.96, Minquan Rd., Xindian Dist., New Taipei City 231, Taiwan (R.O.C.) Tel: [phone] Fax:[phone] Email: [e-mail] Copyright©2017 PLANET Technology Corporation. All rights reserved. HELP Logout

Figure 4-1-3: Default Main Page

Now, you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Wall-mount Managed Switch by Web interface. The Switch Menu on the left of the web page lets you access all the commands and statistics the Wall-mount Managed Switch provides.

1. It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7.0 or above to access Wall-mount Managed Switch.
2. The changed IP address takes effect immediately after clicking on the Save button. From now on, you need to use the new IP address to access the Internet.

1. For security reason, please change and memorize the new password after this first setup.
2. Only accept command in lowercase letter.

4.1 Main Web Page

The Wall-mount Managed Switch provides a Web-based browser interface for configuring and managing it. This interface allows you to access the Wall-mount Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice. This chapter describes how to use the Wall-mount Managed Switch's Web browser interface to configure and manage it.

Main Functions Menu Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status WGS-5225-8P2S Welcome to PLANET WGS-5225-8P2S Industrial L2+ 8-Port 10/100/1000T 802.3at PoE + 2-Port 100/100 Managed Gigabit Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 11F., No.95, Minquan Rd., Xindian Dist., New Taipei City 231, Taiwan (R.O.C.) Tel: [phone] Fax:[phone] Email: [e-mail] Copyright©2017 PLANET Technology Corporation. All rights reserved. HELP Log Put Help Button Figure 4-1-4: Main Page Main Screen

Panel Display

The web agent displays an image of the Wall-mount Managed Switch's ports. The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports, including Link up or Link down. Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page. The port states are illustrated as follows:

State Disabled Down Link RJ45 Ports SFP Ports

Main Menu

Using the onboard web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and control the Wall-mount Managed Switch, and all its ports, or monitor network conditions. Via the Web-Management, the administrator can set up the Wall-mount Managed Switch by selecting the functions those listed in the Main Function. The screen in Figure 4-1-5 appears.

System SNMP Port Management Link Aggregation VLANs Spanning Tree Multicast QoS Access Control List Authentication Security MAC Address Table LLDP Diagnostics PoE Loop Protection RMON PTP Ring Industrial Protocol

Figure 4-1-5: Wall-mount Managed Switch Main Functions Menu

4.2 System

Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Wall-mount Managed Switch. Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information.

System Information The Managed Switch system information is provided here.
IP Configuration Configures the Managed Switch with IPv4/IPv6 interface and IP routes on this page.
■ IP Status This page displays the status of the IP protocol layer. The status is defined by the IP interfaces, the IP routes and the neighbour cache (ARP cache) status.
■ Users Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users. Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser.
- Privilege Levels This page provides an overview of the privilege levels.
NTP Configuration Configure NTP server on this page.
Time Configuration Configure time parameter on this page.
■ UPnP Configure UPnP on this page.
DHCP Relay Configure DHCP Relay on this page.
DHCP Relay Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP relay.
CPU Load This page displays the CPU load, using an SVG graph.
System Log The Managed Switch system log information is provided here.
Detailed Log The Managed Switch system detailed log information is provided here.
Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page.
■ SMTP Configuration Configuration SMTP parameters on this page.
Web Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the Managed Switch.
TFTP Firmware Upgrade Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server
■ Save Startup Config This copies running-config to startup-config, thereby ensuring that the currently active configuration will be used at the next reboot.
Configuration Download You can download the files on the switch.
Configuration Upload You can upload the files to the switch.
Configuration Activate You can activate the configuration file present on the switch.
Configuration Delete You can delete the writable files which are stored in flash.
■ Image Select Configuration active or alternate firmware on this page.
■ Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the Managed Switch on this page. Only the IP configuration is retained.
System Reboot You can restart the Managed Switch on this page. After restarting, the Managed Switch will boot normally.

4.2.1 System Information

The System Info page provides information for the current device information. System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address, software version and system uptime. The screen in Figure 4-2-1 appears.

System Information

System
Contact Name Location	WGS-5225-8T2SV
	Hardware
MAC Address Temperature	00-30-01-02-03-0447.0 C - 116.0 F
	Time
System Date System Uptime	1970-01-01 Thu 00:02:44+00:000d 00:02:44
	Software
Software Version Software Date	1.3661801232018-01-23T11:35:32+08:00

Auto-refresh

Refresh

Figure 4-2-1: System Information Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Contact	The system contact configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Contact.
• Name	The system name configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Name.
• Location	The system location configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Location.
• MAC Address	The MAC Address of this Wall-mount Managed Switch.
• Power	The Power 1 and Power 2 ON/OFF Status display.
• Temperature	The Temperature shows the status of the current temperature of the switch.
• System Date	The current (GMT) system time and date. The system time is obtained through the configured SNTP Server, if any.
• System Uptime	The period of time the device has been operational.
• Software Version	The software version of the Wall-mount Managed Switch.
• Software Date	The date when the switch software was produced.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Click to refresh the page.

4.2.2 IP Configuration

The IP Configuration includes the IP Configuration, IP Interface and IP Routes. The configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration. The maximum number of interfaces supported is 128 and the maximum number of routes is 32.

The screen in Figure 4-2-2 appears.

IP Configuration Mode Host DNS Server No DNS server DNS Proxy IP Interfaces Delete VLAN IPv4 DHCP IPv4 IPv6 Enable Fallback Current Lease Address Mask Length Address Mask Length 1 0 192.168.0.100 24 Add Interface IP Routes Delete Network Mask Length Gateway Next Hop VLAN 0.0.0.0 0 192.168.0.254 0 Add Route Apply Reset

Figure 4-2-2: IP Configuration Page Screenshot

The current column is used to show the active IP configuration.

Object Description
IP Configurations	Mode	Configure whether the IP stack should act as a Host or a Router. In Host mode, IP traffic between interfaces will not be routed. In Router mode traffic is routed between all interfaces.
	DNS Server	This setting controls the DNS name resolution done by the switch. The following modes are supported:■ From any DHCP interfacesThe first DNS server offered from a DHCP lease to a DHCP-enabled interface will be used.■ No DNS serverNo DNS server will be used.■ ConfiguredExplicitly provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation.■ From this DHCP interface
			Specify from which DHCP-enabled interface a provided DNS server should be preferred.
	DNS Proxy		When DNS proxy is enabled, system will relay DNS requests to the currently configured DNS server, and reply as a DNS resolver to the client devices on the network.
IP Address	Delete		Select this option to delete an existing IP interface.
	VLAN		The VLAN associated with the IP interface. Only ports in this VLAN will be able to access the IP interface. This field is only available for input when creating an new interface.
	IPv4 DHCP	Enabled	Enable the DHCP client by checking this box.
		Fallback	The number of seconds for trying to obtain a DHCP lease.
		Current Lease	For DHCP interfaces with an active lease, this column show the current interface address, as provided by the DHCP server.
	IPv4 Address		Provide the IP address of this Wall-mount Managed Switch in dotted decimal notation.
			Mask Length
	IPv6 Address		Provide the IP address of this Wall-mount Managed Switch. A IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:)
			Mask Length
			The IPv6 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length). Valid values are between 1 and 128 bits for a IPv6 address.
IP Routes	Delete		Select this option to delete an existing IP route.
	Network		The destination IP network or host address of this route. Valid format is dotted decimal notation or a valid IPv6 notation. A default route can use the value 0.0.0.0or IPv6::notation.
	Mask Length		The destination IP network or host mask, in number of bits (prefix length).
	Gateway		The IP address of the IP gateway. Valid format is dotted decimal notation or a valid IPv6 notation. Gateway and Network must be of the same type.
	Next Hop VLAN		The VLAN ID (VID) of the specific IPv6 interface associated with the gateway.

Buttons

Add Interface

: Click to add a new IP interface. A maximum of 128 interfaces is supported.

Add Route

Click to add a new IP route. A maximum of 32 routes is supported.

Apply

Click to apply changes.

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.3 IP Status

IP Status displays the status of the IP protocol layer. The status is defined by the IP interfaces, the IP routes and the neighbour cache (ARP cache) status. The screen in Figure 4-2-3 appears.

IP Interfaces

Interface	Type	Address	Status
OS:lo	LINK	00-00-00-00-00-00
OS:lo	IPv4	127.0.0.1/8
OS:lo	IPv6	fe80:1::1/64
OS:lo	IPv6	::1/128
VLAN1	LINK	00-30-4f-11-22-33
VLAN1	IPv4	192.168.0.100/20
VLAN1	IPv6	fe80:2::230:4fff:fe11:2233/64

IP Routes

Network	Gateway	Status
127.0.0.1/32	127.0.0.1
192.168.0.0/24	VLAN1
192.168.0.0/20	VLAN1
224.0.0.0/4	127.0.0.1
::1/128	::1

Neighbour cache

IP Address	Link Address
192.168.0.123	VLAN1:00-30-4f-91-e6-45
fe80:2::230:4fff.fe11:2233	VLAN1:00-30-4f-11-22-33

Figure 4-2-3: IP Status Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• IP Interfaces	Interface	The name of the interface.
	Type	The address type of the entry. This may be LINK or IPv4.
	Address	The current address of the interface (of the given type).
	Status	The status flags of the interface (and/or address).
• IP Routes	Network	The destination IP network or host address of this route.
	Gateway	The gateway address of this route.
	Status The status flags of the route.
• Neighbor Cache	IP Address	The IP address of the entry.
	Link Address	The Link (MAC) address for which a binding to the IP address given exist.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page.

4.2.4 Users Configuration

This Page provides an overview of the current users. Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser. After setup is completed, press "Apply" button to take effect. Please login web interface with new user name and password, the screen in Figure 4-2-4 appears.

Users Configuration User Name Privilege Level admin 15 Add New User

Figure 4-2-4: Users Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
User Name	The name identifying the user. This is also a link to Add/Edit User.
Privilege Level	The privilege level of the user.The allowed range is 1 to 15. If the privilege level value is 15, it can access all groups, i.e. that is granted the fully control of the device. But others value need to refer to each group privilege level. User's privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group.By default setting, most groups privilege level 5 has the read-only access and privilege level 10 has the read-write access. And the system maintenance (software upload, factory defaults and etc.) need user privilege level 15.Generally, the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account, privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account.

Buttons

Add New User

Click to add a new user.

Add / Edit User

This Page configures a user – add, edit or delete user.

Add User User Settings User Name Password Password (again) Privilege Level 1 Apply Reset Cancel

Figure 4-2-5: Add / Edit User Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
•Username	A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 31. The valid user name is a combination of letters, numbers and underscores.
•Password	The password of the user. The allowed string length is 1 to 31.
•Password (again)	Please enter the user's new password here again to confirm.
•Privilege Level	The privilege level of the user.The allowed range is 1 to 15. If the privilege level value is 15, it can access all groups, i.e. that is granted the fully control of the device. But others value need to refer to each group privilege level. User's privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes.

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Cancel

Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users.

Delete User

Delete the current user. This button is not available for new configurations (Add new user)

By default setting, most groups privilege level 5 has the read-only access and privilege level 10 has the read-write access. And the system maintenance (software upload, factory defaults and etc.) need use: privilege level 15.

Generally, the privilege level 15 can be used for an ad ministrator account, privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account.

Once the new user is added, the new user entry is shown on the Users Configuration Page.

Users Configuration User Name Privilege Level admin 15 guest 5 Test 1 Add New User

Figure 4-2-6: User Configuration Page Screenshot

If you forget the new password after changing the default password, please press the "Reset" button on the front panel of the Wall-mount Managed Switch for over 10 seconds and then release it. The current setting including VLAN will be lost and the Wall-mount Managed Switch will restore to the default mode.

4.2.5 Privilege Levels

This Page provides an overview of the privilege levels. After setup is completed, please press "Apply" button to take effect. Please login web interface with new user name and password and the screen in Figure 4-2-7 appears.

Privilege Level Configuration

Group Name	Privilege Levels
	Configuration Read-only	Configuration/Execute Read/write	Status/Statistics Read-only	Status/Statistics Read/write
Aggregation	5	10	5	10
DHCP_Client	5	10	5	10
Diagnostics	5	10	5	10
DIDO	5	10	5	10
ERPS	5	10	5	10
Fan_Control	5	10	5	10
IPMC_Snooping	5	10	5	10
LACP	5	10	5	10
LLDP	5	10	5	10
Loop_Protect	5	10	5	10
MAC_Table	5	10	5	10
Maintenance	15	15	15	15
MEP	5	10	5	10
Mirroring	5	10	5	10
MVR	5	10	5	10
NTP	5	10	5	10
Ports	5	10	1	10
Private_VLANs	5	10	5	10
PTP	5	10	5	10
QoS	5	10	5	10
Security	5	10	5	10
Spanning_Tree	5	10	5	10
System	5	10	1	10
UPnP	5	10	5	10
VLAN_Translation	5	10	5	10
VLANs	5	10	5	10
Voice_VLAN	5	10	5	10

Figure 4-2-7: Privilege Levels Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Group Name	The name identifying the privilege group. In most cases, a privilege level group consists of a single module (e.g. LACP, RSTP or QoS), but a few of them containmore than one. The following description defines these privilege level groups in details:■ System: Contact, Name, Location, Timezone, Log.■ Security: Authentication, System Access Management, Port (contains Dot1x port, MAC based and the MAC Address Limit), ACL, HTTPS, SSH, ARP Inspection and IP source guard.■ IP: Everything except 'ping'.■ Port: Everything except 'VeriPHY'.■ Diagnostics: 'ping' and 'VeriPHY'.■ Maintenance: CLI- System Reboot, System Restore Default, System Password, Configuration Save, Configuration Load and Firmware Load. Web- Users, Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance.■ Debug: Only present in CLI.
• Privilege Level	Every privilege level group has an authorization level for the following sub groups:■ Configuration read-only■ Configuration/execute read-write■ Status/statistics read-only■ Status/statistics read-write (e.g. for clearing of statistics).

Buttons

Click to apply changes.

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.6 NTP Configuration

Configure NTP on this Page. NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. NTP uses UDP (data grams) as transport layer. You can specify NTP Servers. The NTP Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-8 appears.

NTP Configuration

Mode Disabled Server 1 pool.ntp.org Server 2 europe.pool.ntp.org Server 3 north-america.pool.ntp.org Server 4 asia.pool.ntp.org Server 5 oceania.pool.ntp.org Apply Reset

Figure 4-2-8: NTP Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the NTP mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable NTP mode operation. When enable NTP mode operation, the agent forward and to transfer NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.■ Disabled: Disable NTP mode operation.
• Server #	Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field (:).For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also used a following legally IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.

Buttons

Click to apply changes.

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.7 Time Configuration

Configure Time Zone on this Page. A Time Zone is a region that has a uniform standard time for legal, commercial, and social purposes. It is convenient for areas in close commercial or other communication to keep the same time, so time zones tend to follow the boundaries of countries and their subdivisions. The Time Zone Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-9 appears

Time Zone Configuration

Time Zone Configuration Time Zone None Acronym (0 - 16 characters)

Daylight Saving Time Configuration

Daylight Saving Time Mode Daylight Saving Time Disabled Start Time Settings Month Jan Date 1 Year 2000 Hours 0 Minutes 0 End Time Settings Month Jan Date 1 Year 2000 Hours 0 Minutes 0 Offset Settings Offset 1 (1 - 1440) Minutes Apply Reset

Figure 4-2-9: Time Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Time Zone	Lists various Time Zones worldwide. Select appropriate Time Zone from the drop-down menu and click Save to set.
• Acronym	User can set the acronym of the time zone. This is a User configurable acronym to identify the time zone. ( Range : Up to 16 characters )
• Daylight Saving Time	This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration. Select 'Disable' to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration. Select 'Recurring' and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year. Select 'Non-Recurring' and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration. ( Default : Disabled ).
• Start Time Settings	• Week - Select the starting week number.• Day - Select the starting day.• Month - Select the starting month.• Hours - Select the starting hour.• Minutes - Select the starting minute.
• End Time Settings	• Week - Select the ending week number.• Day - Select the ending day.• Month - Select the ending month.• Hours - Select the ending hour.• Minutes - Select the ending minute
• Offset Settings	Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. ( Range: 1 to 1440 )

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes.

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.8 UPnP

Configure UPnP on this Page. UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play. The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home (data sharing, communications, and entertainment) and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components. The UPnP Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-10 appears.

UPnP Configuration Mode Disabled TTL 4 Advertising Duration 100 Apply Reset

Figure 4-2-10: UPnP Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the UPnP operation mode. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable UPnP mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable UPnP mode operation.When the mode is enabled, two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPnP related packets to CPU. The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is
	disabled.
• TTL	The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages. Valid values are in the range of 1 to 255.
• Advertising Duration	The duration, carried in SSDP packets, is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive a SSDP advertisement message from this switch. If a control point does not receive any message within the duration, it will think that the switch no longer exists. Due to the unreliable nature of UDP, in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one-half of the advertising duration. In the implementation, the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one-half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds. Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

WGS-5225-8T2SV

Figure 4-2-11: UPnP devices show on Windows My Network Place

4.2.9 DHCP Relay

Configure DHCP Relay on this Page. DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.

The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies. Specifically the option works by setting two sub-options:

■ Circuit ID (option 1)
■ Remote ID (option2).

The Circuit ID sub-option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on.

The Remote ID sub-option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit.

The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is "vlan_id" "module_id" "port_no". The parameter of "vlan_id" is the first two bytes representing the VLAN ID. The parameter of "module_id" is the third byte for the module ID (in standalone switch it always equals 0; in stackable switch it means switch ID). The parameter of "port_no" is the fourth byte and it means the port number.

The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length, and the value equals the DHCP relay agent's MAC address. The DHCP Relay Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-12 appears.

DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Disabled Relay Server 0.0.0.0 Relay Information Mode Disabled Relay Information Policy Keep Apply Reset

Figure 4-2-12 DHCP Relay Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Relay Mode	Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable DHCP relay mode operation. When enabling DHCP relay mode operation, the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain. And the DHCP broadcast message won't flood for security considered.■ Disabled: Disable DHCP relay mode operation.
• Relay Server	Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address. A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server whenthey are not on the same subnet domain.
• Relay Information Mode	Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable DHCP relay information mode operation. When enabling DHCP relay information mode operation, the agent inserts specific information (option82) into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and removing it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client. It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled.■ Disabled: Disable DHCP relay information mode operation.
• Relay Information Policy	Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy. When enabling DHCP relay information mode operation, if agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information. It will enforce the policy. And it only works under DHCP relay information operation mode enabled. Possible policies are:■ Replace: Replace the original relay information when receiving a DHCP message that already contains it.■ Keep: Keep the original relay information when receiving a DHCP message that already contains it.■ Drop: Drop the package when receiving a DHCP message that already contains relay information.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.10 DHCP Relay Statistics

This Page provides statistics for DHCP relay. The DHCP Relay Statistics screen in Figure 4-2-13 appears.

DHCP Relay Statistics Server Statistics Transmit to Server Transmit Error Receive from Server Receive Missing Agent Option Receive Missing Circuit ID Receive Missing Remote ID Receive Bad Circuit ID Receive Bad Remote ID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Client Statistics Transmit to Client Transmit Error Receive from Client Receive Agent Option Replace Agent Option Keep Agent Option Drop Agent Option 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Auto Refresh Refresh Clear

Figure 4-2-13: DHCP Relay Statistics Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Server Statistics

Object Description
• Transmit to Server	The packets number that is relayed from client to server.
• Transmit Error	The packets number whose errors are sending to clients.
• Receive from Server	The packets number that is received from server.
• Receive Missing Agent Option	The packets number that is received without agent information options.
• Receive Missing Circuit ID	The packets number whose missing circuit ID is received.
• Receive Missing Remote ID	The packets number whose missing remote ID is received.
• Receive Bad Circuit ID	The packets number whose Circuit ID does not match known circuit ID.
Receive Bad Remote ID	The packets number whose Remote ID does not match known remote ID.

Client Statistics

Object Description
• Transmit to Client	The packets number that is relayed from server to client.
• Transmit Error	The packets number that is erroneously sent to servers.
• Receive from Client	The packets number that is received from server.
• Receive Agent Option	The packets number that is received with relay agent information option.
• Replace Agent Option	The packets number that is replaced with relay agent information option.
• Keep Agent Option	The packets number that keeps relay agent information option.
• Drop Agent Option	The packets number that drops relay agent information option.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clear

Clears all statistics.

4.2.11 CPU Load

This Page displays the CPU load, using an SVG graph. The load is measured as average over the last 100ms, 1sec and 10 seconds intervals. The last 120 samples are graphed, and the last numbers are displayed as text as well. In order to display the SVG graph, your browser must support the SVG format. Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support. Specifically, at the time of writing, Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG. The CPU Load screen in Figure 4-2-14 appears.

Figure 4-2-14: CPU Load Page Screenshot

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

If your browser cannot display anything on this Page, please download Adobe SVG tool and install it in your computer.

4.2.12 System Log

The Wall-mount Managed Switch system log information is provided here. The System Log screen in Figure 4-2-15 appears.

System Log Information

Auto-refresh Refresh Clear Hide Download |<< << >> >>| Level All Clear Level All

The total number of entries is 5 for the given level.
Start from ID 1 with 20 entries per page.

ID	Level	Time	Message
1	Informational	1970-01-01 Thu 00:00:02+00.00	PWR2 ON.
2	Informational	1970-01-01 Thu 00:00:03+00.00	SYS-BOOTING: Switch just made a cold boot.
3	Notice	1970-01-01 Thu 00:00:08+00.00	LINK-UPDOWN: Interface Vlan 1, changed state to down
4	Notice	1970-01-01 Thu 00:00:26+00.00	LINK-UPDOWN: Interface GigabitEthernet 1/1, changed state to up
5	Notice	1970-01-01 Thu 00:00:27+00.00	LINK-UPDOWN: Interface Vlan 1, changed state to up.

Figure 4-2-15: System Log Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• ID	The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.
• Level	The level of the system log entry. The following level types are supported:■ Info: Information level of the system log.■ Warning: Warning level of the system log.■ Error: Error level of the system log.■ All: All levels.
• Clear Level	To clear the system log entry level. The following level types are supported:■ Info: Information level of the system log.■ Warning: Warning level of the system log.■ Error: Error level of the system log.■ All: All levels.
• Time	The time of the system log entry.
• Message	The message of the system log entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Updates the system log entries, starting from the current entry ID.

Clear

Flushes the selected log entries.

Hide

Hides the selected log entries.

Download

Downloads the selected log entries.

k<

Updates the system log entries, starting from the first available entry ID.

<< Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.

: Updates the system log entries, starting from the last entry currently displayed.
|: Updates the system log entries, ending at the last available entry ID.

4.2.13 Detailed Log

The Wall-mount Managed Switch system detailed log information is provided here. The Detailed Log screen in Figure 4-2-16 appears.

Detailed System Log Information Download Refresh k<< << >> >>1 Print ID 1 Message Level Info Time 1970-01-01 Thu 00:00:09+00:00 Message Switch just made a cold boot.

Figure 4-2-16: Detailed Log Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• ID	The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.
• Message	The message of the system log entry.

Buttons

Download: Download the system log entry to the current entry ID.
Refresh: Updates the system log entry to the current entry ID.
k<: Updates the system log entry to the first available entry ID.
<<: Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID.

: Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID.
|: Updates the system log entry to the last available entry ID.
Print: Print the system log entry to the current entry ID.

4.2.14 Remote Syslog

Configure remote syslog on this Page. The Remote Syslog screen in Figure 4-2-17 appears.

System Log Configuration Server Mode Disabled Server Address Syslog Level Info Apply Reset

Figure 4-2-17: Remote Syslog Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object	Description
• Mode	Indicates the server mode operation. When the mode operation is enabled, the syslog message will send out to syslog server. The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back to sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments. The syslog packet will always be sent out even if the syslog server does not exist. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable remote syslog mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable remote syslog mode operation.
• Syslog Server IP	Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server. If the switch provides DNS feature, it also can be a host name.
• Syslog Level	Indicates what kind of message will be sent to syslog server. Possible modes are:■ Info: Send information, warnings and errors.■ Warning: Send warnings and errors.■ Error: Send errors.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.15 SMTP Configuration

This Page facilitates an SMTP Configuration on the switch. The SMTP Configure screen in Figure 4-2-18 appears.

SMTP Configuration SMTP Mode Enable SMTP Server planet.com.tw (< 128 Digits) test SMTP Port 25 (1 ~ 65535) SMTP Authentication Enable Authentication User Name 1234 (< 64 Digits) Authentication Password ●●●● (< 21 Digits) E-mail From [e-mail] (< 128 Digits) E-mail Subject PLANET (< 64 Digits) E-mail 1 To [e-mail] (< 128 Digits) E-mail 2 To [e-mail] (< 128 Digits) Save Reset

Figure 4-2-18: SMTP Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• SMTP Mode	Controls whether SMTP is enabled on this switch.
• SMTP Server	Type the SMTP server name or the IP address of the SMTP server.
• SMTP Port	Set port number of SMTP service.
• SMTP Authentication	Controls whether SMTP Authentication is enabled If authentication is required when an e-mail is sent.
• Authentication User Name	Type the user name for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable.
• Authentication Password	Type the password for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable.
• E-mail From	Type the sender's E-mail address. This address is used for replying e-mails.
• E-mail Subject	Type the subject/title of the e-mail.
• E-mail 1 To	Type the receiver's e-mail address.
• E-mail 2 To

Buttons

test

Send a test mail to mail server to check this account is available or not.

Save

Click to save changes.

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.16 Fault Alarm

This Page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch. The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4-2-20 appears.

Fault Alarm Control Configuration Fault Alarm Output Enable Record Action Power Alarm Enable System Log SNMP Trap Port Fail Power Fail DC 1 DC 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Apply Reset

Figure 4-2-20: Fault Alarm Control Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Enable	Controls whether Fault Alarm is enabled on this switch.
Record	Controls whether Record is sending System log or SNMP Trap or both.
Action	Controls whether Port Fail or Power Fail or both for fault detecting.
Power Alarm	Controls whether DC1 or DC2 or both for fault detecting.
Port Alarm	Controls which Ports or all for fault detecting.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.17 Web Firmware Upgrade

This Page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch. The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4-2-21 appears.

Firmware Upload Browse... Upload

Figure 4-2-21: Web Firmware Upgrade Page Screenshot

To open Firmware Upgrade screen, perform the following:

1. Click System -> Web Firmware Upgrade.
2. The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4-2-22.
3. Click the "button of the Main Page, the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware."
4. Select on the firmware then click "Upload", the Software Upload Progress would show the file with upload status.
5. Once the software is loaded to the system successfully, the following screen appears. The system will load the new software after reboot.

Firmware Upgrade in progress The uploaded firmware image is being transferred to flash. The system will reboot after the Upgrade. Until then, do not reset or power off the device! Completed!

Figure 4-2-22: Software Successfully Loaded Notice Screen

DO NOT Power OFF the Wall-mount Managed Switch until the update progress is completed.

Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade Page without pressing the "OK" button after the image is loaded. Or the system won't apply the new firmware. User has to repeat the firmware upgrade process.

4.2.18 TFTP Firmware Upgrade

The Firmware Upgrade Page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Wall-mount Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP server in the network. Before updating, make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP server. The TFTP Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4-2-23 appears.

TFTP Firmware Upgrade TFTP Server IP Firmware File Name Upgrade

Figure 4-2-23: TFTP Firmware Update Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
TFTP Server IP	Fill in your TFTP server IP address.
Firmware File Name	The name of firmware image.(Maximum length: 24 characters)

Buttons

Click to upgrade firmware.

DO NOT Power OFF the Wall-mount Managed Switch until the update progress is completed.

Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade Page without pressing the "OK" button after the image is loaded. Or the system won't apply the new firmware. User has to repeat the firmware upgrade process.

4.2.19 Save Startup Config

This function allows to save the current configuration, thereby ensuring that the current active configuration can be used at the next reboot screen in Figure 4-2-24 as shown below. After saving the configuration, the screen in Figure 4-2-25 appears.

Save Running Configuration to startup-config

Please note: The generation of the configuration file may be time consuming, depending on the amount of non-default configuration.

Save Configuration

Figure 4-2-24: Configuration Save Page Screenshot

Save Running Configuration to startup-config

startup-config saved successfully.

Figure 4-2-25: Finish Saving Page Screenshot

4.2.20 Configuration Download

The switch stores its configuration in a number of text files in CLI format. The files are either virtual (RAM-based) or stored in flash on the switch.

There are three system files:

• running-config: A virtual file that represents the currently active configuration on the switch. This file is volatile.
• startup-config: The startup configuration for the switch reads at boot time.
• default-config: A read-only file with vendor-specific configuration. This file is read when the system is restored to default settings.

It is also possible to store up to two other files and apply them to running-config, thereby switching configuration.

Configuration Download page allows the downloads of the running-config, startup-config and default-config on the switch.

Please refer to Figure 4-2-26 shown below.

Download Configuration

Select configuration file to save.

Please note: running-config may take a while to prepare for download.

File Name

○ running-config

○ default-config

○ startup-config

Download Configuration

Figure 4-2-26: Configuration Download Page Screenshot

4.2.21 Configuration Upload

Configuration Upload page allows the uploads of the running-config and startup-config on the switch. Please refer to Figure 4-2-27 shown below.

Upload Configuration File To Upload Browse... Destination File File Name Parameters ○ running-config ● Replace ○ Merge ○ startup-config ○ Create new file Upload Configuration

Figure 4-2-27: Configuration Upload Page Screenshot

If the destination is running-config, the file will be applied to the switch configuration. This can be done in two ways:

• Replace mode: The current configuration is fully replaced with the configuration in the uploaded file.
• Merge mode: The uploaded file is merged into running-config.

If the file system is full (i.e. contains the three system files mentioned above plus two other files), it is not possible to create new files, but an existing file must be overwritten or another deleted first.

4.2.22 Configuration Activate

Configuration Activate page allows to activate the startup-config and default-config files present on the switch. Please refer to Figure 4-2-28 shown below.

Activate Configuration

Select configuration file to activate. The previous configuration will be completely replaced, potentially leading to loss of management connectivity.

Please note: The activated configuration file will not be saved to startup-config automatically.

Figure 4-2-28: Configuration Activate Page Screenshot

It is possible to activate any of the configuration files present on the switch, except for running-config which represents the currently active configuration.

Select the file to activate and click Activate Configuration. This will initiate the process of completely replacing the existing configuration with that of the selected file.

4.2.23 Configuration Delete

Configuration Delete page allows to delete the startup-config and default-config files which are stored in FLASH. If this is done and the switch is rebooted without a prior Save operation, this effectively resets the switch to default configuration. Please refer to Figure 4-2-29 shown below.

Delete Configuration File Select configuration file to delete. File Name startup-config Delete Configuration File

Figure 4-2-29: Configuration Delete Page Screenshot

4.2.24 Image Select

This Page provides information about the active and alternate (backup) firmware images in the device, and allows you to revert to the alternate image. The web Page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware images. The Image Select screen in Figure 4-2-30 appears.

In case the active firmware image is the alternate image, only the "Active Image" table is shown. In this case, the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled.

1. If the alternate image is active (due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention), uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this.

2. The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases. This does not constitute an error.

Software Image Selection

Active Image
Image	managed
Version	1.366180123
Date	2018-01-23T11:35:32+08:00

	Alternate Image
Image	managed.bk
Version	1.366180116
Date	2018-01-16T10:32:36+08:00

Activate Alternate Image

Figure 4-2-30: Software Image Selection Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Image	The flash index name of the firmware image. The name of primary (preferred) image is image, the alternate image is named image.bk.
• Version	The version of the firmware image.
• Date	The date where the firmware was produced.

Buttons

Activate Alternate Image

Click to use the alternate image. This button may be disabled depending on system state.

4.2.25 Factory Default

You can reset the configuration of the Wall-mount Managed Switch on this Page. Only the IP configuration is retained. The new configuration is available immediately, which means that no restart is necessary. The Factory Default screen in Figure 4-2-31 appears.

Factory Defaults

Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults?

The default configuration here doesn't involve IP address.

You can reset configuration included IP by means of pushing the reset button on the machine.

Yes No

Figure 4-2-31: Factory Default Page Screenshot

Buttons

Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults.

Click to return to the Port State Page without resetting the configuration.

To reset the Wall-mount Managed Switch to the Factory default setting, you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds. After the device be r ebooted. You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192.168.0.xx.

4.2.26 System Reboot

The Reboot Page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location. Once the Reboot button is pressed, users have to re-login the Web interface for about 60 seconds later as the System Reboot screen in Figure 4-2-32 appears.

Restart Device

Are you sure you want to perform a Restart?

Figure 4-2-32: System Reboot Page Screenshot

Buttons

Click to reboot the system.

Click to return to the Port State Page without rebooting the system.

You can also check the SYS LED on the front panel to identify whether the System is loaded completely or not. If the SYS LED is blinking, then it is in the firmware load stage; if the SYS LED light is on, you can use the Web browser to login the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

4.3 Simple Network Management Protocol

4.3.1 SNMP Overview

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite. SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan for network growth.

An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components: Network management stations (NMSs), SNMP agents,

Management information base (MIB) and network-management protocol :

■ Network management stations (NMSs) : Sometimes called consoles, these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements. Physically, NMSs are usually engineering workstation-caliber computers with fast CPUs, megapixel color displays, substantial memory, and abundant disk space. At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment.
■ Agents : Agents are software modules that reside in network elements. They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element.
■ Management information base (MIB) : A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store. Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules.
■ Network management protocol : A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs. SNMP is the Internet community's de facto standard management protocol.

PC / Workstation with SNMP application

IP Address: 192.168.0.x

Internet

Managed Switch
SNMP Agent Status: Enabled

IP Address: 192.168.0.100

SNMP Operations

SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol. NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response.

• Get -- Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent.
  Set -- Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent.
• Trap -- Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event. The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message.

SNMP community

An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to. It helps define where information is sent. The community name is used to identify the group. A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community. It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities. SNMP

default communities are:

Write = private

Read = public

Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the Wall-mount Managed Switch's SNMP function. This section has the following items:

System Configuration Configure SNMP on this Page.
- Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this Page.
■ System Information The system information is provided here.
■ SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this Page.
■ SNMPv3 Users Configure SNMPv3 users table on this Page.
■ SNMPv3 Groups Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this Page.
■ SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this Page.
■ SNMPv3 Access Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this Page.

4.3.2 SNMP System Configuration

Configure SNMP on this Page. The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-1 appears.

SNMP System Configuration Mode Enabled Version SNMP v2c Read Community public Write Community private Engine ID 800007e5017f000001 Apply Reset

Figure 4-3-1: SNMP System Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable SNMP mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.
• Version	Indicates the SNMP supported version. Possible versions are:■ SNMP v1: Set SNMP supported version 1.■ SNMP v2c: Set SNMP supported version 2c.■ SNMP v3: Set SNMP supported version 3.
• Read Community	Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent.The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If SNMP version is SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table. It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string. In addition to community string, a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet.
• Write Community	Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent.The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If SNMP version is SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table. It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string. In additional to community string, a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet.
• Engine ID	Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID. The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.3 SNMP Trap Configuration

Configure SNMP trap on this Page. The SNMP Trap Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-2 appears.

SNMP Trap Configuration

Trap Config Name Trap Mode Trap Version Trap Community Trap Destination Address Trap Destination Port Trap Inform Mode Trap Inform Timeout (seconds) Trap Inform Retry Times Trap Probe Security Engine ID Trap Security Engine ID Trap Security Name Disabled SNMP v2c Public 162 Disabled 3 5 Enabled None

SNMP Trap Event

System	□Warm Start □Cold Start
Interface	□Enable
	Link up	none ○ specific ○ all switches
	Link down	none ○ specific ○ all switches
	LLDP	none ○ specific ○ all switches
AAA	□Authentication Fail
Switch	□STP □RMON

Figure 4-3-2: SNMP Trap Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Trap Config	Indicates which trap Configuration's name for configuring. The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Trap Mode	Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.
Trap Version	Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:■ SNMP v1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.■ SNMP v2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.SNMP v3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.
Trap Community	Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet. The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Trap Destination Address	Indicates the SNMP trap destination address.
Trap Destination Port	Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port, the port range is 1~65535.
Trap Inform Mode	Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation. Possible modes are:Enabled: Enable SNMP trap authentication failure.Disabled: Disable SNMP trap authentication failure.
Trap Inform Timeout (seconds)	Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout.The allowed range is 0 to 2147.
Trap Inform Retry Times	Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times.The allowed range is 0 to 255.
Trap Probe Security Engine ID	Indicates the SNMPv3 trap probe security engine ID mode of operation. Possible values are:Enabled: Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.Disabled: Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.
Trap Security Engine ID	Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID. SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy. A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed. When "Trap Probe Security Engine ID" is enabled, the ID will be probed automatically. Otherwise, the ID specified in this field is used. The string must contain an even number(in hexadecimal format) with number of digits between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.
Trap Security Name	Indicates the SNMP trap security name. SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy. A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are enabled.
System	Enable/disable that the Interface group's traps. Possible traps are:Warm Start: Enable/disable Warm Start trap.Cold Start: Enable/disable Cold Start trap.
Interface	Indicates that the Interface group's traps. Possible traps are:Link Up: Enable/disable Link up trap.Link Down: Enable/disable Link down trap.LLDP: Enable/disable LLDP trap.
AAA	Indicates that the AAA group's traps. Possible traps are:Authentication Fail: Enable/disable SNMP trap authentication failure trap.
Switch	Indicates that the Switch group's traps. Possible traps are:STP: Enable/disable STP trap.

■ RMON: Enable/disable RMON trap.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.4 SNMP System Information

The switch system information is provided here. The SNMP System Information screen in Figure 4-3-3 appears.

System Information Configuration System Contact System Name WGS-5225-8T2SV System Location Apply Reset

Figure 4-3-3: System Information Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• System Contact	The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node, together with information on how to contact this person. The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126.
• System Name	An administratively assigned name for this managed node. By convention, this is the node's fully-qualified domain name. A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), minus sign (-). No space characters are permitted as part of a name. The first character must be an alpha character. And the first or last character must not be a minus sign. The allowed string length is 0 to 255.
• System Location	The physical location of this node(e.g., telephone closet, 3rd floor). The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.5 SNMPv3 Configuration

4.3.5.1 SNMPv3 Communities

Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this Page. The entry index key is Community. The SNMPv3 Communities screen in Figure 4-3-4 appears.

SNMPv3 Community Configuration Delete Community Source IP Source Mask □ public 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 □ private 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-3-4: SNMPv3 Communities Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Community	Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126. The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string.
Source IP	Indicates the SNMP access source address. A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask.
Source Mask	Indicates the SNMP access source address mask.

Buttons

Click to add a new community entry.

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.5.2 SNMPv3 Users

Configure SNMPv3 users table on this Page. The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name. The SNMPv3 Users screen in Figure 4-3-5 appears.

SNMPv3 User Configuration

Delete	Engine ID	User Name	Security Level	Authentication Protocol	Authentication Password	Privacy Protocol	Privacy Password
☐	800007e5017f000001	default_user	NoAuth, NoPriv	None	None	None	None

Figure 4-3-5: SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Engine ID	An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to. The string must contain an even number(in hexadecimal format) with number of digits between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed. The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User-based Security Model (USM) for message security and the View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for access control. For the USM entry, the usmUserEngineID and usmUserName are the entry's keys.In a simple agent, usmUserEngineID is always that agent's own snmpEngineID value. The value can also take the value of the snmpEngineID of a remote SNMP engine with which this user can communicate. In other words, if user engine ID equal system engine ID then it is local user; otherwise it's remote user.
User Name	A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Security Level	Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:■NoAuth, NoPriv: None authentication and none privacy.■Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and none privacy.■Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist. That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly.
Authentication Protocol	Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible authentication protocol are:■None: None authentication protocol.■ MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol.■ SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol.The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist. That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly.
• Authentication Password	A string identifying the authentication pass phrase. For MD5 authentication protocol, the allowed string length is 8 to 32. For SHA authentication protocol, the allowed string length is 8 to 40. The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
• Privacy Protocol	Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible privacy protocol are:■ None: None privacy protocol.■ DES: An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol.■ AES: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses AES authentication protocol.
• Privacy Password	A string identifying the privacy pass phrase. The allowed string length is 8 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new user entry.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.5.3 SNMPv3 Groups

Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this Page. The entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name. The SNMPv3 Groups screen in Figure 4-3-6 appears.

SNMPv3 Group Configuration

Delete	Security Model	Security Name	Group Name
□	v1	public	default_ro_group
□	v1	private	default_rw_group
□	v2c	public	default_ro_group
□	v2c	private	default_rw_group
□	usm	default_user	default_rw_group

Add New Entry

Apply

Reset

Figure 4-3-6: SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Security Model	Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:■ v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.■ v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.■ usm: User-based Security Model (USM).
Security Name	A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to.The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Group Name	A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to.The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new group entry.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.5.4 SNMPv3 Views

Configure SNMPv3 views table on this Page. The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree. The SNMPv3 Views screen in Figure 4-3-7 appears.

SNMPv3 View Configuration Delete View Name View Type OID Subtree default_view included .1 Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-3-7: SNMPv3 Views Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
• View Name	A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
• View Type	Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Possible view type are:■included: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included.■excluded: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded.In general, if a view entry's view type is 'excluded', it should be exist another view entry which view type is 'included' and it's OID subtree overstep the 'excluded' view entry.
• OID Subtree	The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view. The allowed OID length is 1 to 128. The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk(*).

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new view entry.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.5.5 SNMPv3 Access

Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this Page. The entry index keys are Group Name, Security Model and Security Level. The SNMPv3 Access screen in Figure 4-3-8 appears.

SNMPv3 Access Configuration

Delete	Group Name	Security Model	Security Level	Read View Name	Write View Name
	default_ro_group	any	NoAuth, NoPriv	default_view	None
	default_rw_group	any	NoAuth, NoPriv	default_view	default_view

Figure 4-3-8: SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Group Name	A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Security Model	Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:any: Accepted any security model (v1|v2c|usm).v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.usm: User-based Security Model (USM)
Security Level	Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:NoAuth, NoPriv: None authentication and none privacy.Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and none privacy.Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.
Read View Name	The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Write View Name	The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new access entry.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.4 Port Management

Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Wall-mount Managed Switch's ports. This section has the following items:

■ Port Configuration Configures port connection settings
■ Port Statistics Overview Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics
■ Port Statistics Detail Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics
■ SFP Module Information Display SFP information
■ Port Mirror Sets the source and target ports for mirroring

4.4.1 Port Configuration

This Page displays current port configurations. Ports can also be configured here. The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-4-1 appears.

Port Configuration

Port

Port Description

Link

Speed

Adv Duplex

Adv speed

Flow Control

Maximum Frame Size

Excessive Collision Mode

Frame Length Check

Current

Configured

Fdx

Hdx

10M

100M

1G

Enable

Curr Rx

Curr Tx

*

9600

1

100fdx

Auto

X

X

9600

Discard

2

Down

Auto

X

X

9600

Discard

3

Down

Auto

X

X

9600

Discard

4

Down

Auto

X

X

9600

Discard

5

Down

Auto

X

X

9600

Discard

6

Down

Auto

X

X

9600

Discard

7

Down

Auto

X

X

9600

Discard

8

Down

Auto

X

X

9600

Discard

9

Down

Auto

X

X

9600

10

Down

Auto

X

X

9600

Figure 4-4-1: Port Configuration Page Screenshot
The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	This is the logical port number for this row.
• Port Description	Indicates the per port description.
• Link	The current link state is displayed graphically. Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down.
• Current Link Speed	Provides the current link speed of the port.
• Configured Link Speed	Select any available link speed for the given switch port. Draw the menu bar to select the mode.■ Auto - Setup Auto negotiation for copper interface.■ 10Mbps HDX - Force sets 10Mbps/Half-Duplex mode.■ 10Mbps FDX - Force sets 10Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.■ 100Mbps HDX - Force sets 100Mbps/Half-Duplex mode.■ 100Mbps FDX - Force sets 100Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.■ 1Gbps FDX - Force sets 10000Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.■ Disable - Shutdown the port manually.
• Flow Control	When Auto Speed is selected on a port, this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner.When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used. The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed, and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted. The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation.Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed.
• Maximum Frame Size	Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including FCS. The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 10056 bytes.
• Excessive Collision Mode	Configure port transmit collision behavior.■ Discard: Discard frame after 16 collisions (default).■ Restart: Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions.

When set each port to run at 100M Full, 100M Half, 10M Full, and 10M Half-speed modes. The Auto-MDIX function will disable.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page. Any changes made locally will be undone.

4.4.2 Port Statistics Overview

This Page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports. The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure 4-4-2 appears.

Port	Packets		Bytes		Errors		Drops		Filtered
	Received	Transmitted	Received	Transmitted	Received	Transmitted	Received	Transmitted	Received
1	870	648	152665	368006	0	0	0	0	116
2	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
3	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
4	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
5	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
6	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
7	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
8	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
9	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
10	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0

Figure 4-4-2: Port Statistics Overview Page Screenshot

The displayed counters are:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
• Packets	The number of received and transmitted packets per port.
• Bytes	The number of received and transmitted bytes per port.
• Errors	The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port.
• Drops	The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion.
• Filtered	The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.

Buttons

Download the Port Statistics Overview result as EXECL file.

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clears the counters for all ports.

Print the Port Statistics Overview result.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals.

4.4.3 Port Statistics Detail

This Page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port. Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display. The selected port belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the Page header. The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit, the size counters for receive and transmit, and the error counters for receive and transmit.

The Port Statistics Detail screen in Figure 4-4-3 appears.

Detailed Port Statistics Port 1

Receive Total		Transmit Total
Rx Packets	2335	Tx Packets	2066
Rx Octets	431172	Tx Octets	1531131
Rx Unicast	2039	Tx Unicast	2050
Rx Multicast	48	Tx Multicast	11
Rx Broadcast	248	Tx Broadcast	5
Rx Pause	0	Tx Pause	0
Receive Size Counters		Transmit Size Counters
Rx 64 Bytes	1465	Tx 64 Bytes	242
Rx 65-127 Bytes	175	Tx 65-127 Bytes	53
Rx 128-255 Bytes	66	Tx 128-255 Bytes	523
Rx 256-511 Bytes	553	Tx 256-511 Bytes	203
Rx 512-1023 Bytes	76	Tx 512-1023 Bytes	284
Rx 1024-1526 Bytes	0	Tx 1024-1526 Bytes	761
Rx 1527- Bytes	0	Tx 1527- Bytes	0
Receive Queue Counters		Transmit Queue Counters
Rx 00	2283	Tx 00	0
Rx 01	0	Tx 01	0
Rx 02	0	Tx 02	0
Rx 03	0	Tx 03	0
Rx 04	0	Tx 04	0
Rx 05	0	Tx 05	0
Rx 06	0	Tx 06	0
Rx 07	0	Tx 07	2066
Receive Error Counters		Transmit Error Counters
Rx Drops	52	Tx Drops	0
Rx CRC/Alignment	0	Tx Late/Exc. Coll.	0
Rx Undersize	0
Rx Oversize	0
Rx Fragments	0
Rx Jabber	0
Rx Filtered	52

Figure 4-4-3: Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Receive Total and Transmit Total

Object Description
• Rx and Tx Packets	The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets
• Rx and Tx Octets	The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes, including FCS, but excluding framing bits.
• Rx and Tx Unicast	The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) unicast packets.
• Rx and Tx Multicast	The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) multicast packets.
• Rx and Tx Broadcast	The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) broadcast packets.
• Rx and Tx Pause	A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that has an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation.

Receive and Transmit Size Counters

The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes.

Receive and Transmit Queue Counters

The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue.

Receive Error Counters

Object Description
• Rx Drops	The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion.
• Rx CRC/Alignment	The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors.
• Rx Undersize	The number of short frames received with valid CRC.
• Rx Oversize	The number of long frames received with valid CRC.
• Rx Fragments	The number of short frames received with invalid CRC.
• Rx Jabber	The number of long frames received with invalid CRC.
• Rx Filtered	The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.

1 Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes.
2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port.

Transmit Error Counters

Object Description
• Tx Drops	The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion.
• Tx Late/Exc. Coll.	The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions.

Buttons

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clears the counters for all ports.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals.

4.4.4 SFP Module Information

The WGS-5225 series supports the SFP module with digital diagnostics monitoring (DDM) function. This feature is also known as digital optical monitoring (DOM). You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information Page. This Page shows the operational status, such as the transceiver type, speed, wavelength, optical output power, optical input power, temperature, laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage in real time. You can also use the hyperlink of port no. to check the statistics on a specific interface. The SFP Module Information screen in Figure 4-4-4 appears.

SFP Module Information

Port Type Speed Wave Length(nm) Distance(m) Temperature (C) Voltage(V) Current(mA) Tx power(dBm) Rx power(dBm) 9 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- SFP Monitor Event Alert: Sent trap Warning Temperature: 75 degrees C Apply Reset Auto-refresh Refresh

Figure 4-4-4: SFP Module Information for Switch Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Type	Display the type of current SFP module; the possible types are:■ 1000BASE-SX■ 1000BASE-LX■ 100BASE-FX
• Speed	Display the speed of current SFP module; the speed value or description is obtained from the SFP module. Different vendors SFP modules might show different speed information.
• Wave Length(nm)	Display the wavelength of current SFP module; the wavelength value is obtained from the SFP module. Use this column to check if the wavelength values of two nodes match while the fiber connection fails.
• Distance(m)	Display the support distance of current SFP module; the distance value is obtained from the SFP module.
• Temperature(C)– SFP DDM Module Only	Display the temperature of current SFP DDM module; the temperature value is gotten from the SFP DDM module.
• Voltage(V)– SFP DDM Module Only	Display the voltage of current SFP DDM module; the voltage value is gotten from the SFP DDM module.
• Current(mA)– SFP DDM Module Only	Display the ampere of current SFP DDM module; the ampere value is gotten from the SFP DDM module.
• TX power(dBm)– SFP DDM Module Only	Display the TX power of current SFP DDM module; the TX power value is gotten from the SFP DDM module.
• RX power(dBm)– SFP DDM Module Only	Display the RX power of current SFP DDM module; the RX power value is gotten from the SFP DDM module.

Buttons

SFP Monitor Event Alert: □ send trap

Warning Temperature: degrees C

Check SFP Monitor Event Alert box; it will be in accordance with your warning temperature setting and allows users to record message out via SNMP Trap.

Auto-refresh ☐ : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

4.4.5 Port Mirror

Configure port Mirroring on this Page. This function provides monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied. It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary.

• To debug network problems, selected traffic can be copied, or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow.
• The Wall-mount Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port. You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity.

Port Mirror Application

graph TD
    A["Source Port"] --> B["Port"]
    C["Target Port"] --> B
    D["Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro"] --> E["Computer"]
    B --> F["Mirroring"]
    E --> F
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cff,stroke:#333

Figure 4-4-5: Port Mirror Application

The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows:

• All frames received on a given port (also known as ingress or source mirroring).
• All frames transmitted on a given port (also known as egress or destination mirroring).

Mirror Port Configuration

The Port Mirror screen in Figure 4-4-6 appears.

Mirror Configuration Port to mirror to Disabled ▼ Mirror Port Configuration Port Mode * ▼ 1 Disabled ▼ 2 Disabled ▼ 3 Disabled ▼ 4 Disabled ▼ 5 Disabled ▼ 6 Disabled ▼ 7 Disabled ▼ 8 Disabled ▼ 9 Disabled ▼ 10 Disabled ▼ Apply Reset

Figure 4-4-6: Mirror Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port to mirror on	Frames from ports that have either source (rx) or destination (tx) mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port. Disabled disables mirroring.
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
• Mode	Select mirror mode.■ Rx only: Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port. Frames transmitted are not mirrored.■ Tx only: Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port. Frames received are not mirrored.■ Disabled: Neither frames transmitted or frames received are mirrored.■ Both: Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to the mirror port.

For a given port, a frame is only transmitted once. It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port. Because of this, mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5 Link Aggregation

Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups (LAGs). Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices, increases port flexibility, and provides link redundancy.

Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed, set to full-duplex operations. Ports in a LAG, can be of different media types (UTP/Fiber, or different fiber types), provided they operate at the same speed.

Aggregated Links can be assigned manually (Port Trunk) or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the relevant links.

Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port. Specifically, the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non-aggregated port, including auto-negotiation, speed, Duplex setting, etc.

The device supports the following Aggregation links :

■ Static LAGs (Port Trunk) – Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group.
■ Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) LAGs - LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device. If the other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices establish a LAG between them.

graph TD
    A["Router 1"] --> B["Router 2"]
    C["Router 3"] --> B
    D["Router 4"] --> B
    B --> E["Router 5"]
    F["Router 6"] --> E
    E --> G["Laptop 1"]
    E --> H["Laptop 2"]
    E --> I["Laptop 3"]
    E --> J["Laptop 4"]
    note1["Link Aggregation 4 Port Link Aggregation (Up to 4 Gbps)"]

Figure 4-5-1: Link Aggregation

The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links. Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection. This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network. LACP operation requires full-duplex mode, more detail information refer to the IEEE 802.3ad standard.

Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches. However, before making any physical connections between devices, use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends. When using a port link aggregation, note that:

• The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type (RJ45, 100 Mbps fiber).
• The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions (see below).
• Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation.
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports.
• None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port.
• All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN.
• The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole.
• Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop.
• Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop.

It allows a maximum of 10 ports to be aggregated at the same time. The Wall-mount Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports (up to 5 groups). If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregating group, then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails. If the group is defined as a local static link aggregating group, then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports.

The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow (for example, a TCP connection) are always forwarded on the same link aggregation member port. Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible. The aggregation code is based on the following information:

• Source MAC
• Destination MAC
  • Source and destination IPv4 address.
• Source and destination TCP/UDP ports for IPv4 packets

Normally, all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports. Each link aggregation may consist of up to 10 member ports. Any quantity of link aggregation s may be configured for the device (only limited by the quantity of ports on the device.) To configure a proper traffic distribution, the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed.

4.5.1 Static Aggregation

This Page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group. The aggregation hash mode settings are global, whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the Page header.

Hash Code Contributors

The Static Aggregation screen in Figure 4-5-2 appears.

Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address ✓ Destination MAC Address ✓ IP Address ✓ TCP/UDP Port Number ✓

Figure 4-5-2 : Aggregation Mode Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Source MAC Address	The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address, or uncheck to disable. By default, Source MAC Address is enabled.
• Destination MAC Address	The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, Destination MAC Address is disabled.
• IP Address	The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable the use of the IP Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, IP Address is enabled.
• TCP/UDP Port Number	The TCP/UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable the use of the TCP/UDP Port Number, or uncheck to disable. By default, TCP/UDP Port Number is enabled.

Static Aggregation Group Configuration

The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4-5-3 appears.

Aggregation Group Configuration

	Port Members
Group ID	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10
Normal
1
2
3
4
5

Figure 4-5-3: Aggregation Group Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

.Object	Description
• Group ID	Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row. Group ID "Normal" indicates there is no aggregation. Only one group ID is valid per port.
• Port Members	Each switch port is listed for each group ID. Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation, or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation. By default, no ports belong to any aggregation group.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.2 LACP Configuration

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) - LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device. LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the same LAG.

This Page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations, and possibly change them as well. The LACP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the Page header. The LACP Configuration screen in Figure 4-5-4 appears.

LACP Port Configuration

Port	LACP Enabled	Key			Role		Timeout	Priority
*								32768
1		Auto			Active		Fast		32768
2		Auto			Active		Fast		32768
3		Auto			Active		Fast		32768
4		Auto			Active		Fast		32768
5		Auto			Active		Fast		32768
6		Auto			Active		Fast		32768
7		Auto			Active		Fast		32768
8		Auto			Active		Fast		32768
9		Auto			Active		Fast		32768
10		Auto			Active		Fast		32768

Figure 4-5-4 : LACP Port Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number.
• LACP Enabled	Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port. LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner. LACP can form max 12 LAGs per switch and 2G LAGs per stack.
• Key	The Key value incurred by the port, range 1-65535 . The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed, 10Mb = 1, 100Mb = 2, 1Gb = 3. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group, while ports with different keys cannot.The default setting is “Auto”
• Role	The Role shows the LACP activity status. The Active will transmit LACP packets each second, while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner (speak if spoken to).
• Timeout	The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions. Fast will transmit LACP packets each second, while Slow will wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet.
• Priority	The Prio controls the priority of the port. If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role. Lower number

means greater priority.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.3 LACP System Status

This Page provides a status overview for all LACP instances. The LACP Status Page displays the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status. The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4-5-5 appears.

LACP System Status Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Key Partner Priority Last Changed Local Ports No ports enabled or no existing partners Auto-refresh □ Refresh

Figure 4-5-5: LACP System Status Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Aggr ID	The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance.For LLAG the id is shown as 'isid:aggr-id' and for GLAGs as 'aggr-id'
• Partner System ID	The system ID (MAC address) of the aggregation partner.
• Partner Key	The key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID.
• Partner Priority	The priority of the aggregation partner.
• Last changed	The time since this aggregation changed.
• Local Ports	Show which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch/stack.The format is: "Switch ID:Port".

Buttons

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.5.4 LACP Port Status

This Page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports. The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4-5-6 appears.

Port	LACP	Key	Aggr ID	Partner System ID	Partner Port	Partner Priority
1	No	-	-	-	-	-
2	No	-	-	-	-	-
3	No	-	-	-	-	-
4	No	-	-	-	-	-
5	No	-	-	-	-	-
6	No	-	-	-	-	-
7	No	-	-	-	-	-
8	No	-	-	-	-	-
9	No	-	-	-	-	-
10	No	-	-	-	-	-

Figure 4-5-6: LACP Status Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number.
• LACP	'Yes' means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up. 'No' means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down. 'Backup' means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves. Meanwhile it's LACP status is disabled.
• Key	The key assigned to this port. Only ports with the same key can aggregate together.
• Aggr ID	The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group.
• Partner System ID	The partner's System ID (MAC address).
• Partner Port	The partner's port number connected to this port.
• Partner Priority	The partner's port priority.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.5.5 LACP Port Statistics

This Page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports. The LACP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4-5-7 appears.

Port	LACP Received	LACP Transmitted	Discarded
			Unknown	Illegal
1	0	0	0	0
2	0	0	0	0
3	0	0	0	0
4	0	0	0	0
5	0	0	0	0
6	0	0	0	0
7	0	0	0	0
8	0	0	0	0
9	0	0	0	0
10	0	0	0	0

Figure 4-5-7: LACP Statistics Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number.
• LACP Received	Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port.
• LACP Transmitted	Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port.
• Discarded	Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clear

Clears the counters for all ports.

4.6 VLAN

4.6.1 VLAN Overview

A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout. VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN. VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN. Typically, a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet, although not necessarily.

VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains.

A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location. End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN, regardless of where they are physically on the network. Logically, a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain, because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated.

1. No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership, packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN.
2. The Wall-mount Managed Switch supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802.1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag-unaware..

The Wall-mount Managed Switch's default is to assign all ports to a single 802.1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN. As new VLAN is created, the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_VLAN port member list. The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID = 1.

This section has the following items:

■ VLAN Port Configuration Enables VLAN group
■ VLAN Membership Status Displays VLAN membership status
■ VLAN Port Status Displays VLAN port status
■ Private VLAN Creates/removes primary or community VLANs
■ Port Isolation Enables/disables port isolation on port
■ MAC-based VLAN Configures the MAC-based VLAN entries
■ MAC-based VLAN Status Displays MAC-based VLAN entries
■ IP Subnet-based VLAN Configures the IP Subnet-based VLAN entries
■ Protocol-based VLAN Configures the protocol-based VLAN entries
■ Protocol-based VLAN Membership Displays the protocol-based VLAN entries

4.6.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains. This Wall-mount Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains. VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks. This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment.

An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.

VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups (such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing).

VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets. VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.

This Wall-mount Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features:

■ Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard
■ Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs
■ End stations can belong to multiple VLANs
■ Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices
■ Priority tagging

IEEE 802.1Q Standard

IEEE 802.1Q (tagged) VLAN are implemented on the Switch. 802.1Q VLAN require tagging, which enables them to span the entire network (assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802.1Q-compliant).

VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains. All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations (over IEEE 802.1Q enabled switches) that are members of that VLAN, and this includes broadcast, multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources.

VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN. Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging.:

■ The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don't recognize VLAN tags in packet headers.
■ The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802.1Q-compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally.

Some relevant terms:

• Tagging - The act of putting 802.1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet.
• Untagging - The act of stripping 802.1Q VLAN information out of the packet header.

802.1Q VLAN Tags

The figure below shows the 802.1Q VLAN tag. There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address. Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field. When a packet's Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100, the packet carries the IEEE 802.1Q/802.1p tag. The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority, 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier (CFI - used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones), and 12 bits of VLAN ID (VID). The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802.1p. The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802.1Q standard. Because the VID is 12 bits long, 4094 unique VLAN can be identified.

The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets. All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained.

802.1Q Tag

graph TD
    A["User Priority"] --> B["3 bits"]
    C["CFI"] --> D["1 bit"]
    E["VLAN ID (VID)"] --> F["12 bits"]
    G["TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier)"] --> H["2 bytes"]
    I["TCI (Tag Control Information)"] --> J["2 bytes"]
    K["Preamble Destination"] --> L["Address"]
    M["Source Address"] --> N["VLAN TAG Ethernet Type"]
    O["Data FCS"] --> P["46-1500 bytes"]
    Q["4 bytes"] --> R["6 bytes"]
    S["4 bytes"] --> T["6 bytes"]
    U["4 bytes"] --> V["2 bytes"]
    W["46-1500 bytes"] --> X["4 bytes"]

The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address, but before the original Ether Type/Length or Logical Link Control. Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally, the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) must be recalculated.

Adding an IEEE802.1Q Tag

graph TD
    A["Original Ethernet"] --> B["Dest. Addr."]
    A --> C["Src. Addr."]
    A --> D["Length/E. type"]
    A --> E["Data"]
    A --> F["Old CRC"]
    B --> G["End"]
    C --> H["E. type"]
    D --> I["Tag"]
    E --> J["Length/E. type"]
    F --> K["Data"]
    G --> L["Priority"]
    H --> M["CFI"]
    I --> N["VLAN ID"]
    J --> O["New Tagged Packet"]
    K --> P["New Tagged Packet"]

Port VLAN ID

Packets that are tagged (are carrying the 802.1Q VID information) can be transmitted from one 802.1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact. This allows 802.1Q VLAN to span network devices (and indeed, the entire network – if all network devices are 802.1Q compliant).

Every physical port on a switch has a PVID. 802.1Q ports are also assigned a PVID, for use within the switch. If no VLAN are defined on the switch, all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1. Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received. Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID, in so far as VLAN are concerned. Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag. Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID, but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions, the VID is.

Tag-aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network. The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet. If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet. Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets, tag-aware and tag-unaware network devices can coexist on the same network.

A switch port can have only one PVID, but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them.

Because some devices on a network may be tag-unaware, a decision must be made at each port on a tag-aware device before packets are transmitted – should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not? If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-unaware device, the packet should be untagged. If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-aware device, the packet should be tagged.

Default VLANs

The Switch initially configures one VLAN, VID = 1, called "default." The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the "default". As new VLAN are configured in Port-based mode, their respective member ports are removed from the "default."

■ Assigning Ports to VLANs

Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either manually or dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port.

VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.

VLAN Classification

When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame.

Port Overlapping

Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as file servers or printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to communicate, you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch.

■ Untagged VLANs

Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch. Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets.

4.6.3 VLAN Port Configuration

This Page is used for configuring the Wall-mount Managed Switch port VLAN. The VLAN per Port Configuration Page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN. The port default VLAN ID (PVID) is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration Page. All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID.

Understand nomenclature of the Switch

IEEE 802.1Q Tagged and Untagged

Every port on an 802.1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged.

• Tagged: Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number, priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports. If a packet has previously been tagged, the port will not alter the packet, thus keeping the VLAN information intact. The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802.1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet-forwarding decisions.
• Untagged: Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802.1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports. If the packet doesn't have an 802.1Q VLAN tag, the port will not alter the packet. Thus, all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802.1Q VLAN information. (Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch). Untagging is used to send packets from an 802.1Q-compliant network device to a non-compliant network device.

Frame Income Frame Leave	Income Frame is tagged	Income Frame is untagged
Leave port is tagged	Frame remains tagged	Tag is inserted
Leave port is untagged	Tag is removed	Frame remain untagged

Table 4-6-1: Ingress / Egress Port with VLAN VID Tag / Untag Table

IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (Q-in-Q)

IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (QinQ) is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks.

QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs. This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) tags into the customer's frames when they enter the service provider's network, and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network.

A service provider's customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported. VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service-provider network might easily overlap, and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed. Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations, require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables, and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096.

graph TD
    subgraph_Customer_A_s_LAN_Headquarters["Customer A's LAN Headquarters"]
        A1["VLAN 1-20"] -->|Q-in-Q VLAN Tunnel| E["MAN Service Provider Domain"]
        A2["VLAN 1-30"] -->|Q-in-Q VLAN Tunnel| E
        A3["Customer B's LAN Headquarters"] -->|Q-in-Q VLAN Tunnel| E
    end

    subgraph_Customer_A_s_LAN_Branch_Office["Customer A's LAN Branch Office"]
        B1["VLAN 1-20"] -->|Q-in-Q VLAN Tunnel| E
        B2["VLAN 1-30"] -->|Q-in-Q VLAN Tunnel| E
        B3["Customer B's LAN Factory"] -->|Q-in-Q VLAN Tunnel| E
    end

    subgraph_Customer_B_s_LAN_Headquarters["Customer B's LAN Headquarters"]
        C1["VLAN 1-20"] --> D1["MAN Edge Switch"]
        C2["VLAN 1-30"] --> D2["MAN Edge Switch"]
        C3["Customer B's LAN Factory"] --> D3["MAN Edge Switch"]
        D1 --> E
        D2 --> E
        D3 --> E
    end

    style Customer_A_s_LAN_Headquarters fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Customer_B_s_LAN_Headquarters fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style Customer_A_s_LAN_Branch_Office fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style Customer_B_s_LAN_Factory fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style D1 fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style D2 fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style D3 fill:#fff,stroke:#333

The Wall-mount Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge, aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN (Metro Access Network) space. One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers' VLANs. This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN-related VID for frames entering the MAN. When leaving the MAN, the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer-related VID is again available.

This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags. All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8, where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags.

In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch, the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports. This way, the MAC table requirements is reduced.

Global VLAN Configuration

The Global VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-1 appears.

Global VLAN Configuration

Allowed Access VLANs	1
Ethertype for Custom S-ports	88A8

Figure 4-6-1 : Global VLAN Configuration Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Allowed Access VLANs	This field shows the allowed Access VLANs, it only affects ports configured as Access ports. Ports in other modes are members of all VLANs specified in the Allowed VLANs field.By default, only VLAN 1 is enabled. More VLANs may be created by using a list syntax where the individual elements are separated by commas. Ranges are specified with a dash separating the lower and upper bound.The following example will create VLANs 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 200, and 300:1, 10–13, 200, 300. Spaces are allowed in between the delimiters.
• Ethertype for Custom S-ports	This field specifies the ethertype/TPID (specified in hexadecimal) used for Custom S-ports. The setting is in force for all ports whose Port Type is set to S-Custom-Port.

Port VLAN Configuration

The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-2 appears.

Global VLAN Configuration

Allowed Access VLANs	1
Ethertype for Custom S-ports	88A8

Port VLAN Configuration

Port	Mode	Port VLAN	Port Type	Ingress Filtering	Ingress Acceptance	Egress Tagging	Allowed VLANs		Forbidden VLANs
*		1					1
1	Access▼	1	C-Port▼	√	Tagged and Untagged▼	Untag All▼	1
2	Access▼	1	C-Port▼	√	Tagged and Untagged▼	Untag All▼	1
3	Access▼	1	C-Port▼	√	Tagged and Untagged▼	Untag All▼	1
4	Access▼	1	C-Port▼	√	Tagged and Untagged▼	Untag All▼	1
5	Access▼	1	C-Port▼	√	Tagged and Untagged▼	Untag All▼	1
6	Access▼	1	C-Port▼	√	Tagged and Untagged▼	Untag All▼	1
7	Access▼	1	C-Port▼	√	Tagged and Untagged▼	Untag All▼	1
8	Access▼	1	C-Port▼	√	Tagged and Untagged▼	Untag All▼	1
9	Access▼	1	C-Port▼	√	Tagged and Untagged▼	Untag All▼	1
10	Access▼	1	C-Port▼	√	Tagged and Untagged▼	Untag All▼	1

Apply Reset

Figure 4-6-2 : Port VLAN Configuration Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port		This is the logical port number for this row.
• Mode	Access	Access ports are normally used to connect to end stations. Dynamic features like Voice VLAN may add the port to more VLANs behind the scenes. Access ports have the following characteristics:Member of exactly one VLAN, the Port VLAN (Access VLAN), which by default is 1Accepts untagged and C-tagged framesDiscards all frames that are not classified to the Access VLANOn egress all frames classified to the Access VLAN are transmitted untagged. Other (dynamically added VLANs) are transmitted tagged
	Trunk	Trunk ports can carry traffic on multiple VLANs simultaneously, and are normally used to connect to other switches. Trunk ports have the following characteristics:By default, a trunk port is member of all VLANs (1-4095)The VLANs that a trunk port is member of may be limited by the use of Allowed VLANsFrames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are discardedBy default, all frames but frames classified to the Port VLAN (a.k.a. Native VLAN) get tagged on egress. Frames classified to the PortVLAN do not get C-tagged on egressEgress tagging can be changed to tag all frames, in which case only tagged frames are accepted on ingress
	Hybrid	Hybrid ports resemble trunk ports in many ways, but adds additional port configuration features. In addition to the characteristics described for trunk ports, hybrid ports have these abilities:Can be configured to be VLAN tag unaware, C-tag aware, S-tag aware, or S-custom-tag awareIngress filtering can be controlledIngress acceptance of frames and configuration of egress tagging can be configured independently
• Port VLAN		Determines the port's VLAN ID (PVID). Allowed VLANs are in the range 1 through 4095, default being 1.■ On ingress, frames get classified to the Port VLAN if the port is configured as VLAN unaware, the frame is untagged, or VLAN awareness is enabled on the port, but the frame is priority tagged (VLAN ID = 0).■ On egress, frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get tagged if Egress Tagging configuration is set to untag Port VLAN.The Port VLAN is called an "Access VLAN" for ports in Access mode and Native VLAN for ports in Trunk or Hybrid mode.
• Port Type		Ports in hybrid mode allow for changing the port type, that is, whether a frame's VLAN tag is used to classify the frame on ingress to a particular VLAN, and if so, which TPID it reacts on. Likewise, on egress, the Port Type determines the TPID of the tag, if a tag is required.Unaware:On ingress, all frames, whether carrying a VLAN tag or not, get classified to the Port VLAN, and possible tags are not removed on egress.C-Port:On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with a C-tag.S-Port:On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 or 0x88A8 get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with an S-tag.S-Custom-Port:On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with a TPID = 0x8100 or equal to the Ethertype configured for Custom-S ports get classified to the VLAN ID
		embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with the custom S-tag.
• Ingress Filtering		Hybrid ports allow for changing ingress filtering. Access and Trunk ports always have ingress filtering enabled.■ If ingress filtering is enabled (checkbox is checked), frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of get discarded.■ If ingress filtering is disabled, frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine.However, the port will never transmit frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of.
• Ingress Acceptance		Hybrid ports allow for changing the type of frames that are accepted on ingress.■ Tagged and UntaggedBoth tagged and untagged frames are accepted.■ Tagged OnlyOnly tagged frames are accepted on ingress. Untagged frames are discarded.■ Untagged OnlyOnly untagged frames are accepted on ingress. Tagged frames are discarded.
Egress Tagging		This option is only available for ports in Hybrid mode. Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control the tagging of frames on egress.■ Untag Port VLANFrames classified to the Port VLAN are transmitted untagged. Other frames are transmitted with the relevant tag.■ Tag AllAll frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are transmitted with a tag.■ Untag AllAll frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are transmitted without a tag.
• Allowed VLANs		Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control which VLANs they are allowed to become members of. The field's syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Enabled VLANs field.By default, a Trunk or Hybrid port will become member of all VLANs, and is therefore set to 1-4095. The field may be left empty, which means that the port will not become member of any VLANs.
• Forbidden VLANs		A port may be configured to never be member of one or more VLANs. This is particularly useful when dynamic VLAN protocols like MVRP and GVRP must beprevented from dynamically adding ports to VLANs. The trick is to mark such VLANs as forbidden on the port in question. The syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Enabled VLANs field.By default, the field is left blank, which means that the port may become a member of all possible VLANs.

The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.4 VLAN Membership Status

This Page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users. The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4-6-4 appears.

VLAN Membership Status for Combined users Combined ▼ Auto-refresh □ Refresh Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page. |<< >> Port Members VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Figure 4-6-4: VLAN Membership Status for Static User Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN User	A VLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID, UVID. Currently we support following VLAN :- Admin: This is reffered as static.- NAS: NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communications between a Supplicant, Authenticator, and an Authentication Server.- Voice VLAN: Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones.- MVR: MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN. Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single (multicast) VLAN.
• Port Members	A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID.If a port is included in a VLAN, an image will be displayed.If a port is included in a Forbidden port list, an image will be displayed.If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on same Forbidden port, then conflict port will be displayed as conflict port.
• VLAN Membership	The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User (selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box). When ALL VLAN Users are selected, it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users, and this is by default. VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports.

Buttons

Combined

Select VLAN Users from this drop down list.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

<<

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID.

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.6.5 VLAN Port Status

This Page provides VLAN Port Staus. The VLAN Port Status screen in Figure 4-6-5 appears.

VLAN Port Status for Combined users

Combined Auto-refresh Refresh
Port	Port Type	Ingress Filtering	Frame Type	Port VLAN ID	Tx Tag	Untagged VLAN ID	Conflicts
1	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
2	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
3	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
4	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
5	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
6	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
7	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
8	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
9	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No
10	C-Port	√	All	1	Untag All		No

Figure 4-6-5: VLAN Port Status for Static User Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
• Port Type	Show the VLAN Awareness for the port.If VLAN awareness is enabled, the tag is removed from tagged frames received on the port. VLAN tagged frames are classified to the VLAN ID in the tag.If VLAN awareness is disabled, all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed.
• Ingress Filtering	Show the ingress filtering for a port. This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame, the frame is discarded.
• Frame Type	Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged frames, untagged frames received on that port are discarded.
• Port VLAN ID	Shows the PVID setting for the port.
• Tx Tag	Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged.
• Untagged VLAN ID	Shows UVID (untagged VLAN ID). Port's UVID determines the packet's behavior at the egress side.
• Conflicts	Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or Not. When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration, the following conflicts can occur:

■ Functional Conflicts between feature.
■ Conflicts due to hardware limitation.
■ Direct conflict between user modules.

Buttons

Static

Select VLAN Users from this drop down list.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

4.6.6 Private VLAN

The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here. Private VLANs can be added or deleted here. Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here.

Private VLANs are based on the source port mask, and there are no connections to VLANs. This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical.

A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets. By default, all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1.

A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN, but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs.

The Private VLAN screen in Figure 4-6-6 appears.

Auto-refresh ☐ Refresh Private VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Delete PVLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Add New Private VLAN Apply Reset

Figure 4-6-6 Private VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Delete	To delete a private VLAN entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next save.
• Private VLAN ID	Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN.
• Port Members	A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID. Toinclude a port in a Private VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.
• Adding a New Private VLAN	Click “Add New Private VLAN” to add a new private VLAN ID. An empty row is added to the table, and the private VLAN can be configured as needed. The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range. Any values outside this range are not accepted, and a warning message appears. Click "OK" to discard the incorrect entry, or click "Cancel" to return to the editing and make a correction.The Private VLAN is enabled when you click "Save".The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs.

Buttons

Add new Private VLAN

Click to add new VLAN.

Save

Click to save changes.

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.6.7 Port Isolation

Overview

When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN, communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented. Two application examples are provided in this section:

• Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN, but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN.
• Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment, but are not allowed to communicate with each other

graph TD
    A["Internet"] -->|Permit| B["Router"]
    C["Public Servers"] -->|Permit| B
    B --> D["Isolate"]
    B --> E["Isolate"]
    B --> F["Isolate"]
    B --> G["Isolate"]
    D <--> H["Access Denied"]
    E <--> I["Access Denied"]
    F <--> J["Access Denied"]
    G <--> K["Access Denied"]
    L["Private VLAN"] --> M["Isolate"]
    L --> N["Isolate"]
    L --> O["Isolate"]
    L --> P["Isolate"]

For private VLANs to be applied, the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place, one or more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs. Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups:

■ Promiscuous ports

— Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN
— Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN

■ Isolated ports

— Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN
— Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN

The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs. When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN, the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied. When traffic comes in on an isolated port, the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table. This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN.

This Page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN. A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN. The Port Isolation screen in Figure 4-6-7 appears.

Auto-refresh □ Refresh Port Isolation Configuration Port Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ Apply Reset

Figure 4-6-7: Port Isolation Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port Members	A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN. When checked, port isolation is enabled on that port. When unchecked, port isolation is disabled on that port.By default, port isolation isdisabledon all ports.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

4.6.8 VLAN setting example:

Separate VLAN
802.1Q VLAN Trunk
■ Port Isolate

4.6.8.1 Two Separate 802.1Q VLANs

The diagram shows how the Wall-mount Managed Switch handle Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs. VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLAN. Each VLAN isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members. The screen in Figure 4-6-8 appears and Table 4-6-9 describes the port configuration of the Wall-mount Managed Switches.

graph TD
    subgraph VLAN_Overview
        A["Router"] --> B["PC-1 (Untagged)"]
        A --> C["PC-2 (Untagged)"]
        A --> D["PC-3 (Tagged)"]
        A --> E["..."]
        F["VLAN 2"] --> A
    end
    subgraph VLAN_Overview
        G["VLAN 3"] --> H["PC-4 (Untagged)"]
        G --> I["PC-5 (Untagged)"]
        G --> J["PC-6 (Tagged)"]
    end

Figure 4-6-8: Two Separate VLANs Diagram

VLAN Group	VID	Untagged Members	Tagged Members
VLAN Group 1	1	Port-7 ~ Port-24	N/A
VLAN Group 2 2	Port-1,Port-2	Port-3
VLAN Group 3 3	Port-4,Port-5	Port-6

Table 4-1: VLAN and Port Configuration

The scenario is described as follows:

■ Untagged packet entering VLAN 2

1. While [PC-1] transmit an untagged packet enters Port-1, the Wall-mount Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag=2. [PC-2] and [PC-3] will receive the packet through Port-2 and Port-3.
2. [PC-4], [PC-5] and [PC-6] received no packet.
3. While the packet leaves Port-2, it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet.
4. While the packet leaves Port-3, it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=2.

■ Tagged packet entering VLAN 2

1. While [PC-3] transmit a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=2 enters Port-3, [PC-1] and [PC-2] will receive the packet through Port-1 and Port-2.
2. While the packet leaves Port-1 and Port-2, it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet.

■ Untagged packet entering VLAN 3

1. While [PC-4] transmit an untagged packet enters Port-4, the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag=3. [PC-5] and [PC-6] will receive the packet through Port-5 and Port-6.
2. While the packet leaves Port-5, it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet.
3. While the packet leaves Port-6, it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=3.

For this example, just set VLAN Group 1 as default VLAN, but only focus on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flows

Setup steps

1. Add VLAN Group

Add two VLANs - VLAN 2 and VLAN 3

For Type 1-3 in Allowed Access VLANs column, the 1-3 includes VLAN1 and 2 and 3.

Global VLAN Configuration Allowed Access VLANs 1-3 Ethertype for Custom S-ports 88A8

Figure 4-6-9: Add VLAN 2 and VLAN 3

2. Assign VLAN Member and PVID to each port:

VLAN 2 : Port-1, Port-2 and Port-3

VLAN 3: Port-4, Port-5 and Port-6

VLAN 1 : All other ports – Port-7\~Port-28

Global VLAN Configuration

Allowed Access VLANs	1-3
Ethertype for Custom S-ports	88A8

Port VLAN Configuration

Port	Mode	Port VLAN	Port Type	Ingress Filtering	Ingress Acceptance	Egress Tagging	Allowed VLANs	Forbidden VLANs
*		2					2
1	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	2
2	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	2
3	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	2
4	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	3
5	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	3
6	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	3
7	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	1
8	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	1
9	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	1
10.	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	1

Figure 4-6-10: Change Port VLAN of Port 1\~3 to be VLAN2 and Port VLAN of Port 4\~6 to be VLAN3

3. Enable VLAN Tag for specific ports

Link Type: Port-3 (VLAN-2) and Port-6 (VLAN-3)

Change Port 3 Mode as Trunk and select Egress Tagging as Tag All and Type 2 in the Allowed VLANs column. Change Port 6 Mode as Trunk and select Egress Tagging as Tag All and Type 3 in the Allowed VLANs column. The Per Port VLAN configuration in Figure 4-6-11 appears.

Global VLAN Configuration

Allowed Access VLANs	1-3
Ethertype for Custom S-ports	88A8

Port VLAN Configuration

Port	Mode	Port VLAN	Port Type	Ingress Filtering	Ingress Acceptance	Egress Tagging	Allowed VLANs	Forbidden VLANs
*		2					2
1	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	2
2	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	2
3	Trunk		C-Port		Tagged Only	Tag All	2
4	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	3
5	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	3
6	Trunk		C-Port		Tagged Only	Tag All	3
7	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	1

Figure 4-6-11: Check VLAN 2 and 3 Members on VLAN Membership Page

4.6.8.2 VLAN Trunking between two 802.1Q aware switches

In most cases, they are used for "Uplink" to other switches. VLANs are separated at different switches, but they need to access to other switches within the same VLAN group. The screen in Figure 4-6-12 appears.

graph TD
    subgraph VLAN 2
        PC2["PC-2 (Untagged)"] -->|blue arrow| Trunking["802.1Q Trunking"]
        PC3["PC-3 (Tagged)"] -->|blue arrow| Trunking
        PC1["PC-1 (Untagged)"] -->|blue arrow| Trunking
    end
    subgraph VLAN 3
        PC5["PC-5 (Untagged)"] -->|red arrow| Trunking
        PC6["PC-6 (Tagged)"] -->|red arrow| Trunking
        PC4["PC-4 (Untagged)"] -->|red arrow| Trunking
    end
    PC2 -->|blue arrow| Trunking
    PC3 -->|blue arrow| Trunking
    PC1 -->|blue arrow| Trunking
    PC5 -->|red arrow| Trunking
    PC6 -->|red arrow| Trunking

Figure 4-6-12: VLAN Trunking Diagram

Setup steps

1. Add VLAN Group

Add two VLANs – VLAN 2 and VLAN 3

For Type 1-3 in Allowed Access VLANs column, the 1-3 includes VLAN1 and 2 and 3.

Global VLAN Configuration Allowed Access VLANs 1-3 Ethertype for Custom S-ports 88A8

Figure 4-6-13: Add VLAN 2 and VLAN 3

2. Assign VLAN Member and PVID to each port :

VLAN 2 : Port-1, Port-2 and Port-3

VLAN 3: Port-4, Port-5 and Port-6

VLAN 1 : All other ports – Port-7\~Port-48

Global VLAN Configuration

Allowed Access VLANs	1-3
Ethertype for Custom S-ports	88A8

Port VLAN Configuration

Port	Mode	Port VLAN	Port Type		Ingress Filtering	Ingress Acceptance	Egress Tagging	Allowed VLANs	Forbidden VLANs
*		2						2
1	Access		C-Port			Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	2
2	Access		C-Port			Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	2
3	Access		C-Port			Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	2
4	Access		C-Port			Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	3
5	Access		C-Port			Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	3
6	Access		C-Port			Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	3
7	Access		C-Port			Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	1
8	Access		C-Port			Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	1
9	Access		C-Port			Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	1
10.	Access		C-Port			Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	1

Figure 4-6-14: Changes Port VLAN of Port 1\~3 to be VLAN2 and Port VLAN of Port 4\~6 to be VLAN3

For the VLAN ports connecting to the hosts, please refer to 4.6.10.1. The following steps focus on the VLAN Trunk port configuration.

1. Specify Port-7 to be the 802.1Q VLAN Trunk port.
2. Assign Port-7 to both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 on the VLAN Member configuration Page.

3. Define a VLAN 1 as a "Public Area" that overlaps both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 members.

4. Assign the VLAN Trunk Port to be the member of each VLAN to be aggregated. For this example, add Port-7 to be VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 member port.

5. Specify Port-7 to be the 802.1Q VLAN Trunk port, and the Trunk port must be a Tagged port while egress. The Port-7 configuration is shown in Figure 4-6-15.

Global VLAN Configuration

Allowed Access VLANs	1-3
Ethertype for Custom S-ports	88A8

Port VLAN Configuration

Port	Mode	Port VLAN	Port Type	Ingress Filtering	Ingress Acceptance	Egress Tagging	Allowed VLANs	Forbidden VLANs
*		2					2	1
1	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	2	1
2	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	2	1
3	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	2	1
4	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	3	1
5	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	3	1
6	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	3	1
7	Trunk		C-Port		Tagged Only	Tag All	1-3
8	Access		C-Port		Tagged and Untagged	Untag Port VLAN	1

Figure 4-6-15: VLAN Overlapping Port Setting & VLAN 1 – The Public Area Member Assigned

VLAN 2 members of Port-1 to Port-3 and VLAN 3 members of Port-4 to Port-6 also belong to VLAN 1. But with different PVID settings, packets from VLAN 2 or VLAN 3 are not able to access to the other VLAN.

1. Repeat Steps 1 to 6 to set up the VLAN Trunk port at the partner switch. To add more VLANs to join the VLAN trunk, repeat Steps 1 to 3 to assign the Trunk port to the VLANs.

4.6.8.3 Port Isolate

The diagram shows how the Wall-mount Managed Switch handles isolated and promiscuous ports, and the each PC is not able to access the isolated port of each other's PCs. But they all need to access with the same server/AP/Printer. This section will show you how to configure the port for the server – that could be accessed by each isolated port.

graph TD
    subgraph_VLAN1["VIAN 1 : Private VLAN"]
        A["Isolate"] --> B["Port 1"]
        C["Isolate"] --> D["Port 2"]
        E["Isolate"] --> F["Port 3"]
        G["Isolate"] --> H["Port 4"]
        I["Internet"] --> J["Port 5"]
    end
    subgraph_VLAN2["VIAN 2 : Private VLAN"]
        K["Isolate"] --> L["Port 3"]
        M["Isolate"] --> N["Port 4"]
        O["Isolate"] --> P["Port 6"]
    end
    A --> Q["Sample Switch"]
    D --> Q
    H --> Q
    P --> Q
    Q --> R["Public Servers"]
    R --> S["Port 6"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style O fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style P fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Q fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style R fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style S fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Setup steps

1. Assign Port Mode

Set Port-1\~Port-4 in Isolated port.

Set Port-5 and Port-6 in Promiscuous port. The screen in Figure 4-6-16 appears.

Auto-refresh □ Refresh Port Isolation Configuration Port Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ Apply Reset

Figure 4-6-17: The Configuration of Isolated and Promiscuous Port

2. Assign VLAN Member :

VLAN 1: Port-5 and Port-6

VLAN 2 : Port-1, Port-2, Port-5 and Port-6

VLAN 3: Port-3\~Port-6.

The screen in Figure 4-6-18 appears.

Auto-refresh

Refresh

Private VLAN Membership Configuration

Port Members Delete PVLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 □ 1 □ □ □ □ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ □ 2 ✓ ✓ □ □ ✓ ✓ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ 3 □ □ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ Add New Private VLAN Apply Reset

Figure 4-6-17: Private VLAN Port Setting

4.6.9 MAC-based VLAN

The MAC-based VLAN entries can be configured here. This Page allows for adding and deleting MAC-based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports. This Page shows only static entries. The MAC-based VLAN screen in Figure 4-6-18 appears.

MAC-based VLAN Membership Configuration Auto-refresh □ Refresh |<< >> Port Members Delete MAC Address VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Currently no entries present Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-6-18: MAC-based VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Delete	To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save. The entrywill be deleted in the stack.
• MAC Address	Indicates the MAC address.
• VLAN ID	Indicates the VLAN ID.
• Port Members	A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC-based VLAN entry. To include a port in a MAC-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the MAC-based VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.
• Adding a New MAC-based VLAN	Click “Add New Entry” to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry. An empty row is added to the table, and the MAC-based VLAN entry can be configured as needed. Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC-based VLAN entry. No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.The MAC-based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on "Save". A MAC-based VLAN without any port members will be deleted when you click "Save".The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC-based VLANs.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

k<

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC-based VLAN Table.

>>

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.6.10 MAC-based VLAN Status

This Page shows MAC-based VLAN entries configured by various MAC-based VLAN users. The MAC-based VLAN Status screen in Figure 4-6-19 appears.

MAC-based VLAN Membership Status for User Static

Static Auto-refresh Refresh Port Members MAC Address VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 No data exists for the user

Figure 4-6-19: MAC-based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• MAC Address	Indicates the MAC address.
• VLAN ID	Indicates the VLAN ID.
• Port Members	Port members of the MAC-based VLAN entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

4.6.11 IP Subnet-based VLAN

The IP subnet-based VLAN entries can be configured here. This page allows for adding, updating and deleting IP subnet-based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports. This page shows only static entries. The IP-based VLAN screen in Figure 4-6-20 appears.

IP Subnet-based VLAN Membership Configuration

Auto-refresh □ Refresh Port Members Delete VCE ID IP Address Mask Length VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Currently no entries present Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-6-20 Protocol to Group Mapping Table page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save.
VCE ID	Indicates the index of the entry. It is user configurable. It's value ranges from 0-256. If a VCE ID is 0, application will auto-generate the VCE ID for that entry.Deletion and lookup of IP subnet-based VLAN are based on VCE ID.
IP Address	Indicates the IP address.
Mask Length	Indicates the network mask length.
VLAN ID	Indicates the VLAN ID. VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries.
Port Members	A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet-based VLAN entry. To include a port in a IP subnet-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the IP subnet-based VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New IP subnet-based VLAN	Click “Add New Entry” to add a new IP subnet-based VLAN entry. An empty row is added to the table, and the IP subnet-based VLAN entry can be configured as needed. Any IP address/mask can be configured for the IP subnet-based VLAN entry. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.The IP subnet-based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on "Save". The “Delete: button can be used to undo the addition of new IP subnet-based VLANs.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new entry in mapping table.

Save

Click to save changes.

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately

4.6.12 Protocol-based VLAN

This Page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name (unique for each Group) mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the switch. The Protocol-based VLAN screen in Figure 4-6-21 appears.

Protocol to Group Mapping Table Delete Frame Type Value Group Name No Group entry found! Add New Entry Apply Reset Auto-refresh Refresh

Figure 4-6-21: Protocol to Group Mapping Table Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save.
Frame Type	Frame Type can have one of the following values:1. Ethernet2. LLC3. SNAPNote: On changing the Frame type field, valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected.
Value	Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the preceding Frame Type selection menu.Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types:1. For Ethernet: Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype. Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600-0xffff2. For LLC: Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub-values.a. DSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)b. SSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)3. For SNAP: Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub-values.a. OUI: OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) is value in format of xx-xx-xx where each pair (xx) in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00-0xff.b. PID: If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000, the protocol ID is the Ethernet type (EtherType) field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP; if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization, the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP.In other words, if value of OUI field is 00-00-00 then value of PID will be etype (0x0600-0xffff) and if value of OUI is other than 00-00-00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to 0xffff.
• Group Name	A valid Group Name is a unique 16-character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers(0-9).Note: special character and underscore(_) are not allowed.
• Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry	Click “Add New Entry”to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to the table; Frame Type, Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed.The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new entry in mapping table.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh

Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

4.6.13 Protocol-based VLAN Membership

This Page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch. The Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table screen in Figure 4-6-22 appears.

Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Port Members Delete | Group Name | VLAN ID | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 No Group entries Add New Entry Apply Reset Auto-refresh □ Refresh

Figure 4-6-22: Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save
Group Name	A valid Group Name is a string of almost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers(0-9), no special character is allowed. Whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this Page.
VLAN ID	Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped. A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1-4095.
Port Members	A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping. To include a port in a mapping, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the mapping, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry	Click “Add New Entry” to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to the table, the Group Name, VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095. The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

4.7 Spanning Tree Protocol

4.7.1 Theory

The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down. The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:

■ STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
■ RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
■ MSTP – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s)

The IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network. When multiple links between switches are detected, a primary link is established. Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links. The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link. Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled, primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically. The reactivation of the blocked links (at the time of a primary link failure) is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention.

This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users. However, the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood. It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured. Please read the following before making any changes from the default values.

The Switch STP performs the following functions:

■ Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements.
- Creates multiple spanning trees – from any combination of ports contained within a single switch, in user specified groups.
■ Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure, addition, or removal of any element in the tree.
■ Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention.

Bridge Protocol Data Units

For STP to arrive at a stable network topology, the following information is used:

■ The unique switch identifier
■ The path cost to the root associated with each switch port
■ The port identifier

STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs). Each BPDU contains the following information:

■ The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch

■ The path cost to the root from the transmitting port
■ The port identifier of the transmitting port

The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning-tree topology. All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU. BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch, but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU, and, if the topology changes, initiates a BPDU transmission.

The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following:

■ One switch is elected as the root switch
■ The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch
A designated switch is selected. This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root.
A port for each switch is selected. This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch.
■ Ports included in the STP are selected.

Creating a Stable STP Topology

It is to make the root port a fastest link. If all switches have STP enabled with default settings, the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch. By increasing the priority (lowering the priority number) of the best switch, STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch.

When STP is enabled using the default parameters, the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal. For instance, connecting higher-speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root-port change.

STP Port States

The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network. This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops. Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets. They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology. The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change. In addition, STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change.

Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states:

■ Blocking – the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets
■ Listening – the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state
■ □□Learning – the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database, but not yet forwarding packets
■ Forwarding – the port is forwarding packets
■ Disabled – the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first

A port transitions from one state to another as follows:

■ From initialization (switch boot) to blocking
■ From blocking to listening or to disabled
■ From listening to learning or to disabled
■ From learning to forwarding or to disabled

■ From forwarding to disabled
■ From disabled to blocking

graph TD
    A["Switch"] --> B["Blocking"]
    B --> C["Listening"]
    C --> D["Learning"]
    D --> E["Forwarding"]
    E --> F["Disable"]
    F --> B
    C --> G["Disable"]
    G --> F

Figure 4-7-1: STP Port State Transitions

You can modify each port state by using management software. When you enable STP, every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up. If properly configured, each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state. No packets (except BPDUs) are forwarded from, or received by, STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port.

2. STP Parameters

STP Operation Levels

The Switch allows for two levels of operation: the switch level and the port level. The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches. The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports. The STP operates in much the same way for both levels.

On the switch level, STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge and the Designated Bridges.

On the port level, STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports.

The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the switch level:

Parameter	Description	Default Value
Bridge Identifier(Not user configurable except by setting priority below)	A combination of the User-set priority and the switch's MAC address.The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts: a 16-bit priority and a 48-bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 + MAC	32768 + MAC
Priority	A relative priority for each switch – lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge	32768
Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of the hello message by the switch		2 seconds
Maximum Age Timer	Measures the age of a received BPDU for a port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer.	20 seconds
Forward Delay Timer	The amount time spent by a port in the learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state.	15 seconds

The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level:

Variable	Description	Default Value
Port Priority	A relative priority for each port –lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port	128
Port Cost	A value used by STP to evaluate paths – STP calculates path costs and selects the path with the minimum cost as the active path	200,000-100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports20,000-1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports0 - Auto

Default Spanning-Tree Configuration

Feature Default Value
Enable state	STP disabled for all ports
Port priority 128
Port cost 0
Bridge Priority 32,768

User-Changeable STA Parameters

The Switch's factory default setting should cover the majority of installations. However, it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory; unless, it is absolutely necessary. The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows:

Priority – A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535. 0 is equal to the highest Priority.

Hello Time – The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds. This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge. If you set a Hello Time for your Switch, and it is not the Root Bridge, the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge.

The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max. Age; otherwise, a configuration error will occur.

Max. Age – The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds. At the end of the Max Age, if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge, your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge. If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier, it will become the Root Bridge.

Forward Delay Timer – The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds. This is the time any port on the

Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state.

Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters:

Max. Age _ 2 x (Forward Delay - 1 second)

Max. Age _ 2 x (Hello Time + 1 second)

Port Priority – A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port.

Port Cost – A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets.

3. Illustration of STP

A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram. In this example, you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied. If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B, switch B will broadcast it to switch C, and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on. The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop, potentially causing a network failure. In this example, STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C. The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings.

Now, if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C, then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there. Setting-up STP using values other than the defaults, can be complex. Therefore, you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges/ports and block loop connections. Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting, or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is, however, relatively straight forward.

graph TD
    A["Bridge ID = 15"] -->|Port cost = 20,000| B["B"]
    A -->|Port cost = 20,000| C["C"]
    B -->|Port cost = 20,000| A
    B -->|Port cost = 20,000| C
    C -->|Port cost = 20,000| A
    C -->|Port cost = 20,000| B
    B -->|Port cost = 200,000| A
    B -->|Port cost = 200,000| C
    A -->|LAN1| A
    C -->|LAN3| C
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

Figure 4-7-2: Before Applying the STA Rules

In this example, only the default STP values are used.

graph TD
    A["Root Bridge"] -->|Designated Port| B["Node B"]
    A -->|Designated Port| C["Node C"]
    B -->|Root Port| A
    C -->|Root Port| A
    B -->|LAN2| A
    C -->|LAN3| A
    B -->|Blocked| C
    C -->|Blocked| B
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| A
    A -->|LAN1| B
    A -->|LAN1| C
    B -->|Port 1| A
    B -->|Port 2| A
    B -->|Port 3| A
    C -->|Port 1| A
    C -->|Port 2| A
    C -->|Port 3| A

Figure 4-7-3: After Applying the STA Rules

The switch with the lowest Bridge ID (switch C) was elected the root bridge, and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C. The two (optional) Gigabit ports (default port cost = 20,000) on switch A are connected to one (optional) Gigabit port on both switch B and C. The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link (default port cost = 200,000). Gigabit ports could be used, but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link.

4.7.2 STP System Configuration

This Page allows you to configure STP system settings. The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch or Switch Stack. The Wall-mount Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols:

• Compatibility -- Spanning Tree Protocol (STP): Provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops.
• Normalcy -- Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP): Detects and uses network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence, without creating forwarding loops.
• Extension – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP): Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs (VLANs). This "Per-VLAN" Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree.

The STP System Configuration screen in Figure 4-7-4 appears.

STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Protocol Version MSTP Bridge Priority 32768 Forward Delay 15 Max Age 20 Maximum Hop Count 20 Transmit Hold Count 6 Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering Edge Port BPDU Guard Port Error Recovery Port Error Recovery Timeout Apply Reset

Figure 4-7-4: STP Bridge Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Basic Settings

Object Description
Protocol Version	The STP protocol version setting. Valid values are:STP (IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol)RSTP (IEEE 802.2w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)MSTP (IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol)
Bridge Priority	Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.For MSTP operation, this is the priority of the CIST. Otherwise, this is the priority of the STP/RSTP bridge.
Forward Delay	The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding (used in STP compatible mode). Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds-Default: 15-Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]-Maximum: 30
Max Age	The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds.-Default: 20-Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].-Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay -1)]
Maximum Hop Count	This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region. It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops.
Transmit Hold Count	The number of BPDU's a bridge port can send per second. When exceeded, transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed. Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU's per second.

Advanced Settings

Object Description
• Edge Port BPDU Filtering	Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs.
• Edge Port BPDU Guard	Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU. The port will enter the error-disabled state, and will be removed from the active topology.
• Port Error Recovery	Control whether a port in the error-disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time. If recovery is not enabled, ports have to be disabled and re-enabled for normal STP operation. The condition is also cleared by a system reboot.
• Port Error RecoveryTimeout	The time that has to pass before a port in the error-disabled state can be enabled. Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds (24 hours).

The Wall-mount Managed Switch implements the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree protocol. When selecting “Compatibles” mode, the system uses the RSTP (802.1w) to be compatible and to co-work with another STP (802.1D)'s BPDU control packet.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.7.3 Bridge Status

This Page provides a status overview for all STP bridge instances. The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance, where the column displays the following information. The Bridge Status screen in Figure 4-7-5 appears.

MSTI	Bridge ID	Root			Topology Flag	Topology Change Last
		ID	Port	Cost
CIST	80:00-00:30:4F:11:22:55	80:00-00:30:4F:11:22:55	-	0	Steady	-
Auto-refresh ☐ Refresh

Figure 4-7-5: STP Bridge Status Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• MSTI	The Bridge Instance. This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status.
• Bridge ID	The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance.
• Root ID	The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge.
• Root Port	The switch port currently assigned the root port role.
• Root Cost	Root Path Cost. For the Root Bridge this is zero. For all other Bridges, it is thesum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge.
• Topology Flag	The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance.
• Topology Change Last	The time since last Topology Change occurred.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh: Click to refresh the Page immediately.

4.7.4 CIST Port Configuration

This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations, and possibly change them as well. The CIST Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-7-6 appears.

STP CIST Port Configuration
CIST Aggregated Port Configuration

Port	STP Enabled	Path Cost			Priority	Admin Edge	Auto Edge	Restricted		BPDU Guard	Point-to- Point
								Role	TCN
-	□	Auto	√	□	128	Non-Edge	√	□	□	□	Forced True

CIST Normal Port Configuration

Port	STP Enabled	Path Cost			Priority	Admin Edge	Auto Edge	Restricted		BPDU Guard	Point-to- Point
								Role	TCN
*
1		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
2		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
3		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
4		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
5		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
6		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
7		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
8		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
9		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
10		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
11		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
12		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
13		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
14		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
15		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
16		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
17		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
18		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
19		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto
20		Auto			128		Non-Edge				Auto

Figure 4-7-6 : STP CIST Port Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the logical STP port.
• STP Enabled	Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port.
• Path Cost	Controls the path cost incurred by the port. TheAutosetting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using theSpecificsetting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.
• Priority	Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost. (See above).Default: 128Range: 0-240, in steps of 16
• AdminEdge	Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared. (The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized).
• AutoEdge	Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port. This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU's are received on the port or not.
• Restricted Role	If enabled, causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI, even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector. Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected. If set, it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity. It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology, possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator. This feature is also known asRoot Guard.
• Restricted TCN	If enabled, causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports. If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree's active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information. It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network, causing address flushing in that region, possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently.
• BPDU Guard	If enabled, causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU's. Contrary to the similar bridge setting, the portEdgestatus does not effect this setting.A port entering error-disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge PortError Recovery setting as well.
• Point-to-point	Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather than a shared medium. This can be automatically determined, or forced either true or false.Transitions to the forwarding state is faster for point-to-point LANs than for shared media.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown below. Path cost "0" is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to 65,535.

Port Type	IEEE 802.1D-1998	IEEE 802.1w-2001
Ethernet	50-600	200,000-20,000,000
Fast Ethernet	10-60	20,000-2,000,000
Gigabit Ethernet	3-10	2,000-200,000

Table 4-7-1: Recommended STP Path Cost Range

Port Type	Link Type	IEEE 802.1D-1998	IEEE 802.1w-2001
Ethernet	Half Duplex	100	2,000,000
	Full Duplex	95	1,999,999
	Trunk	90	1,000,000
Fast Ethernet	Half Duplex	19	200,000
	Full Duplex	18	100,000
	Trunk	15	50,000
Gigabit Ethernet	Full Duplex	4	10,000
	Trunk	3	5,000

Table 4-7-2: Recommended STP Path Costs

Port Type	Link Type	IEEE 802.1w-2001
Ethernet	Half Duplex	2,000,000
	Full Duplex	1,000,000
	Trunk	500,000
Fast Ethernet	Half Duplex	200,000
	Full Duplex	100,000
	Trunk 50,000
Gigabit Ethernet	Full Duplex	10,000
	Trunk	5,000

Table 4-7-3: Default STP Path Costs

4.7.5 MSTI Priorities

This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations, and possibly change them as well. The MSTI Priority screen in Figure 4-7-7 appears.

MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration MSTI Priority * CIST 32768 MSTI1 32768 MSTI2 32768 MSTI3 32768 MSTI4 32768 MSTI5 32768 MSTI6 32768 MSTI7 32768 Apply Reset

Figure 4-7-7: MSTI Priority Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• MSTI	The bridge instance. The CIST is the default instance, which is always active.
• Priority	Controls the bridge priority. Lower numerical values have better priority. The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.7.6 MSTI Configuration

This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations, and possibly change them as well. The MSTI Configuration screen in Figure 4-7-8 appears.

MSTI Configuration

Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma.

Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST. (The default bridge instance).

Configuration Identification

Configuration Name	00-30-4f-11-22-33
Configuration Revision	0

MSTI Mapping

MSTI VLANs Mapped MSTI1 MSTI2 MSTI3 MSTI4 MSTI5 MSTI6 MSTI7 Apply Reset

Figure 4-7-8: MSTI Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Configuration Identification

Object Description
Configuration Name	The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping. Bridges must share the name and revision (see below), as well as the VLAN-to-MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI's. (Intra-region). The name is at most 32 characters.
Configuration Revision	The revision of the MSTI configuration named above. This must be an integer between 0 and 65535.

MSTI Mapping

Object Description
• MSTI	The bridge instance. The CIST is not available for explicit mapping, as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped.
• VLANs Mapped	The list of VLAN's mapped to the MSTI. The VLANs must be separated with comma and/or space. A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI. A unused MSTI should just be left empty. (i.e. not having any VLANs mapped to it.)

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.7.7 MSTI Ports Configuration

This Page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations, and possibly change them as well. A MSTI port is a virtual port, which is instantiated separately for each active CIST (physical) port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port. The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options.

This Page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports. The aggregation settings are stack global. The MSTI Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-7-9 & Figure 4-7-10 appears.

MSTI Port Configuration Select MSTI MST1 Get

Figure 4-7-9 : MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

MSTI Port Configuration

Object Description
• Select MSTI	Select the bridge instance and set more detail configuration.

MST1 MSTI Port Configuration

MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration

Port	Path Cost			Priority
-	Auto			128

MSTI Normal Ports Configuration

Port	Path Cost			Priority
*
1	Auto			128
2	Auto			128
3	Auto			128
4	Auto			128
5	Auto			128
6	Auto			128
7	Auto			128

Figure 4-7-10 : MST1 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

MSTx MSTI Port Configuration

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST (and MSTI) port.
• Path Cost	Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.
• Priority	Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost.

Buttons

Click to set MSTx configuration

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.7.8 Port Status

This Page displays the STP CIST port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch.

The STP Port Status screen in Figure 4-7-11 appears.

STP Port Status Port CIST Role CIST State Uptime 1 Non-STP Forwarding - 2 Non-STP Forwarding - 3 Non-STP Forwarding - 4 Non-STP Forwarding - 5 Non-STP Forwarding - 6 Non-STP Forwarding - 7 Non-STP Forwarding - 8 Non-STP Forwarding - 9 Non-STP Forwarding - 10 Non-STP Forwarding - 11 Non-STP Forwarding - 12 Non-STP Forwarding - 13 Non-STP Forwarding - 14 Non-STP Forwarding - 15 Non-STP Forwarding - 16 Non-STP Forwarding - 17 Non-STP Forwarding - 18 Non-STP Forwarding - 19 Non-STP Forwarding - 20 Non-STP Forwarding - Auto-refresh □ Refresh

Figure 4-7-11: STP Port Status Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the logical STP port.
• CIST Role	The current STP port role of the ICST port. The port role can be one of the following values:AlternatePortBackupPortRootPortDesignatedPortDisable
• CIST State	The current STP port state of the CIST port . The port state can be one of the following values:DisabledLearningForwarding
• Uptime	The time since the bridge port was last initialized.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

4.7.9 Port Statistics

This Page displays the STP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch.

The STP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4-7-12 appears.

STP Statistics

Port Transmitted Received Discarded MSTP|RSTP STP TCN MSTP RSTP STP TCN Unknown Illegal No ports enabled Auto-refresh □ Refresh Clear

Figure 4-7-12: STP Statistics Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the logical RSTP port.
• MSTP	The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
• RSTP	The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
• STP	The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
• TCN	The number of (legacy) Topology Change Notification BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.
• Discarded Unknown	The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.
• Discarded Illegal	The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clear

Clears the counters for all ports.

4.8 Multicast

4.8.1 IGMP Snooping

The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships. IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing. The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group.

About the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping

Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group. The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used to communicate this information. IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active. In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network, one router is elected as the 'queried'. This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members. The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not. The router can check, using IGMP, to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work. If there are no members on a sub network, packets will not be forwarded to that sub network.

graph TD
    A["IPTV Server"] -->|A| Switch1["Switch"]
    A -->|A| Switch2["Switch"]
    A -->|B| B["Multicast Receiver"]
    B -->|B| Switch3["Switch"]
    B -->|C| Switch4["Switch"]
    B -->|D| Switch5["Switch"]
    Switch1 -->|D| MulticastReceiver["Multicast Receiver"]
    Switch2 -->|D| MulticastReceiver
    Switch3 -->|D| MulticastReceiver
    Switch4 -->|D| MulticastReceiver
    Switch5 -->|D| MulticastReceiver
    Switch3 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter["Multicast Transmitter"]
    Switch4 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter
    Switch5 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter
    Switch3 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter
    Switch4 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter
    Switch5 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter
    Switch3 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter
    Switch4 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter
    Switch5 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter
    Switch3 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter
    Switch4 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter
    Switch5 -->|D| MulticastTransmitter
    Switch3 <-->|Give me multicast stream| B

Figure 4-8-1: Multicast Service

graph TD
    A["IPTV Server"] -->|I don't want the stream| B["Switch"]
    A -->|I don't want the stream| C["Router"]
    D["Multicast Transmitter"] -->|I don't want the stream| B
    D -->|I don't want the stream| C
    E["Multicast Receiver"] -->|I don't want the stream| B
    F["Multicast Receiver"] -->|I don't want the stream| C
    G["IP"] -->|I don't want the stream| B
    H["Switch"] --> B
    I["Switch"] --> C
    J["Switch"] --> C
    K["IPTV Server"] -->|I don't want the stream| B
    L["Multicast Transmitter"] -->|I don't want the stream| B
    M["Multicast Receiver"] -->|I don't want the stream| C

Figure 4-8-2: Multicast Flooding

graph TD
    A["IPTV Server"] -->|Multicast Transmitter| B["IGMP Snooping Switch"]
    A -->|Multicast Transmitter| C["Router"]
    A -->|Multicast Transmitter| D["IGMP Snooping Switch"]
    B -->|IGMP Snooping Switch| E["Router"]
    C -->|IGMP Snooping Switch| F["Router"]
    D -->|IGMP Snooping Switch| G["Router"]
    E --> H["Multicast Receiver"]
    F --> I["Multicast Receiver"]
    G --> J["Multicast Receiver"]
    B --> K["Multicast Receiver"]
    C --> L["Multicast Receiver"]
    D --> M["Multicast Receiver"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#cff,stroke:#333

Figure 4-8-3: IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control

IGMP Versions 1 and 2

Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time. IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group. IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112. It has a fixed packet size and no optional data. The format of an IGMP packet is shown below:

IGMP Message Format

Octets

Type Response Time	Checksum
Group Address (all zeros if this is a query)

The IGMP Type codes are shown below:

Type Meaning
0x11	Membership Query (if Group Address is 0.0.0.0)
0x11	Specific Group Membership Query (if Group Address is Present)
0x16	Membership Report (version 2)
0x17	Leave a Group (version 2)
0x12	Membership Report (version 1)

IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups, on their respective sub networks.

The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP.

A host sends an IGMP "report" to join a group

A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group (for version 1).

A host will send a "leave" report when it wants to leave a group (for version 2).

Multicast routers send IGMP queries (to the all-hosts group address: 224.0.0.1) periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks. If there is no response from a particular group, the router assumes that there are no group members on the network.

The Time-to-Live (TTL) field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks.

IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN, an explicit leave message, and query messages that are specific to a given group.

The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below:

graph TD
    A["Non-Member"] -->|Leave Group (Stop Timer)| B["Delaying Member"]
    A -->|Leave Group| C["Idle Member"]
    B -->|Query Received (Start Timer) Report Received (Stop Timer) Timer Expried (Send report)| C
    C -->|Join Group (Send Report Start Timer)| A

Figure 4-8-4: IGMP State Transitions

IGMP Querier –

A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected "querier" and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.

Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.

4.8.2 Profile Table

This page provides IPMC Profile related configurations. The IPMC profile is used to deploy the access control on IP multicast streams. It is allowed to create a maximum of 64 Profiles with a maximum of 128 corresponding rules for each. The Profile Table screen in Figure 4-8-5 appears.

IPMC Profile Configurations

IPMC Profile Table Setting

Delete Profile Name Profile Description Rule Delete Add New IPMC Profile Apply Reset

Figure 4-8-5: IPMC Profile Configuration Page

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Global Profile Mode	Enable/Disable the Global IPMC Profile.System starts to do filtering based on profile settings only when the global profile mode is enabled.
• Delete	Check to delete the entry.The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
• Profile Name	The name used for indexing the profile table.Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic and numeric characters. At least one alphabet must be present.
• Profile Description	Additional description, which is composed of at maximum 64 alphabetic and numeric characters, about the profile.No blank or space characters are permitted as part of description. Use " _" or "-" to separate the description sentence.
• Rule	When the profile is created, click the edit button to enter the rule setting page of the designated profile. Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button. You can manage or inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the following buttons:#: List the rules associated with the designated profile.#: Adjust the rules associated with the designated profile.

Buttons

Add New IPMC Profile: Click to add new IPMC profile. Specify the name and configure the new entry. Click "Save".

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.3 Address Entry

This page provides address range settings used in IPMC profile. The address entry is used to specify the address range that will be associated with IPMC Profile. It is allowed to create a maximum of 128 address entries in the system. The Profile Table screen in Figure 4-8-6 appears.

IPMC Profile Address Configuration Refresh |<< >> Navigate Address Entry Setting in IPMC Profile by 20 entries per page. Delete Entry Name Start Address End Address Delete Add New Address (Range) Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-8-6: IPMC Profile Address Configuration Page

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry.The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
Entry Name	The name used for indexing the address entry table.Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic and numeric characters. At least one alphabet must be present.
Start Address	The starting IPv4/IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range.
End Address	The ending IPv4/IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range.

Buttons

Add New Address (Range) Entry: Click to add new address range. Specify the name and configure the addresses. Click "Save".

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Refresh

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

|<<

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address Configuration.

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.8.4 IGMP Snooping Configuration

This Page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration. The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-7 appears.

IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled ✓ Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled □ IGMP SSM Range 232.0.0.0 / 8 Leave Proxy Enabled □ Proxy Enabled □ Port Related Configuration Port Router Port Fast Leave Throttling * □ ✓ 1 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ 2 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ 3 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ 4 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ 5 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ 6 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ 15 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ 16 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ 17 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ 18 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ 19 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ 20 Auto □ Unlimited ✓ Apply Reset

Figure 4-8-7: IGMP Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Snooping Enabled	Enable the Global IGMP Snooping.
Unregistered IPMCv4Flooding Enabled	Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding.The flooding control takes effect only when IGMP Snooping is enabled.When IGMP Snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding is always active in spite of this setting.
IGMP SSM Range	SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range.
Leave Proxy Enable	Enable IGMP Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side.
Proxy Enable	Enable IGMP Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side.
Router Port	Specify which ports act as IGMP router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier. The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP router port.■ Auto:Select “Auto” to have the Wall-mount Managed Switch automatically uses the port as IGMP Router port if the port receives IGMP query packets.■ Fix:The Wall-mount Managed Switch always uses the specified port as an IGMP Router port. Use this mode when you connect an IGMP multicast server or IP camera which applied with multicast protocol to the port.■ None:The Wall-mount Managed Switch will not use the specified port as an IGMP Router port. The Wall-mount Managed Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port. Use this mode when you connect other IGMP multicast servers directly on the non-querier Wall-mount Managed Switch and don’t want the multicast stream be flood to uplink switch through the port that connected to the IGMP querier.
Fast Leave	Enable the fast leave on the port.
Throtting	Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.5 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration

Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.

The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table. The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-8 appears.

IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Refresh |<< >> Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page. Delete VLAN ID Snooping Enabled Querier Election Querier Address Compatibility PRI RV QI (sec) QRI (0.1 sec) LLQI (0.1 sec) URI (sec) Add New IGMP VLAN Apply Reset

Figure 4-8-8: IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
IGMP Snooping Enable	Enable the per-VLAN IGMP Snooping. Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected.
Querier Election	Enable the IGMP Querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as an IGMP Non-Querier.
Querier Address	Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP Querier election.When the Querier address is not set, system uses IPv4 management address of the IP interface associated with this VLAN.When the IPv4 management address is not set, system uses the first available IPv4 management address. Otherwise, system uses a pre-defined value.By default, this value will be 192.0.2.1
Compatibility	Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network. The allowed selection is IGMP-Auto, Forced IGMPv1, Forced IGMPv2, Forced IGMPv3.Default compatibility value is IGMP-Auto.
• PRI	(PRI) Priority of Interface. It indicates the IGMP control frame priority level generated by the system. These values can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic.The allowed range is 0 (best effort) to 7 (highest), default interface priority value is 0
• RV	Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network.The allowed range is 1 to 255, default robustness variable value is 2.
• QI	Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds, default query interval is 125 seconds.
• QRI	Query Response Interval. The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries.The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).
• LLQI (LMQI for IGMP)	Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last Member Query Count.The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds (1 second).
• URI	Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group.The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval is 1 second.

Buttons

Refresh

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

k<

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

Add New IGMP VLAN

: Click to add new IGMP VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry.

Click "Save". The specific IGMP VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.6 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering

In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service based on a specific subscription plan. The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.

IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port. An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one profile can be assigned to a port. When enabled, IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group is permitted, the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group is denied, the IGMP join report is dropped.

IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can take one of two actions; either "deny" or "replace". If the action is set to deny, any new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group. The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-9 appears.

Figure 4-8-9: IGMP Snooping Port Filtering Profile Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings.
• Filtering Profile	Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port. Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.7 IGMP Snooping Status

This Page provides IGMP Snooping status. The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4-8-10 appears.

Auto-refresh □ Refresh Clear

IGMP Snooping Status

Statistics

VLAN ID

Querier Version

Host Version

Querier Status

Queries Transmitted

Queries Received

V1 Reports Received

V2 Reports Received

V3 Reports Received

V2 Leaves Received

Router Port

Port	Status
1	-
2	-
3	-
4	-
5	-
6	-
7	-
8	-
9	-
10	-
11	-
12	-
13	-
14	-
15	-
16	-
17	-
18	-
19	-
20	-

Figure 4-8-10: IGMP Snooping Status Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
• Querier Version	Working Querier Version currently.
• Host Version	Working Host Version currently.
• Querier Status	Show the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".
• Querier Transmitted	The number of Transmitted Querier.
• Querier Received	The number of Received Querier.
• V1 Reports Received	The number of Received V1 Reports.
• V2 Reports Received	The number of Received V2 Reports.
• V3 Reports Received	The number of Received V3 Reports.
• V2 Leave Received	The number of Received V2 Leave.
• Router Port	Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier. Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port. Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port. Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.
• Port	Switch port number.
• Status	Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clear

Clears all Statistics counters.

Auto-refresh

☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.8.8 IGMP Group Information

Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this Page. The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group. Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table. The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table. The IGMP Groups Information screen in Figure 4-8-11 appears.

IGMP Snooping Group Information Auto-refresh □ Refresh |<< >> Start from VLAN 1 and group Address 224.0.0.0 with 20 entries per page. Port Members VLAN ID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 No more entries

Figure 4-8-9: IGMP Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	VLAN ID of the group.
• Groups	Group address of the group displayed.
• Port Members	Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.8.9 IGMPv3 Information

Entries in the IGMP SSM Information Table are shown on this Page. The IGMP SSM Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port No. Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry.

Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SSM (Source Specific Multicast) Information table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP SSM Information Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "Group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP SSM Information Table. The IGMPv3 Information screen in Figure 4-8-12 appears.

IGMP SFM Information Auto-refresh □ Refresh << >> Start from VLAN 1 and Group 224.0.0.0 with 20 entries per page. VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source Address Type Hardware Filter/Switch No more entries

Figure 4-8-12: IGMP SSM Information Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	VLAN ID of the group.
• Group	Group address of the group displayed.
• Port	Switch port number.
• Mode	Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.
• Source Address	IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128.
• Type	Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
• Hardware Filter/Switch	Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv4 address could be handled by chip or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

k

Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.8.10 MLD Snooping Configuration

This Page provides MLD Snooping related configuration. The MLD Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-13 appears.

MLD Snooping Configuration

Global Configuration
Snooping Enabled	✓
Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding Enabled	☐
MLD SSM Range	ff3e:: / 96
Leave Proxy Enabled	☐
Proxy Enabled	☐

Port Related Configuration

Port Router Port Fast Leave Throttling * ▼ □ ▼ 1 Auto ▼ □ Unlimited ▼ 2 Auto ▼ □ Unlimited ▼ 3 Auto ▼ □ Unlimited ▼ 4 Auto ▼ □ Unlimited ▼ 5 Auto ▼ □ Unlimited ▼ 15 Auto ▼ □ Unlimited ▼ 16 Auto ▼ □ Unlimited ▼ 17 Auto ▼ □ Unlimited ▼ 18 Auto ▼ □ Unlimited ▼ 19 Auto ▼ □ Unlimited ▼ 20 Auto ▼ □ Unlimited ▼ Apply Reset

Figure 4-8-13: MLD Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Snooping Enabled	Enable the Global MLD Snooping.
• Unregistered IPMCv6Flooding enabled	Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding.The flooding control takes effect only when MLD Snooping is enabled.When MLD Snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding is always active in spite of this setting.
• MLD SSM Range	SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range.
• Leave Proxy Enable	Enable MLD Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side.
Proxy Enable	Enable MLD Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side.
Router Port	Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier.If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act as a router port. The allowed selection isAuto, Fix, Fone, default compatibility value is Auto.
Fast Leave	Enable the fast leave on the port.
Throtting	Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.11 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration

Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.

The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table. The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-14 appears.

MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Refresh |<< >> Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page. Delete VLAN ID Snooping Enabled Querier Election Compatibility PRI RV QI (sec) QRI (0.1 sec) LLQI (0.1 sec) URI (sec) Add New MLD VLAN Apply Reset

Figure 4-8-14: IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Delete	Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
• VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
• MLD Snooping Enable	Enable the per-VLAN MLD Snooping. Up to 32 VLANs can be selected for MLD Snooping.
• Querier Election	Enable to join MLD Querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as a MLD Non-Querier.
• Compatibility	Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network. The allowed selection is MLD-Auto, Forced MLDv1, Forced MLDv2, default compatibility value is MLD-Auto.
• PRI	(PRI) Priority of Interface. It indicates the MLD control frame priority level generated by the system. These values can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic. The allowed range is 0 (best effort) to 7 (highest), default interface priority value is 0
• RV	Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network. The allowed range is 1 to 255, default robustness variable value is 2.
• QI	Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds, default query interval is 125 seconds.
• QRI	Query Response Interval. The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).
• LLQI (LMQI for IGMP)	Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last Member Query Count. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds (1 second).
• URI	Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval is 1 second.

Buttons

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

New MLD VLAN :Click to add new MLD VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry.

Click "Save". The specific MLD VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.12 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering

In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service based on a specific subscription plan. The MLD filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and MLD throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.

MLD filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port. A MLD filter profile can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one profile can be assigned to a port. When enabled, MLD join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group is permitted, the MLD join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group is denied, the MLD join report is dropped.

MLD throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can take one of two actions; either "deny" or "replace". If the action is set to deny, any new MLD join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group. The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-15 appears.

MLD Snooping Port Filtering Profile Configuration

Port Filtering Profile 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - Apply Reset

Figure 4-8-15: MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings.
• Filtering Group	Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port. Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.13 MLD Snooping Status

This Page provides MLD Snooping status. The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4-8-16 appears.

Auto-refresh □ Refresh Clear

MLD Snooping Status

Statistics

VLAN ID

Querier Version

Host Version

Querier Status

Queries Transmitted

Queries Received

V1 Reports Received

V2 Reports Received

V1 Leaves Received

Router Port

graph TD
    A["Port"] --> B["1"]
    A --> C["2"]
    A --> D["3"]
    A --> E["4"]
    A --> F["5"]
    A --> G["6"]
    A --> H["15"]
    A --> I["16"]
    A --> J["17"]
    A --> K["18"]
    A --> L["19"]
    A --> M["20"]
    B --> N["-"]
    C --> O["-"]
    D --> P["-"]
    E --> Q["-"]
    F --> R["-"]
    G --> S["-"]
    H --> T["-"]
    I --> U["-"]
    J --> V["-"]
    K --> W["-"]
    L --> X["-"]
    M --> Y["-"]

Figure 4-8-16: MLD Snooping Status Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
• Querier Version	Working Querier Version currently.
• Host Version	Working Host Version currently.
• Querier Status	Shows the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE"."DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.
• Querier Transmitted	The number of Transmitted Querier.
• Querier Received	The number of Received Querier.
• V1 Reports Received	The number of Received V1 Reports.
• V2 Reports Received	The number of Received V2 Reports.
• V1 Leave Received	The number of Received V1 Leaves.
• Router Port	Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernetswitch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier.■ Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.■ Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port.■ Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.
• Port	Switch port number.
• Status	Indicates whether specific port is a router port or not.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clear

Clears all Statistics counters.

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.8.14 MLD Group Information

Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this Page. The MLD Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group. Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table. The MLD Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4-8-17 appears.

MLD Snooping Group Information Auto-refresh □ Refresh |<< >> Start from VLAN 1 and group Address ff00:: with 20 entries per page. Port Members VLAN ID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 No more entries

Figure 4-8-17: MLD Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	VLAN ID of the group.
• Groups	Group address of the group displayed.
• Port Members	Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

<<: Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table. >>: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.8.15 MLDv2 Information

Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this Page. The MLD SFM (Source-Filtered Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port. Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry. Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD SFM Information table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD SFM Information Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD SFM Information Table. The MLDv2 Information screen in Figure 4-8-18 appears.

MLD SFM Information Auto-refresh Refresh k<< >> Start from VLAN 1 and Group ff00:: with 20 entries per page. VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source Address Type Hardware Filter/Switch No more entries

Figure 4-8-18: MLD SSM Information Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	VLAN ID of the group.
• Group	Group address of the group displayed.
• Port	Switch port number.
• Mode	Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.
• Source Address	IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128.
• Type	Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
• Hardware Filter/Switch	Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFM Information Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.8.16 MVR (Multicaset VLAN Registration)

The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLANs.

In a multicast television application, a PC or a network television or a set-top box can receive the multicast stream.
■ Multiple set-top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port, which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port. When a subscriber selects a channel, the set-top box or PC sends an IGMP/MLD report message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast group address.
■ Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports.

It is allowed to create at maximum 8 MVR VLANs with corresponding channel settings for each Multicast VLAN. There will be totally at maximum 256 group addresses for channel settings.

graph TD
    A["Service Provider"] --> B["Multicast Server"]
    B --> C["Service Network"]
    C --> D["MVR Layer 2 Switch"]
    D --> E["Receiver Port"]
    D --> F["Receiver Port"]
    D --> G["Receiver Port"]
    E --> H["Set-top Box"]
    F --> I["Set-top Box"]
    G --> J["Set-top Box"]
    C --> K["Source Port"]
    K --> D
    style A fill:#4CAF50,stroke:#388E3C
    style B fill:#4CAF50,stroke:#388E3C
    style C fill:#4CAF50,stroke:#388E3C
    style D fill:#4CAF50,stroke:#388E3C
    style E fill:#4CAF50,stroke:#388E3C
    style F fill:#4CAF50,stroke:#388E3C
    style G fill:#4CAF50,stroke:#388E3C
    style H fill:#4CAF50,stroke:#388E3C
    style I fill:#4CAF50,stroke:#388E3C
    style J fill:#4CAF50,stroke:#388E3C

This Page provides MVR related configuration. The MVR screen in Figure 4-8-19 appears.

MVR Configurations

MVR Mode Disabled

VLAN Interface Setting (Role [I:Inactive / S:Source / R:Receiver])

Delete MVR VID MVR Name IGMP Address Mode Tagging Priority LLQI Interface Channel Profile

Add New MVR VLAN

Immediate Leave Setting

Port Immediate Leave * ✓ 1 Disabled ✓ 2 Disabled ✓ 3 Disabled ✓ 4 Disabled ✓ 5 Disabled ✓ 6 Disabled ✓ ✓ Disabled ✓ 15 ✓ 14 Disabled ✓ 15 Disabled ✓ 16 Disabled ✓ 17 Disabled ✓ 18 Disabled ✓ 19 Disabled ✓ 20 Disabled ✓ Apply Reset

Figure 4-8-19: MVR Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• MVR Mode	Enable/Disable the Global MVR.The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current configuration in IGMP/MLD Snooping.It is suggested to enable Unregistered Flooding control when the MVR group table is full.
• Delete	Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.
• MVR VID	Specify the Multicast VLAN ID.Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped withmanagement VLAN ports.
• MVR Name	MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVR VLAN. Maximum length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 16. MVR VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers. When the optional MVR VLAN name is given, it should contain at least one alphabet. MVR VLAN name can be edited for the existing MVR VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries.
• IGMP Address	Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP control frames. The default IGMP address is not set (0.0.0.0).When the IGMP address is not set, system uses IPv4 management address of the IP interface associated with this VLAN.When the IPv4 management address is not set, system uses the first available IPv4 management address. Otherwise, system uses a pre-defined value. By default, this value will be 192.0.2.1.
• Mode	Specify the MVR mode of operation. In Dynamic mode, MVR allows dynamic MVR membership reports on source ports. In Compatible mode, MVR membership reports are forbidden on source ports. The default is Dynamic mode.
• Tagging	Specify whether the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent as Untagged or Tagged with MVR VID. The default is Tagged.
• Priority	Specify how the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent in prioritized manner. The default Priority is 0.
• LLQI	Define the maximum time to wait for IGMP/MLD report memberships on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership. The value is in units of tenths of a seconds. The range is from 0 to 31744. The default LLQI is 5 tenths or one-half second.
• Interface Channel Setting	When the MVR VLAN is created, select the IPMC Profile as the channel filtering condition for the specific MVR VLAN. Summary about the Interface Channel Profiling (of the MVR VLAN) will be shown by clicking the view button. Profile selected for designated interface channel is not allowed to have overlapped permit group address.
• Port	The logical port for the settings.
• Port Role	Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following roles.Inactive: The designated port does not participate MVR operations.Source: Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast data as source ports. Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports.Receiver: Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and should only receive multicast data. It does not receive data unless it becomes a member of the multicast group by issuing IGMP/MLD messages.Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports.Select the port role by clicking the Role symbol to switch the setting.I indicates Inactive; S indicates Source; R indicates ReceiverThe default Role is Inactive.
• Immediate Leave	Enable the fast leave on the port.

Buttons

Add New MVR VLAN

Click to add new MVR VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry. Click "Save"

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.17 MVR Status

This Page provides MVR status. The MVR Status screen in Figure 4-8-20 appears.

VLAN ID	IGMP/MLD Queries Received	IGMP/MLD Queries Transmitted	IGMPv1 Joins Received	IGMPv2/MLDv1 Reports Received	IGMPv3/MLDv2 Reports Received	IGMPv2/MLDv1 Leaves Received
No more entries
Auto-refresh ☐ Refresh Clear

Figure 4-8-20: MVR Status Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	The Multicast VLAN ID.
• IGMP/MLD Queries Received	The number of Received Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.
• IGMP/MLD Queries Transmitted	The number of Transmitted Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.
• IGMPv1 Joins Received	The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins.
• IGMPv2/MLDv1 Reports Received	The number of Received IGMPv2 Joins and MLDv1 Reports, respectively.
• IGMPv3/MLDv2 Reports Received	The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins and MLDv2 Reports, respectively.
• IGMPv2/MLDv1 Leaves Received	The number of Received IGMPv2 Leaves and MLDv1 Dones, respectively.

Buttons

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clears all Statistics counters.

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.8.18 MVR Groups Information

Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this Page. The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group. Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR Group Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR Group Table. The MVR Groups Information screen in Figure 4-8-21 appears.

MVR Channels (Groups) Information Auto-refresh □ Refresh |<< >> Start from VLAN 1 and Group Address : : with 20 entries per page. Port Members VLAN ID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 No more entries

Figure 4-8-21: MVR Groups Information Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN	VLAN ID of the group.
• Groups	Group ID of the group displayed.
• Port Members	Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

odates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Channels (Groups) Information Table.

odates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.8.19 MVR SFM Information

Entries in the MVR SFM Information Table are shown on this Page. The MVR SFM (Source-Filtered Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port. Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry.

Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR SFM Information Table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR SFM Information Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "Group Address" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR SFM Information Table. The MVR SFM Information screen in Figure 4-8-22 appears.

MVR SFM Information Auto-refresh □ Refresh k< >> Start from VLAN 1 and Group Address :: with 20 entries per page. VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source Address Type Hardware Filter/Switch No more entries

Figure 4-8-22: MVR SFM Information Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• VLAN ID	VLAN ID of the group.
• Group	Group address of the group displayed.
• Port	Switch port number.
• Mode	Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.
• Source Address	IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128. When there is no any source filtering address, the text "None" is shown in the Source Address field.
• Type	Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
• Hardware Filter / Switch	Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv4/IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR SFM Information Table.

4.9 Quality of Service

4.9.1 Understanding QoS

Quality of Service (QoS) is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic. QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic, such as multi-media, video, protocol-specific, time critical, and file-backup traffic.

QoS reduces bandwidth limitations, delay, loss, and jitter. It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network. You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic. You can use QoS on your system to:

• Control a wide variety of network traffic by:
• Classifying traffic based on packet attributes.
- Assigning priorities to traffic (for example, to set higher priorities to time-critical or business-critical applications).
- Applying security policy through traffic filtering.
- Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter.
- Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows.
- Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network.
- Manage network congestion.

QoS Terminology

• Classifier—classifies the traffic on the network. Traffic classifications are determined by protocol, application, source, destination, and so on. You can create and modify classifications. The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level.
• DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) — is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain applications and/or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network.
• Service Level – defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic. You can create and modify service levels.
• Policy—comprises a set of “rules” that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business. That is, traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type.
• QoS Profile – consists of multiple sets of rules (classifier plus service level combinations). The QoS profile is assigned to a port(s).
• Rules—comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic. Rules are associated with a QoS Profile (see above).

To implement QoS on your network, you need to carry out the following actions:

1. Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic.
2. Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch.
3. Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier.
4. Apply a QoS profile to a port(s).

4.9.2 Port Policing

This Page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports. The Port Policing screen in Figure 4-9-1 appears.

QoS Ingress Port Policers

Port Enabled Rate Unit Flow Control * □ 500 ▼ □ 1 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 2 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 3 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 4 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 5 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 6 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 7 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 15 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 16 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 17 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 18 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 19 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ 20 □ 500 kbps ▼ □ Apply Reset

Figure 4-9-1: QoS Ingress Port Policers Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration below applies.
• Enable	Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port.
• Rate	Controls the rate for the policer. This value is restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps" or "fps", and it is restricted to 1-3300 when the "Unit" is "Mbps" or "kfps".The default value is 500.
• Unit	Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps, Mbps, fps or kfps . The default value is "kbps".
• Flow Control	If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode, then pause frames are sent instead of discarding frames.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.3 Port Classification

This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports. The Port Classification screen in Figure 4-9-2 appears.

QoS Ingress Port Classification

Port CoS DPL PCP DEI Tag Class. DSCP Based Address Mode * □ ✓ 1 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 2 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 3 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 4 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 5 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 6 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 7 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 15 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 16 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 17 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 18 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 19 0 0 0 0 Disabled □ Source ✓ 20 0 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Latch Apply Reset

Figure 4-9-2 : QoS Ingress Port Classification Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration below applies.
• CoS	Controls the default class of service.All frames are classified to a CoS. There is a one to one mapping between CoS,queue and priority. A CoS of 0 (zero) has the lowest priority.If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is classified toa CoS that is based on the PCP value in the tag as shown below. Otherwise theframe is classified to the default CoS.PCP value: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7CoS value: 1 0 2 3 4 5 6 7The classified CoS can be overruled by a QCL entry.Note: If the default CoS has been dynamically changed, then the actual defaultCoS is shown in parentheses after the configured default CoS.All means all ports will have one specific setting.
• DPL	Controls the default drop precedence level.All frames are classified to a drop precedence level.If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is classified to a DPL that is equal to the DEI value in the tag. Otherwise the frame is classified to the default DPL. The classified DPL can be overruled by a QCL entry.All means all ports will have one specific setting.
• PCP	Controls the defaultPCPvalue. All frames are classified to a PCP value.If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is classified to the PCP value in the tag. Otherwise the frame is classified to the default PCP value.All means all ports will have one specific setting.
• DEI	Controls the defaultDEIvalue. All frames are classified to a DEI value.If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is classified to the DEI value in the tag. Otherwise the frame is classified to the default DEI value.All means all ports will have one specific setting.
• Tag Class.	Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port.■Disabled: Use default CoS and DPL for tagged frames.■Enabled: Use mapped versions ofPCPandDEIfor tagged frames.Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and/or mapping.Note: This setting has no effect if the port is VLAN unaware. Tagged frames received on VLAN unaware ports are always classified to the default CoS and DPL.
• DSCP Based	Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification.
• Address Mode	The IP/MAC address mode specifying whether theQCLclassification must be based on source (SMAC/SIP) or destination (DMAC/DIP) addresses on this port.The allowed values are:■Source: Enable SMAC/SIP matching.■Destination: Enable DMAC/DIP matching.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.4 Port Scheduler

This Page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports. The Port Scheduler screen in Figure 4-9-3 appears.

QoS Egress Port Schedulers

Port	Mode	Weight
		Q0	Q1	Q2	Q3	Q4	Q5
1	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
2	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
3	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
4	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
5	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
6	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
7	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
8	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
9	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
10	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
11	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
12	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
13	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
14	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
15	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
16	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
17	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
18	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
19	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-
20	Strict Priority	-	-	-	-	-	-

Figure 4-9-3: QoS Egress Port Schedule Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers.For more detail, please refer to chapter 4.9.5.1.
• Mode	Shows the scheduling mode for this port.
• Q0 ~ Q5	Shows the weight for this queue and port.

4.9.5 Port Shaping

This Page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports. The Port Shapping screen in Figure 4-9-4 appears.

QoS Egress Port Shapers

Port	Shapers
	Q0	Q1	Q2	Q3	Q4	Q5	Q6	Q7	Port
1	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
2	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
3	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
4	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
5	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
6	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
7	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
8	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
9	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
10	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
11	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
12	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
13	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
14	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
15	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
16	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
17	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
18	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
19	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled
20	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled

Figure 4-9-4: QoS Egress Port Shapers Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers.For more detail, please refer to chapter 4.9.5.1.
• Q0 ~Q7	Shows "disabled" or actual queue shaper rate - e.g. "800 Mbps".
• Port	Shows "disabled" or actual port shaper rate - e.g. "800 Mbps".

4.9.5.1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers

The Port Scheduler and Shapers for a specific port are configured on this Page. The QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shaper screen in Figure 4-9-5 appears.

graph LR
    A["Queue Shaper"] --> B["Enable Rate Unit Excess"]
    C["Port Shaper"] --> D["Enable Rate Unit"]
    B --> E["500 kbps"]
    B --> F["500 kbps"]
    B --> G["500 kbps"]
    B --> H["500 kbps"]
    B --> I["500 kbps"]
    B --> J["500 kbps"]
    B --> K["500 kbps"]
    B --> L["500 kbps"]
    C --> M["STRICT"]
    M --> N["500 kbps"]

Figure 4-9-5: QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Schedule Mode	Controls whether the scheduler mode is "Strict Priority" or "Weighted" on this switch port.
Queue Shaper Enable	Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port.
Queue Shaper Rate	Controls the rate for the queue shaper.This value is restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to 1-13200 when the "Unit" is "Mbps".The default value is 500.
Queue Shaper Unit	Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps".The default value is "kbps".
• Queue Shaper Excess	Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth.
• Queue Scheduler Weight	Controls the weight for this queue.This value is restricted to 1-100. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".The default value is "17".
• Queue Scheduler Percent	Shows the weight in percent for this queue. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".
• Port Shaper Enable	Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port.
• Port Shaper Rate	Controls the rate for the port shaper.This value is restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to 1-13200 when the "Unit" is "Mbps".The default value is 500.
• Port Shaper Unit	Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps".The default value is "kbps".

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Cancel

Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous Page.

4.9.6 Port Tag Remarking

This Page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports. The Port Tag Remarking screen in Figure 4-9-6 appears.

QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking

Port	Mode
1	Classified
2	Classified
3	Classified
4	Classified
5	Classified
6	Classified
7	Classified
8	Classified
9	Classified
10	Classified
11	Classified
12	Classified
13	Classified
14	Classified
15	Classified
16	Classified
17	Classified
18	Classified
19	Classified
20	Classified

Figure 4-9-6: QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking.For more detail, please refer to chapter 4.9.6.1.
• Mode	Shows the tag remarking mode for this port.■ Classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values■ Default: Use default PCP/DEI values.■ Mapped: Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level.

4.9.6.1 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking

The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for a specific port are configured on this Page. The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking screen in Figure 4-9-7 appears.

Port 1 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Port 1 Tag Remarking Mode Classified Apply Reset Cancel

Figure 4-9-7: QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Controls the tag remarking mode for this port.■ Classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values.■ Default: Use default PCP/DEI values.■ Mapped: Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level.
• PCP/DEI Configuration	Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to Default
• (QoS class, DP level) to (PCP, DEI) Mapping	Controls the mapping of the classified (QoS class, DP level) to (PCP, DEI) values when the mode is set to Mapped.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.7 Port DSCP

This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports. The Port DSCP screen in

Figure 4-9-8 appears.

Port	Ingress		Egress
	Translate	Classify	Rewrite
*	□	<All>✓	<All>✓
1	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
2	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
3	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
4	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
5	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
6	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
7	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
8	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
9	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
10	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
11	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
12	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
13	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
14	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
15	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
16	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
17	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
18	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
19	□	Disable✓	Disable✓
20	□	Disable✓	Disable✓

Figure 4-9-8: QoS Port DSCP Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings.
• Ingress	In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports.There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress:■Translate■Classify
•Translate	To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox.
•Classify	Classification for a port have 4 different values.■Disable: No Ingress DSCP Classification.■DSCP=0: Classify if incoming (or translated if enabled) DSCP is 0.■Selected: Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP.■All: Classify all DSCP.
•Egress	The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports.Port Egress Rewriting can be one of -. All means all ports will have one specific setting.■Disable: No Egress rewrite.■Enable: Rewrite enabled without remapping.■Remap DP Unaware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value. The remapped DSCP value is always taken from the 'DSCP Translation->Egress Remap DP0' table.■Remap DP Aware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value. Depending on the DP level of the frame, the remapped DSCP value is either taken from the 'DSCP Translation->Egress Remap DP0' table or from the 'DSCP Translation->Egress Remap DP1' table.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.8 DSCP-based QoS

This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP-based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches. The DSCP-based QoS screen in Figure 4-9-9 appears.

Figure 4-9-9: DSCP-based QoS Ingress Classification Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• DSCP	Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64.
• Trust	Controls whether a specific DSCP value is trusted. Only frames with trusted DSCP values are mapped to a specific QoS class and Drop Precedence Level.Frames with untrusted DSCP values are treated as a non-IP frame.
• QoS Class	QoS Class value can be any of (0-7)
• DPL	Drop Precedence Level (0-1)

4.9.9 DSCP Translation

This Page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches. DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress. The DSCP Translation screen in Figure 4-9-10 appears.

DSCP	Ingress		Egress
	Translate	Classify	Remap DPO	Remap DP1
*
0 (BE)	0 (BE)		0 (BE)	0 (BE)
1	1		1	1
2	2		2	2
3	3		3	3
4	4		4	4
5	5		5	5
6	6		6	6
7	7		7	7
55	55
56 (CS7)	56 (CS7)		56 (CS7)	56 (CS7)
57	57		57	57
58	58		58	58
59	59		59	59
60	60		60	60
61	61		61	61
62	62		62	62
63	63		63	63

Figure 4-9-10: DSCP Translation Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• DSCP	Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.
• Ingress	Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map.There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation –■ Translate■ Classify
• Translate	DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of (0-63) DSCP values.
• Classify	Click to enable Classification at Ingress side.
• Egress	There are the following configurable parameters for Egress side –Remap DP0 Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 0.Remap DP1 Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 1.
• Remap DP0	Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63.
• Remap DP1	Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.10 DSCP Classification

This Page allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value. The DSCP Classification screen in Figure 4-9-11 appears.

DSCP Classification QoS Class DPL DSCP * * ✓ 0 0 0 (BE) ✓ 0 1 0 (BE) ✓ 1 0 0 (BE) ✓ 1 1 0 (BE) ✓ 2 0 0 (BE) ✓ 2 1 0 (BE) ✓ 3 0 0 (BE) ✓ 3 1 0 (BE) ✓ 4 0 0 (BE) ✓ 4 1 0 (BE) ✓ 5 0 0 (BE) ✓ 5 1 0 (BE) ✓ 6 0 0 (BE) ✓ 6 1 0 (BE) ✓ 7 0 0 (BE) ✓ 7 1 0 (BE) ✓ Apply Reset

Figure 4-9-11: DSCP Classification Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• QoS Class	Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7. QoS Class (0-7) can be mapped to followed parameters.
• DPL	Actual Drop Precedence Level.
• DSCP	Select DSCP value (0-63) from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.11 QoS Control List

This Page shows the QoS Control List(QCL), which is made up of the QCEs. Each row describes a QCE that is defined. The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch.

Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list. The QoS Control List screen in Figure 4-9-12 appears.

QoS Control List Configuration
QCE	Port	DMAC	SMAC	Tag Type	VID	PCP	DEI	Frame Type	Action
									CoS	DPL	DSCP

Figure 4-9-12: QoS Control List Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• QCE#	Indicates the index of QCE.
• Port	Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.
• DMAC	Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame. Possible values are:■ Any: All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed.■ Unicast: Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed.■ Multicast: Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed.■ Broadcast: Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowedd.The default value is 'Any'.
• SMAC	Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address, i.e. first three octet (byte) of MAC address.
• Tag Type	Indicates tag type. Possible values are:■ Any: Match tagged and untagged frames.■ Untagged: Match untagged frames.■ Tagged: Match tagged frames.The default value is 'Any'
• VID	Indicates (VLAN ID), either a specific VID or range of VIDs. VID can be in the range 1-4095 or 'Any'
• PCP	Priority Code Point: Valid value PCP are specific(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range(0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or 'Any'.
• DEI	Drop Eligible Indicator: Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0, 1 or 'Any'.
• Frame Type	Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames. Possible frame types are:■ Any: The QCE will match all frame type.■ Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.■ LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.■ SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.■ IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.■ IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.
• Action	Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame's content.There are three action fields: Class, DPL and DSCP.■ Class: Classified QoS class.■ DPL: Classified Drop Precedence Level.■ DSCP: Classified DSCP value.
• Modification Buttons	You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons:+: Inserts a new QCE before the current row.⊕: Edits the QCE.↑: Moves the QCE up the list.↓: Moves the QCE down the list.✕: Deletes the QCE.⊕: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL.

4.9.11.1 QoS Control Entry Configuration

The QCE Configuration screen in Figure 4-9-13 appears.

QCE Configuration Port Members 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Key Parameters DMAC Any SMAC Any Tag Any VID Any PCP Any DEI Any Frame Type Any Action Parameters CoS 0 DPL Default DSCP Default Apply Reset Cancel

Figure 4-9-13: QCE Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port Members	Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry. By default all ports will be checked
• Key Parameters	Key configuration are discribed as below:■DMAC Type Destination MAC type: possible values are unicast(UC), multicast(MC), broadcast(BC) or 'Any'■SMAC Source MAC address: 24 MS bits (OUI) or 'Any'■Tag Value of Tag field can be 'Any', 'Untag' or 'Tag'■VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1-4095 or 'Any'; user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs■PCP Priority Code Point: Valid value PCP are specific(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range(0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or 'Any'■DEI Drop Eligible Indicator: Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0, 1 or 'Any'■Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values1. Any2. Ethernet3. LLC4. SNAP5. IPv46. IPv6Note: all frame types are explained below.
Any	Allow all types of frames.
EtherType	Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within 0x600-0xFFFF or 'Any' but excluding 0x800(IPv4) and 0x86DD(IPv6), default value is 'Any'.
LLC	■ SSAP Address Valid SSAP(Source Service Access Point) can vary from 0x00 to 0xFF or 'Any', the default value is 'Any'■ DSAP Address Valid DSAP(Destination Service Access Point) can vary from 0x00 to 0xFF or 'Any', the default value is 'Any'■ Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to 0xFF or 'Any', the default value is 'Any'
SNAP	PID Valid PID(a.k.a ethernet type) can have value within 0x00-0xFFFF or 'Any', default value is 'Any'
IPv4	■ Protocol IP protocol number: (0-255, TCP or UDP) or 'Any'■ Source IP Specific Source IP address in value/mask format or 'Any'. IP and Mask are in the format x.y.z.w where x, y, z, and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255. When Mask is converted to a 32-bit binary string and read from left to right, all bits following the first zero must also be zero■ DSCP Diffserv Code Point value(DSCP): It can be specific value, range of value or 'Any'. DSCP values are in the range 0-63 including BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43■ IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option: yes|no|any■ Sport Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP■ Dport Destination TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP
IPv6	■ Protocol IP protocol number: (0-255, TCP or UDP) or 'Any'■ Source IP IPv6 source address: (a.b.c.d) or 'Any', 32 LS bits■ DSCP Diffserv Code Point value(DSCP): It can be specific value, range ofvalue or 'Any'. DSCP values are in the range 0-63 including BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43■Sport Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP■Dport Destination TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP
• Action Parameters	■Class QoS class: (0-7) or 'Default'.■DPL Valid Drop Precedence Level can be (0-3) or 'Default'.■DSCP Valid DSCP value can be (0-63, BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43) or 'Default'.'Default' means that the default classified value is not modified by this QCE.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values

Cancel

Return to the previous Page without saving the configuration change

4.9.12 QCL Status

This Page shows the QCL status by different QCL users. Each row describes the QCE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch. The QoS Control List Status screen in Figure 4-9-14 appears.

Combined Auto-refresh Resolve Conflict Refresh QoS Control List Status User QCE Port Frame Action Conflict CoS DPL DSCP No entries

Figure 4-9-14: QoS Control List Status Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
User	Indicates the QCL user.
QCE#	Indicates the index of QCE.
Port	Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.
Frame Type	Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames. Possible frame types are:■ Any: The QCE will match all frame type.■ Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.■ LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.■ SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.■ IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.■ IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.
Action	Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame's content.There are three action fields: Class, DPL and DSCP.■ Class: Classified QoS class; if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue.■ DPL: Drop Precedence Level; if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column.■ DSCP: If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column.
Conflict	Displays Conflict status of QCL entries. As H/W resources are shared by multiple applications. It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not be available, in that case it shows conflict status as 'Yes', otherwise it is always 'No'.Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the H/W resources required to add QCL entry on pressing 'Resolve Conflict' button.

Buttons

Combined

Select the QCL status from this drop down list.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Resolve Conflict

Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry, in case the conflict status for any QCL entry

is 'yes'.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page.

4.9.13 Storm Control Configuration

Storm control for the switch is configured on this Page. There is a unicast storm rate control, multicast storm rate control, and a broadcast storm rate control. These only affect flooded frames, i.e. frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not present on the MAC Address table.

The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast, multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch.

The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4-9-15 appears.

Storm Control Configuration Frame Type Enable Rate (pps) Unicast 1 Multicast 1 Broadcast 1 Save Reset

Figure 4-9-15: Storm Control Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration below applies.
• Frame Type	The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here:■ unicast■ multicast■ Broadcast
• Enable	Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type.
• Rate	The rate unit is packets per second (pps). Valid values are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, 32K, 64K, 128K, 256K, 512K, 1024K, 2048K, 4096K, 8192K, 16384K or 32768K.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.14 QoS Statistics

This Page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports. The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4-9-17 appears.

Port	Q0		Q1		Q2		Q3		Q4		Q5		Q6		Q7
	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx	Rx	Tx
1	5228	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	3150
2	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
3	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
4	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
5	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
6	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
7	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
8	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
9	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
10	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
11	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0

Figure 4-9-16: Queuing Counters Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
• Q0 ~ Q7	There are 8 QoS queues per port. Q0 is the lowest priority queue.
• Rx/Tx	The number of received and transmitted packets per queue.

Buttons

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clears the counters for all ports.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the Page at regular intervals.

4.9.15 Voice VLAN Configuration

The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN, then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic. It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port - one for voice, one for data.

Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI. The Voice VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4-9-18 appears.

Voice VLAN Configuration

Mode	Disabled
VLAN ID	1000
Aging Time	86400	seconds
Traffic Class	7 (High)

Port Configuration

Port	Mode	Security	Discovery Protocol
*
1	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
2	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
3	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
4	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
5	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
6	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
7	Disabled	Disabled	OUI

14	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
15	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
16	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
17	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
18	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
19	Disabled	Disabled	OUI
20	Disabled	Disabled	OUI

Figure 4-9-17: Voice VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation. We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN. It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN mode operation.
• VLAN ID	Indicates the Voice VLAN ID. It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID. It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID, MVR VID, PVID etc.The allowed range is 1 to 4095.
• Aging Time	Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning age time. The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds. It used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled. In other cases, it will based hardware age time.The actual age time will be situated in the [age_time; 2 * age_time] interval.
• Traffic Class	Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class. All traffic on Voice VLAN will apply this class.
• Mode	Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode.Possible port modes are:■ Disabled: Disjoin from Voice VLAN.■ Auto: Enable auto detect mode. It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to the specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically.■ Forced: Force join to Voice VLAN.
• Port Security	Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode. When the function is enabled, all non-telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds. Possible port modes are:■ Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
• Port Discovery Protocol	Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol. It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled. We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to "LLDP" or "Both". Changing the discovery protocol to "OUI" or "LLDP" will restart auto detect process. Possible discovery protocols are:■ OUI: Detect telephony device by OUI address.■ LLDP: Detect telephony device by LLDP.■ Both: Both OUI and LLDP.

4.9.16 Voice VLAN OUI Table

Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this Page. The maximum entry number is 16. Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process. The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4-9-18 appears.

Voice VLAN OUI Table Delete | Telephony OUI | Description □ 00-30-4f PLANET phones □ 00-03-6b Cisco phones □ 00-0f-e2 H3C phones □ 00-60-b9 Philips and NEC AG phones □ 00-d0-1e Pingtel phones □ 00-e0-75 Polycom phones □ 00-e0-bb 3Com phones □ 00-01-e3 Siemens AG phones Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-9-18: Voice VLAN OUI Table Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Telephony OUI	An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE. It must be 6 characters long and the input format is "xx-xx-xx" (x is a hexadecimal digit).
Description	The description of OUI address. Normally, it describes which vendor telephony device it belongs to.The allowed string length is 0 to 32.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new access management entry.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.10 Access Control List

ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects, such as a process or a program.

Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights.

ACL implementations can be quite complex, for example, when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation. In networking, the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server, each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic, and in this context, they are similar to firewalls.

ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry. It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID. There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). The ACE also contains many detailed, different parameter options that are available for individual application.

4.10.1 Access Control List Status

This Page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch. The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4-10-1 appears.

ACL Status

User	Ingress Port	Frame Type	Action	Rate Limiter	Port Redirect	CPU	CPU Once	Counter	Conflict
DHCP	All	IPv4/UDP 67 DHCP Client	Deny	Disabled	Disabled	Yes	No	0	No
DHCP	All	IPv4/UDP 68 DHCP Server	Deny	Disabled	Disabled	Yes	No	0	No
Combined				Auto-refresh	Refresh

Figure 4-10-1: ACL Status Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
User	Indicates the ACL user.
Ingress Port	Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:All: The ACE will match all ingress port.Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.
Frame Type	Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:Any: The ACE will match any frame type.EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARPframes.■ ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.■ IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.■ IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.■ IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.■ IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.■ IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.■ IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.
• Action	Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.■ Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.■ Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
• Rate Limiter	Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When Disabled is displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.
• Port Redirect	Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number.The allowed values areDisabledor a specific port number. WhenDisabledis displayed, the port redirect operation is disabled.
• CPU	Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.
• CPU Once	Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.
• Counter	The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
• Conflict	Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE. The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Click to refresh the Page.

4.10.2 Access Control List Configuration

This Page shows the Access Control List (ACL), which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch.

Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list. The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol, cannot be edited or deleted, the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest. The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4-10-2 appears.

Access Control List Configuration

Ingress Port | Policy / Bitmask | Frame Type | Action | Rate Limiter | Port Redirect | Mirror | Counter | Auto-refresh □ Refresh Clear Remove All

Figure 4-10-2: Access Control List Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Ingress Port	Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:■ All: The ACE will match all ingress port.■ Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.
• Policy / Bitmask	Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE.
• Frame Type	Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:■ Any: The ACE will match any frame type.■ EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames.■ ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.■ IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.■ IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.■ IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.■ IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.■ IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.■ IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.
• Action	Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.■ Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.■ Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
• Rate Limiter	Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When Disabled is displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.
• Port Redirect	Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number.The allowed values areDisabledor a specific port number. WhenDisabledis displayed, the port redirect operation is disabled.
• Mirror	Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port. The allowed values are:■Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.■Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.The default value is "Disabled".
• Counter	The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
• Modification Buttons	You can modify each ACE (Access Control Entry) in the table using the following buttons:+: Inserts a new ACE before the current row.⊕: Edits the ACE row.↑: Moves the ACE up the list.↓: Moves the ACE down the list.✕: Deletes the ACE.⊕: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page; any changes made locally will be undone.

Clear

Click to clear the counters.

Remove All

Click to remove all ACEs.

4.10.3 ACE Configuration

Configure an ACE (Access Control Entry) on this Page. An ACE consists of several parameters. These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select. First select the ingress port for the ACE, and then select the frame type. Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type selected. A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here. The ACE Configuration screen in Figure 4-10-3 appears.

ACE Configuration

Ingress Port All Policy Filter Any Frame Type Any

Action Rate Limiter EVC Policer Mirror Logging Shutdown Counter Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0

VLAN Parameters

802.1Q Tagged VLAN ID Filter Tag Priority Any Any Any

Figure 4-10-3: ACE Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Ingress Port	Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies.■ Any: The ACE applies to any port.■ Port n: The ACE applies to this port number, where n is the number of the switch port.
• Policy Filter	Specify the policy number filter for this ACE.■ Any: No policy filter is specified. (policy filter status is "don't-care".)■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE, choose this value. Two field for entering an policy value and bitmask appears.
• Policy Value	When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy value. The allowed range is 0 to 255.
• Policy Bitmask	When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy bitmask. The allowed range is 0x0 to 0xff.
• Frame Type	Select the frame type for this ACE. These frame types are mutually exclusive.■ Any: Any frame can match this ACE.■ Ethernet Type: Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE. The IEEE 802.3 describes the value of Length/Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal (equal to 0600 hexadecimal).■ ARP: Only ARP frames can match this ACE. Notice the ARP frames won't match the ACE with ethernet type.■ IPv4: Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv4 frames won't match the ACE with ethernet type.■ IPv6: Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv6 frames won't match the ACE with ethernet type.
• Action	Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.■ Permit: The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation.■ Deny: The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.
• Rate Limiter	Specify the rate limiter in number of base units.The allowed range is 1 to 16.Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled.
• EVC Policer	Select whether EVC policer is enabled or disabled. The default value is "Disabled".Note that the ACL rate limiter and EVC policer can not both be enabled.
• EVC Policer ID	Select which EVC policer ID to apply on this ACE. The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 256.
• Port Redirect	Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here. The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range. Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled.
• Mirror	Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values are:■ Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.■ Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.The default value is "Disabled".
• Logging	Specify the logging operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:■ Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.■ Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.Note: The logging feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518(without VLAN tags) and the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.
• Shutdown	Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:■ Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.■ Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.Note: The shutdown feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518(without VLAN tags).
• Counter	The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.

■ MAC Parameters

Object Description
• SMAC Filter	(Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP.)Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE.■ Any: No SMAC filter is specified. (SMAC filter status is "don't-care".)■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering an SMAC value appears.
• SMAC Value	When "Specific" is selected for the SMAC filter, you can enter a specific source MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or "xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or "xxxxxxxxxxxxx" (x is a hexadecimal digit). A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value.
• DMAC Filter	Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.■ Any: No DMAC filter is specified. (DMAC filter status is "don't-care".)■ MC: Frame must be multicast.■ BC: Frame must be broadcast.■ UC: Frame must be unicast.■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a DMAC value appears.
• DMAC Value	When "Specific" is selected for the DMAC filter, you can enter a specific destination MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or "xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or "xxxxxxxxxxxxx" (x is a hexadecimal digit). A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value.

■ VLAN Parameters

Object Description
802.1Q Tagged	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802.1Q tagged. The allowed values are:Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").Enabled: Tagged frame only.Disabled: Untagged frame only.The default value is "Any".
VLAN ID Filter	Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE.Any: No VLAN ID filter is specified. (VLAN ID filter status is "don't-care".)Specific: If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears.
VLAN ID	When "Specific" is selected for the VLAN ID filter, you can enter a specific VLAN ID number. The allowed range is 1 to 4095. A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value.
• Tag Priority	Specify the tag priority for this ACE. A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority. The allowed number range is 0 to 7. The value Any means that no tag priority is specified (tag priority is "don't-care".)

■ ARP Parameters

The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "ARP" is selected.

Object Description
ARP/RARP	Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.■ Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)■ ARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to ARP.■ RARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to RARP.■ Other: Frame has unknown ARP/RARP Opcode flag.
Request/Reply	Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.■ Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)■ Request: Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set.■ Reply: Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag.
Sender IP Filter	Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE.■ Any: No sender IP filter is specified. (Sender IP filter is "don't-care".)■ Host: Sender IP filter is set to Host. Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears.■ Network: Sender IP filter is set to Network. Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
Sender IP Address	When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Sender IP Mask	When "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation.
Target IP Filter	Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE.■ Any: No target IP filter is specified. (Target IP filter is "don't-care".)■ Host: Target IP filter is set to Host. Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears.■ Network: Target IP filter is set to Network. Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear.
Target IP Address	When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Target IP Mask	When "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation.
ARP Sender MAC Match	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field (SHA) settings.■ 0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address.■ 1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
RARP Target MAC Match	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field (THA) settings.■ 0: RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address.■ 1: RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP/Ethernet Length	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address length (HLN) and protocol address length (PLN) settings.■ 0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN) is equal to IPv4 (0x04).■ 1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN) is equal to IPv4 (0x04).■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address space (HRD) settings.■ 0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).■ 1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Ethernet	Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP protocol address space (PRO) settings.■ 0: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).■ 1: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

■ IP Parameters

The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "IPv4" is selected.

Object Description
• IP Protocol Filter	Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE.■ Any: No IP protocol filter is specified ("don't-care").■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears.■ ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.■ UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields fordefining UDP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.■TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
• IP Protocol Value	When "Specific" is selected for the IP protocol value, you can enter a specific value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value.
• IP TTL	Specify the Time-to-Live settings for this ACE.■zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry.■non-zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry.■Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• IP Fragment	Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE. This involves the settings for the More Fragments (MF) bit and the Fragment Offset (FRAG OFFSET) field for an IPv4 frame.■No: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry.■Yes: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry.■Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• IP Option	Specify the options flag setting for this ACE.■No: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry.■Yes: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry.■Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• SIP Filter	Specify the source IP filter for this ACE.■Any: No source IP filter is specified. (Source IP filter is "don't-care".)■Host: Source IP filter is set to Host. Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears.■Network: Source IP filter is set to Network. Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
• SIP Address	When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation.
• SIP Mask	When "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation.
• DIP Filter	Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE.■ Any: No destination IP filter is specified. (Destination IP filter is "don't-care".) ■ Host: Destination IP filter is set to Host. Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears. ■ Network: Destination IP filter is set to Network. Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear.
• DIP Address	When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation.
• DIP Mask	When "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation.

■ IPv6 Parameters

Object Description
• Next Header Fliter	Specify the IPv6 next header filter for this ACE.■ Any: No IPv6 next header filter is specified ("don't-care").■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific IPv6 next header filter with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering an IPv6 next header filter appears.■ ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv6 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.■ UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv6 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.■ TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv6 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
• Next Header Value	When "Specific" is selected for the IPv6 next header value, you can enter a specific value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IPv6 protocol value.
• SIP Filter	Specify the source IPv6 filter for this ACE.■ Any: No source IPv6 filter is specified. (Source IPv6 filter is "don't-care".)■ Specific: Source IPv6 filter is set to Network. Specify the source IPv6 address and source IPv6 mask in the SIP Address fields that appear.
• SIP Address	When "Specific" is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specific SIPv6 address. The field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address.
• SIP BitMask	When "Specific" is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specific SIPv6 mask. The field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address. Notice theusage of bitmask, if the binary bit value is "0", it means this bit is "don't-care".The real matched pattern is [sipv6_address & sipv6_bitmask] (last 32 bits). For example, if the SIPv6 address is 2001::3 and the SIPv6 bitmask is 0xFFFFFFFF(E(bit 0 is "don't-care" bit), then SIPv6 address 2001::2 and 2001::3 are applied to this rule.
• Hop Limit	Specify the hop limit settings for this ACE.zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry.non-zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must be able to match this entry.Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

■ ICMP Parameters

Object Description
• ICMP Type Filter	Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE.■ Any: No ICMP filter is specified (ICMP filter status is "don't-care").■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific ICMP value. A field for entering an ICMP value appears.
• ICMP Type Value	When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP filter, you can enter a specific ICMP value.The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value.
• ICMP Code Filter	Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.■ Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care").■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific ICMP code value. A field for entering an ICMP code value appears.
• ICMP Code Value	When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP code filter, you can enter a specific ICMP code value.The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value.

■ TCP/UDP Parameters

Object Description
• TCP/UDP Source Filter	Specify the TCP/UDP source filter for this ACE.■ Any: No TCP/UDP source filter is specified (TCP/UDP source filter status is "don't-care").■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value appears.■ Range: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source range filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value appears.
• TCP/UDP Source No.	When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.
• TCP/UDP Source Range	When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.
• TCP/UDP Destination Filter	Specify the TCP/UDP destination filter for this ACE.■ Any: No TCP/UDP destination filter is specified (TCP/UDP destination filter status is "don't-care").■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP destination value appears.■ Range: If you want to filter a specific range TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP destination value appears.
• TCP/UDP Destination Number	When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.
• TCP/UDP Destination Range	When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.
• TCP FIN	Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.■ 0: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry.■ 1: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
• TCP SYN	Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this ACE.■ 0: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry.■ 1: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP RST	Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.■ 0: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry.■ 1: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP PSH	Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.■ 0: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry.■ 1: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP ACK	Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this ACE.■ 0: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry.■ 1: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP URG	Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this ACE.■ 0: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry.■ 1: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.■ Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

■ Ethernet Type Parameters

The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type "Ethernet Type" is selected.

Object Description
• EtherType Filter	Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE.■ Any: No EtherType filter is specified (EtherType filter status is "don't-care").■ Specific: If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific EtherType value. A field for entering a EtherType value appears.
• Ethernet Type Value	When "Specific" is selected for the EtherType filter, you can enter a specific EtherType value.The allowed range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF but excluding 0x800(IPv4), 0x806(ARP) and 0x86DD(IPv6). A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Cancel

Return to the previous Page.

4.10.4 ACL Ports Configuration

Configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of each switch port. These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE. The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4-10-4 appears.

ACL Ports Configuration

Port	Policy ID	Action	Rate Limiter ID	EVC Policer	EVC Policer ID	Port Redirect	Mirror	Logging	Shutdown	State	Counter
	0					Disabled Port 1 Port 2					-
1	0	Permit	Disabled	Disabled		Disabled Port 1 Port 2	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Enabled	5900
2	0	Permit	Disabled	Disabled		Disabled Port 1 Port 2	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Enabled	0
3	0	Permit	Disabled	Disabled		Disabled Port 1 Port 2	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Enabled	0
4	0	Permit	Disabled	Disabled		Disabled Port 1 Port 2	Disabled	Disabled	Disabled	Enabled	0

17 0 Permit Disabled Disabled 1 18 0 Permit Disabled Disabled 1 19 0 Permit Disabled Disabled 1 20 0 Permit Disabled Disabled 1 Apply Reset Refresh Clear Disabled Port 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 0 Disabled Port 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 0 Disabled Port 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 0 Disabled Port 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 0 Disabled Port 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 0

Figure 4-10-4: ACL Ports Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
• Policy ID	Select the policy to apply to this port. The allowed values are 0 through 255. The default value is 0.
• Action	Select whether forwarding is permitted ("Permit") or denied ("Deny"). The default value is "Permit".
• Rate Limiter ID	Select which rate limiter to apply on this port. The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16. The default value is "Disabled".
• EVC Policer	Select whether EVC policer is enabled or disabled. The default value is "Disabled". Note that ACL rate limiter and EVC policer can not both be enabled.
• EVC Policer ID	Select which EVC policer ID to apply on this port. The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 256.
• Port Redirect	Select which port frames are redirected on. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number and it can't be set when action is permitted. The default value is "Disabled".
• Mirror	Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values are:■ Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.■ Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.The default value is "Disabled".
• Logging	Specify the logging operation of this port. The allowed values are:■ Enabled: Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log.■ Disabled: Frames received on the port are not logged.The default value is "Disabled".Note: The logging feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518 (without VLAN tags) and the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.
• Shutdown	Specify the port shut down operation of this port. The allowed values are:■ Enabled: If a frame is received on the port, the port will be disabled.■ Disabled: Port shut down is disabled.The default value is "Disabled".
• State	Specify the port state of this port. The allowed values are:■ Enabled: To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module.■ Disabled: To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module.The default value is "Enabled".
• Counter	Counts the number of frames that match this ACE.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page; any changes made locally will be undone.

Clear

Click to clear the counters.

4.10.5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration

Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch.

The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4-10-5 appears.

ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter ID Rate Unit * 1 ✓ 1 1 pps ✓ 2 1 pps ✓ 3 1 pps ✓ 4 1 pps ✓ 5 1 pps ✓ 6 1 pps ✓ 7 1 pps ✓ 8 1 pps ✓ 9 1 pps ✓ 10 1 pps ✓ 11 1 pps ✓ 12 1 pps ✓ 13 1 pps ✓ 14 1 pps ✓ 15 1 pps ✓ 16 1 pps ✓ Apply Reset

Figure 4-10-5: ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Rate Limiter ID	The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row.
• Rate (pps)	The allowed values are: 0-3276700 in pps or 0, 100, 200, 300, ..., 1000000 in kbps.
• Unit	Specify the rate unit. The allowed values are: ■ pps: packets per second. ■ kbps: Kbits per second. All means all ports will have one specific setting.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.11 Authentication

This section is to control the access of the Wall-mount Managed Switch, including the user access and management control. The Authentication section contains links to the following main topics:

■ IEEE 802.1X Port-based Network Access Control
■ MAC-based Authentication
■ User Authentication

Overview of 802.1X (Port-Based) Authentication

In the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, and the RADIUS server is the authentication server. The switch acts as the man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server. Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames, known as EAPOL (EAP Over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch's IP address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very flexible, in that it allows for different authentication methods, like MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and TLS. The important thing is that the authenticator (the switch) doesn't need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using, or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method. The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it.

When authentication is completed, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant.

Overview of MAC-based Authentication

Unlike 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but merely a best-practices method adopted by the industry. In MAC-based authentication, users are called clients, and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients. The initial frame (any kind of frame) sent by a client is snooped by the switch, which in turn uses the client's MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server. The 6-byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-cased hexadecimal digits. The switch only supports the MD5-Challenge authentication method, so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly.

When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication, which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client, using static entries into the MAC Table. Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch. There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication, and therefore, MAC-based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.

The advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port (e.g. through a 3rd party switch or a hub) and still require individual authentication, and that the clients don't need special supplicant

software to authenticate. The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users, equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone, and only the MD5-Challenge method is supported.

The 802.1X and MAC-Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide.

Overview of User Authentication

It is allowed to configure the Wall-mount Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods, such as telnet and Web browser. This Wall-mount Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options:

■ Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)
■ Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)
■ Local user name and Privilege Level control

RADIUS and TACACS+ are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-aware or TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name / password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

4.11.1 Understanding IEEE 802.1X Port-based Authentication

The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports. The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN.

Until the client is authenticated, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic through the port to which the client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic can pass through the port.

This section includes this conceptual information:

• Device Roles
  • Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange
• Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States

■ Device Roles

With 802.1X port-based authentication, the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below.

graph TD
    A["Authentication server (RADIUS Server)"] --> C["Router"]
    B["Authentication server (TACACS+ Server)"] --> C
    C --> D["Authenticator (PLANET 802.1X aware Switch)"]
    D --> E["Supplicant (Client with 802.1X authentication)"]
    E --> F["Intranet"]
    G["Internet / Intranet"] --> C
    H["Intranet"] --> E

Figure 4-11-1

• Client—the device (workstation) that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch. The workstation must be running 802.1X-compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system. (The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802.1X specification.)
• Authentication server—performs the actual authentication of the client. The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services. Because the switch acts as the proxy, the authentication service is transparent to the client. In this release, the Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) extensions is the only supported authentication server; it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3.0. RADIUS operates in a client/server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients.
• Switch (802.1X device)—controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client. The switch acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the client and the authentication server, requesting identity information from the client, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the client. The switch includes the RADIUS client, which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) frames and interacting with the authentication server. When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server, the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re-encapsulated in the RADIUS format. The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation, and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format. When the switch receives frames from the

authentication server, the server's frame header is removed, leaving the EAP frame, which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client.

■ Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange

The switch or the client can initiate authentication. If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port-control auto interface configuration command, the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up. It then sends an EAP-request/identity frame to the client to request its identity (typically, the switch sends an initial identity/request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information). Upon receipt of the frame, the client responds with an EAP-response/identity frame.

However, if during bootup, the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame from the switch, the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame, which prompts the switch to request the client's identity

If 802.1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device, any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped. If the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame after three attempts to start authentication, the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state. A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated.

When the client supplies its identity, the switch begins its role as the intermediary, passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails. If the authentication succeeds, the switch port becomes authorized.

The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used. "Figure 4-11-2" shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One-Time-Password (OTP) authentication method with a RADIUS server.

graph TD
    A["Client"] -->|EAPOL-Start| B["802.1X Switch"]
    B -->|EAPOL-Logoff| C["Port Unauthorized"]
    B -->|EAPOL-Response/Identity| A
    B -->|EAPOL-Response/OTP| A
    B -->|EAPOL-Response/OTP| B
    B -->|EAPOL-Success| A
    B -->|RADIUS Access-Request| D["Authentication Server (RADIUS)"]
    B -->|RADIUS Access-Challenge| D
    B -->|RADIUS Access-Request| D
    B -->|RADIUS Access-Accept| D

Figure 4-11-2: EAP Message Exchange

■ Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States

The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network. The port starts in the unauthorized state. While in this state, the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802.1X protocol packets. When a client is successfully authenticated, the port transitions to the authorized state, allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally.

If a client that does not support 802.1X is connected to an unauthorized 802.1X port, the switch requests the client's identity. In this situation, the client does not respond to the request, the port remains in the unauthorized state, and the client is not granted access to the network.

In contrast, when an 802.1X-enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802.1X protocol, the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL-start frame. When no response is received, the client sends the request for a fixed number of times. Because no response is received, the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state

If the client is successfully authenticated (receives an Accept frame from the authentication server), the port state changes to authorized, and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port. If the authentication fails, the port remains in the unauthorized state, but authentication can be retried. If the authentication server cannot be reached, the switch can retransmit the request. If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts, authentication fails, and network access is not granted.

When a client logs off, it sends an EAPOL-logoff message, causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state.

If the link state of a port transitions from up to down, or if an EAPOL-logoff frame is received, the port returns to the unauthorized state.

4.11.2 Authentication Configuration

This Page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces. The Authentication Method Configuration screen in Figure 4-11-3 appears.

Authentication Method Configuration Client Methods console local ✓ no ✓ no ✓ telnet local ✓ no ✓ no ✓ ssh local ✓ no ✓ no ✓ http local ✓ no ✓ no ✓ Apply Reset

Figure 4-11-3: Authentication Method Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Client	The management client for which the configuration below applies.
Authentication Method	Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values:None: authentication is disabled and login is not possible.Local: use the local user database on the switch stack for authentication.RADIUS: use a remote RADIUS server for authentication.TACACS+: use a remote TACACS+ server for authentication.Methods that involves remote servers are timed out if the remote servers are offline. In this case the next method is tried. Each method is tried from left to right and continues until a method either approves or rejects a user. If a remote server is used for primary authentication it is recommended to configure secondary authentication as 'local'. This will enable the management client to login via the local user database if none of the configured authentication servers are alive.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.11.3 Network Access Server Configuration

This Page allows you to configure the IEEE 802.1X and MAC-based authentication system and port settings.

The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a port-based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. One or more central servers, the backend servers, determine whether the user is allowed access to the network. These backend (RADIUS) servers are configured on the "Configuration→Security→AAA" Page. The IEEE802.1X standard defines port-based operation, but non-standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below.

MAC-based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port, and doesn't require the user to have special 802.1X supplicant software installed on his system. The switch uses the user's MAC address to authenticate against the backend server. Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses, which makes MAC-based authentication less secure than 802.1X authentication. The NAS configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide. The Network Access Server Configuration screen in Figure 4-11-4 appears.

Network Access Server Configuration
System Configuration

Mode Disabled Reauthentication Enabled Reauthentication Period 3600 seconds EAPOL Timeout 30 seconds Aging Period 300 seconds Hold Time 10 seconds RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN ID 1 Max. Reauth. Count 2 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen

Port Configuration

Port	Admin State	RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled	RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled	Guest VLAN Enabled	Port State	Restart
*
1	Force Authorized				Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize
2	Force Authorized				Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize
3	Force Authorized				Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize
4	Force Authorized				Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize

16 Force Authorized ✓ 17 Force Authorized ✓ 18 Force Authorized ✓ 19 Force Authorized ✓ 20 Force Authorized ✓

Refresh Apply Reset

Figure 4-11-4: Network Access Server Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

System Configuration

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled, all ports are allowed forwarding of frames.
• Reauthentication Enabled	If checked, successfully authenticated supplicants/clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period. Reauthentication for 802.1X-enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached.For MAC-based ports, reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed. It does not involve communication between the switch and the client, and therefore doesn't imply that a client is still present on aport.
• Reauthentication Period	Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be reauthenticated. This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked. Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds.
• EAPOL Timeout	Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames. Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds. This has no effect for MAC-based ports.
• Aging Period	This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses:■ Single 802.1X■ Multi 802.1X■ MAC-Based Auth.When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses, the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time. This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in a 802.1X-based mode, this is not so critical, since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication, which will fail. But if reauthentication is not enabled, the only way to free resources is by aging the entries.For ports in MAC-based Auth. mode, reauthentication doesn't cause direct communication between the switch and the client, so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not, and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry.
• Hold Time	This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses:■ Single 802.1X■ Multi 802.1X■ MAC-Based Auth.If a client is denied access - either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out (according to the timeout specified on the "Configuration→Security→AAA" Page) - the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state. The hold timer does not count during an on-going authentication.In MAC-based Auth. mode, the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time.The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.
RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled	RADIUS-assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch. The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature.The "RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determine whether RADIUS-assigned QoS Class is enabled for that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class is disabled for all ports.
RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled	RADIUS-assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch. Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS-assigned VLAN. The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature.The "RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determine whether RADIUS-assigned VLAN is enabled for that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned VLAN is disabled for all ports.
Guest VLAN Enabled	A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN - typically with limited network access - on which 802.1X-unaware clients are placed after a network administrator-defined timeout. The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below.The "Guest VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable Guest VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN. When unchecked, the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports.
Guest VLAN ID	This is the value that a port's Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN. It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled. Valid values are in the range [1; 4095].
Max. Reauth. Count	The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting. The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.Valid values are in the range [1; 255].
• Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen	The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life-time of the port. Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN, it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled. If disabled (unchecked; default), the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life-time of the port. If enabled (checked), the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life-time of the port.The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.

Port Configuration

The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration below applies.
• Admin State	If NAS is globally enabled, this selection controls the port's authentication mode.The following modes are available:Force AuthorizedIn this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up, and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication.Force UnauthorizedIn this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up, and any client on the port will be disallowed network access.Port-based 802.1XIn the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, and the RADIUS server is the authentication server. The authenticator acts as the man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server. Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames, known as EAPOL (EAP Over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch's IP address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP

is very flexible, in that it allows for different authentication methods, like MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and TLS. The important thing is that the authenticator (the switch) doesn't need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using, or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method. The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it. When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant.

Note: Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds (using the AAA configuration Page), and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down (but not considered dead). Now, if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds, then it will never get authenticated, because the switch will cancel on-going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant. And since the server hasn't yet failed (because the X seconds haven't expired), the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch. This scenario will loop forever. Therefore, the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant's EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate.

Single 802.1X

In port-based 802.1X authentication, once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port, the whole port is opened for network traffic. This allows other clients connected to the port (for instance through a hub) to piggy-back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren't authenticated. To overcome this security breach, use the Single 802.1X variant.

Single 802.1X is really not an IEEE standard, but features many of the same characteristics as does port-based 802.1X. In Single 802.1X, at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time. Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch. If more than one supplicant is connected to a port, the one that comes first when the port's link comes up will be the first one considered. If that supplicant doesn't provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time, another supplicant will get a chance. Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated, only that supplicant will be allowed access. This is the most secure of all the supported modes. In this mode, the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant's MAC address once

successfully authenticated.

Multi 802.1X

Multi 802.1X is - like Single 802.1X - not an IEEE standard, but a variant that features many of the same characteristics. In Multi 802.1X, one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time. Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module.

In Multi 802.1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant, since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch. Instead, the switch uses the supplicant's MAC address, which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant. An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached. In this case, the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination - to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port.

The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality.

MAC-based Auth.

Unlike port-based 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but merely a best-practices method adopted by the industry. In MAC-based authentication, users are called clients, and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients. The initial frame (any kind of frame) sent by a client is snooped by the switch, which in turn uses the client's MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server. The 6-byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-cased hexadecimal digits. The switch only supports the MD5-Challenge authentication method, so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly.

When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication, which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client, using the Port Security module. Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch. There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication, and therefore, MAC-based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.

The advantage of MAC-based authentication over port-based 802.1X is that

	several clients can be connected to the same port (e.g. through a 3rd party switch or a hub) and still require individual authentication, and that the clients don't need special supplicant software to authenticate. The advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X-based authentication is that the clients don't need special supplicant software to authenticate. The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users - equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone. Also, only the MD5-Challenge method is supported. The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality.
• RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled	When RADIUS-Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given port, the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access-Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated. If present and valid, traffic received on the supplicant's port will be classified to the given QoS Class. If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port, the port's QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class (which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS-assigned).This option is only available for single-client modes, i.e.■ Port-based 802.1X■ Single 802.1XRADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class:The User-Priority-Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access-Accept packet.Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered, and to be valid, it must follow this rule:● All 8 octets in the attribute's value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range '0' - '7', which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range [0; 7].
• RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled	When RADIUS-Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given port, the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access-Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated. If present and valid, the port's Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID, the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID, and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode. Once assigned, all trafficarriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS-assigned VLAN ID.If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port, the port's VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID (which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS-assigned).This option is only available for single-client modes, i.e.■ Port-based 802.1X■ Single 802.1XFor trouble-shooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor→VLANs→VLAN Membership and VLAN Port" Pages. These Pages show which modules have (temporarily) overridden the current Port VLAN configuration.RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID:RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access-Accept packet. The following criteria are used:The Tunnel-Medium-Type, Tunnel-Type, and Tunnel-Private-Group-ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access-Accept packet.The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements (if Tag == 0 is used, the Tunnel-Private-Group-ID does not need to include a Tag):Value of Tunnel-Medium-Type must be set to "IEEE-802" (ordinal 6).Value of Tunnel-Type must be set to "VLAN" (ordinal 13).Value of Tunnel-Private-Group-ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range '0' - '9', which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID. Leading '0's are discarded. The final value must be in the range [1; 4095].
• Guest VLAN Enabled	When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given port, the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below.This option is only available for EAPOL-based modes, i.e.:■ Port-based 802.1X■ Single 802.1X■ Multi 802.1XFor trouble-shooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor→VLANs→VLANMembership and VLAN Port" Pages. These Pages show which modules have (temporarily) overridden the current Port VLAN configuration.Guest VLAN Operation:When a Guest VLAN enabled port's link comes up, the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames. If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max. Reauth. Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile, the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN. The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout. If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled, the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN. If disabled, the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port (this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port's Admin State is changed), and if not, the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN. Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN, but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout.Once in the Guest VLAN, the port is considered authenticated, and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN. The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN.While in the Guest VLAN, the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames, and if one such frame is received, the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode. If an EAPOL frame is received, the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the "Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen" is disabled.
• Port State	The current state of the port. It can undertake one of the following values:■ Globally Disabled: NAS is globally disabled.■ Link Down: NAS is globally enabled, but there is no link on the port.■ Authorized: The port is in Force Authorized or a single-supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized.■ Unauthorized: The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single-supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.■ X Auth/Y Unauth: The port is in a multi-supplicant mode. Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized.
• Restart	Two buttons are available for each row. The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port's Admin State is in an EAPOL-based or MAC-based mode.Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the Page to take effect.

Reauthenticate: Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet-period of the port runs out (EAPOL-based authentication). For MAC-based authentication, reauthentication will be attempted immediately. The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized.
■ Reinitialize: Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately. The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.11.4 Network Access Overview

This Page provides an overview of the current NAS port states for the selected switch. The Network Access Overview screen in Figure 4-11-5 appears.

Network Access Server Switch Status

Port	Admin State	Port State	Last Source	Last ID	QoS Class	Port VLAN ID
1	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
2	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
3	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
4	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
5	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
6	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
7	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
8	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
9	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
10	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
11	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
12	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
13	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
14	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
15	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
16	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
17	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
18	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
19	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-
20	Force Authorized	Globally Disabled			-

Figure 4-11-5: Network Access Server Switch Status Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number. Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port.
• Admin State	The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values.
• Port State	The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states.
• Last Source	The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC-based authentication.
• Last ID	The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC-based authentication.
• QoS Class	QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled.
• Port VLAN ID	The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS.If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to the VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID.Read more about Guest VLANs here.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.11.5 Network Access Statistics

This Page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL-based IEEE 802.1X authentication. For MAC-based ports, it shows selected backend server (RADIUS Authentication Server) statistics, only. Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed. The Network Access Statistics screen in Figure 4-11-6 appears.

NAS Statistics Port 1 Port 1 Auto-refresh Refresh Port State Admin State Force Authorized Port State Globally Disabled

Figure 4-11-6: Network Access Statistics Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Port State

Object Description
• Admin State	The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values.
• Port State	The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states.
• QoS Class	The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server. The field is blank if no QoS classis assigned.
• Port VLAN ID	The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS.If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to the VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID.Read more about Guest VLANs here.

Port Counters

Object Description
• EAPOL Counters	These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states:■ Force Authorized■ Force Unauthorized■ Port-based 802.1X■ Single 802.1X■ Multi 802.1X
	Direction	Name	IEEE Name	Description
	Rx	Total	dot1xAuthEapolFramesRx	The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by the switch.
	Rx	Response ID	dot1xAuthEapolRespId FramesRx	The number of valid EAPOL Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch.
	Rx	Responses	dot1xAuthEapolRespFramesRx	The number of valid EAPOL response frames (other than Response Identity frames) that have been received by the switch.
	Rx Start	dot1xAuthEapolStartFramesRx	mesRx	The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by the switch.
	Rx	Logoff	dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFr	The number of valid EAPOL Logoff frames that have
		amesRx	been received by the switch.
	Rx	Invalid Type dot1xAuthInvalidEapolFramesRx	The number of EAPOLframes that have beenreceived by the switch inwhich the frame type is notrecognized.
	Rx	Invalid Length dot1xAuthEapLengthErrorFramesRx	The number of EAPOLframes that have beenreceived by the switch inwhich the Packet BodyLength field is invalid.
	Tx	Total dot1xAuthEapolFramesTx	The number of EAPOLframes of any type that havebeen transmitted by theswitch.
	Tx	Request ID dot1xAuthEapolReqIdFramesTx	The number of EAPOLRequest Identity frames thathave been transmitted bythe switch.
	Tx	Requests dot1xAuthEapolReqFramesTx	The number of valid EAPOLRequest frames (other thanRequest Identity frames)that have been transmittedby the switch.
• Backend Server Counters	These backend (RADIUS) frame counters are available for the following administrative states:Port-based 802.1XSingle 802.1XMulti 802.1XMAC-based Auth.
	Direction	Name	IEEE Name
	Rx Access Challenges	dot1xAuthBackendAccessChallenges	802.1X-based:Counts the number of timesthat the switch receives thefirst request from the backend

			server following the first response from the supplicant.Indicates that the backend server has communication with the switch.MAC-based:Counts all Access Challenges received from the backend server for this port (left-most table) or client (right-most table).
Rx Other	Requests	dot1xAuthBackendOther RequestsToSupplicant	802.1X-based:Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the supplicant.Indicates that the backend server chose an EAP-method.MAC-based:Not applicable.
Rx Auth.	Successes	dot1xAuthBackendAuth Successes	802.1X- and MAC-based:Counts the number of times that the switch receives a success indication. Indicates that the supplicant/client has successfully authenticated to the backend server.
Rx Auth.	Failures	dot1xAuthBackendAuth Fails	802.1X- and MAC-based:Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure message. This indicates that the supplicant/client has not authenticated to the backend server.
Tx	Responses	dot1xAuthBackendResp onses	802.1X-based:Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send a supplicant's first

		response packet to the backend server. Indicates the switch attempted communication with the backend server. Possible retransmissions are not counted.MAC-based:Counts all the backend server packets sent from the switch towards the backend server for a given port (left-most table) or client (right-most table). Possible retransmissions are not counted.
• Last Supplicant/Client Info	Information about the last supplicant/client that attempted to authenticate. This information is available for the following administrative states:■ Port-based 802.1X■ Single 802.1X■ Multi 802.1X■ MAC-based Auth.
	Name IEEE	Name Description
	MAC Address	dot1xAuthLastEapolF rameSource
	VLAN ID	-
	Version	dot1xAuthLastEapolF rameVersion
	Identity	-

Selected Counters

Object Description
• Selected Counters	The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is one of the following administrative states:■ Multi 802.1X■ MAC-based Auth.The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table, and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected. To populate the table, select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below.

Attached MAC Address

Object Description
• Identity	Shows the identity of the supplicant, as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame. Clicking the link causes the supplicant's EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table. If no supplicants are attached, it shows No supplicants attached.This column is not available for MAC-based Auth.
• MAC Address	For Multi 802.1X, this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant.For MAC-based Auth., this column holds the MAC address of the attached client.Clicking the link causes the client's Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table. If no clients are attached, it shows No clients attached.
• VLAN ID	This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module.
• State	The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated. In the authenticated state, it is allowed to forward frames on the port, and in the unauthenticated state, it is blocked. As long as the backend server hasn't successfully authenticated the client, it is unauthenticated. If an authentication fails for one or the other reason, the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds.
• Last Authentication	Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client (successful as well as unsuccessful).

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clear

This button is available in the following modes:

• Force Authorized
• Force Unauthorized
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X

Click to clear the counters for the selected port.

Clear All

This button is available in the following modes:

• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.X
  Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client's counters. The "Last Client" will not be cleared, however.

Clear This

This button is available in the following modes:

• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.X

Click to clear only the currently selected client's counters.

4.11.6 RADIUS

This Page allows you to configure the RADIUS Servers. The RADIUS Configuration screen in Figure 4-11-7 appears.

graph TD
    A["Timeout"] --> B["5 seconds"]
    C["Retransmit"] --> D["3 times"]
    E["Deadtime"] --> F["0 minutes"]
    G["Key"] --> H[" "]
    I["NAS-IP-Address"] --> J[" "]
    K["NAS-IPv6-Address"] --> L[" "]
    M["NAS-Identifier"] --> N[" "]

Figure 4-11-7: RADIUS Server Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Global Configuration

These setting are common for all of the RADIUS Servers.

Object Description
Timeout	Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request.
Retransmit	Retransmit is the number of times, in the range 1 to 1000, a RADIUS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding. If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead.
Dead Time	The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds, is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead.Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if more than one server has been configured.
• Key	The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the RADIUS server and the switch.
• NAS-IP-Address	The IPv4 address to be used as attribute 4 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this field is left blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is used.
• NAS-IPv6-Address	The IPv6 address to be used as attribute 95 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this field is left blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is used.
• NAS-Identifier	The identifier - up to 253 characters long - to be used as attribute 32 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this field is left blank, the NAS-Identifier is not included in the packet.

Server Configuration

The table has one row for each RADIUS Server and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
Delete	To delete a RADIUS server entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next Save.
Hostname	The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server.
Auth Port	The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for authentication.
Acct Port	The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for accounting.
Timeout	This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank will use the global timeout value.
Retransmit	This optional setting overrides the global retransmit value. Leaving it blank will use the global retransmit value.
Key	This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the global key.

Buttons

Add New Server

Click to add a new RADIUS server. An empty row is added to the table, and the RADIUS server can be configured as needed. Up to 5 servers are supported.

Delete

: Click to undo the addition of the new server.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.11.7 TACACS+

This Page allows you to configure the TACACS+ Servers. The TACACS+ Configuration screen in Figure 4-11-8 appears.

graph TD
    A["Timeout"] --> B["5 seconds"]
    C["Deadtime"] --> D["0 minutes"]
    E["Key"] --> F[" "]
    G["Server Configuration"] --> H["Delete"]
    G --> I["Hostname"]
    G --> J["Port"]
    G --> K["Timeout"]
    G --> L["Key"]
    M["Add New Server"] --> N["Apply"]
    M --> O["Reset"]

Figure 4-11-8: TACACS+ Server Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Global Configuration

These setting are common for all of the TACACS+ Servers.

Object Description
Timeout	Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply from a TACACS+ server before it is considered to be dead.
Dead Time	The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 to 1440 minutes, is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead.Setting the Deadtime to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if more than one server has been configured.
Key	The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the TACACS+ server and the switch.

Server Configuration

The table has one row for each TACACS+ server and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
Delete	To delete a TACACS+ server entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next Save.
Hostname	The IP address or hostname of the TACACS+ server.
Port	The TCP port to use on the TACACS+ server for authentication.
Timeout	This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank will use the global timeout value.
Key	This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the global key.

Buttons

Add New Server

Click to add a new TACACS+ server. An empty row is added to the table, and the TACACS+ server can be configured as needed. Up to 5 servers are supported.

Delete

Click to undo the addition of the new server.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.11.8 RADIUS Overview

This Page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication configuration Page. The RADIUS Authentication/Accounting Server Overview screen in Figure 4-11-9 appears.

RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview

#	IP Address	Status
1	0.0.0.0:0	Disabled
2	0.0.0.0:0	Disabled
3	0.0.0.0:0	Disabled
4	0.0.0.0:0	Disabled
5	0.0.0.0:0	Disabled

RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview

#	IP Address	Status
1	0.0 0.0:0	Disabled
2	0.0.0.0:0	Disabled
3	0.0.0.0:0	Disabled
4	0.0.0.0:0	Disabled
5	0.0.0.0:0	Disabled

Figure 4-11-9: RADIUS Authentication/Accounting Server Overview Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview

Object Description
#	The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.
IP Address	The IP address and UDP port number (in: notation) of this server.
Status	The current state of the server. This field takes one of the following values:■ Disabled: The server is disabled.■ Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.■ Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts.■ Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.

RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview

Object Description
#	The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.
IP Address	The IP address and UDP port number (in: notation) of this server.
Status	The current state of the server. This field takes one of the following values:■ Disabled: The server is disabled.■ Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.■ Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts.Dead (X seconds left): Accounting attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

4.11.9 RADIUS Details

This Page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server. The RADIUS Authentication/Accounting for Server Overview screen in Figure 4-11-10 appears.

RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server #1

Server #1
Receive Packets		Transmit Packets
Access Accepts	0	Access Requests	0
Access Rejects	0	Access Retransmissions	0
Access Challenges	0	Pending Requests	0
Malformed Access Responses	0	Timeouts	0
Bad Authenticators	0
Unknown Types	0
Packets Dropped	0
Other Info
IP Address			0.0.0.0:0
State			Disabled
Round-Trip Time			0 ms

RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server #1

Receive Packets		Transmit Packets
Responses	0	Requests	0
Malformed Responses	0	Retransmissions	0
Bad Authenticators	0	Pending Requests	0
Unknown Types	0	Timeouts	0
Packets Dropped	0
Other Info
IP Address			0.0.0.0:0
State			Disabled
Round-Trip Time			0 ms

Figure 4-11-10: RADIUS Authentication/Accounting for Server Overview Page Screenshot
The Page includes the following fields:

RADIUS Authentication Statistics

The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 - RADIUS Authentication Client MIB. Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.

Object Description
• Packet Counters	RADIUS authentication server packet counter. There are seven receive and four transmit counters.
	Direction	Name	RFC4668 Name	Description

Rx Access	Accepts	radiusAuthClientExtAccessAccepts	The number of RADIUS Access-Accept packets (valid or invalid) received from the server.
Rx Access	Access Rejects	radiusAuthClientExtAccessRejects	The number of RADIUS Access-Reject packets (valid or invalid) received from the server.
Rx Access	Challenges	radiusAuthClientExtAccessChallenges	The number of RADIUS Access-Challenge packets (valid or invalid) received from the server.
Rx Malformed	AccessResponses	radiusAuthClientExtMalformedAccessResponses	The number of malformed RADIUS Access-Response packets received from the server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses.
Rx Bad	Authenticators	radiusAuthClientExtBadAuthenticators	The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes received from the server.
Rx Unknown	Types	radiusAuthClientExtUnknownTypes	The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason.
Rx Packets	Dropped	radiusAuthClientExtPacketsDropped	The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the

			authentication port and dropped for some other reason.
	Tx AccessRequests	radiusAuthClientExtAccessRequests	The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets sent to the server. This does not include retransmissions.
	Tx AccessRetransmissionss	radiusAuthClientExtAccessRetransmissionss	The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authentication server.
	Tx PendingRequests	radiusAuthClientExtPendingRequests	The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response. This variable is incremented when an Access-Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access-Accept, Access-Reject, Access-Challenge, timeout, or retransmission.
	Tx	Timeouts	radiusAuthClientExtTimeouts
• Other Info	This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip time.
	Name	RFC4668 Name	Description
	IP Address	-	IP address and UDP port for the authentication server
	in question.
	State - Shows the state of the server. It takes one of the following values:■ Disabled: The selected server is disabled.■ Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.■ Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts.■ Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.
	Round-Trip Time	radiusAuthClient ExtRoundTripTime e The time interval (measured in milliseconds) between the most recent Access-Reply/Access-Challenge and the Access-Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server. The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn't been round-trip communication with the server yet.

RADIUS Accounting Statistics

The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 - RADIUS Accounting Client MIB. Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.

Object Description
• Packet Counters	RADIUS accounting server packet counter. There are five receive and four transmit counters.
	Direction	Name	RFC4670 Name	Description
	Rx	Responses	radiusAccClientExtResponses	The number of RADIUS packets (valid or invalid)received from the server.

Rx MalformedResponses		radiusAccClientExtMalformedResponses	The number of malformed RADIUS packets received from the server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses.
Rx Bad	Authenticators	radiusAcctClientExtBadAuthenticators	The number of RADIUS packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server.
Rx	Unknown Types	radiusAccClientExtUnknownTypes	The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types that were received from the server on the accounting port.
Rx	Packets Dropped	radiusAccClientExtPacketsDropped	The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason.
Tx Requests radiusAccClientExt		Requests	The number of RADIUS packets sent to the server. This does not include retransmissions.
Tx	Retransmissions	radiusAccClientExtRetransmissions	The number of RADIUS packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server.
Tx Pending Requests		radiusAccClientExtPendingRequests	The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response. This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of a Response, timeout, or

	retransmission.
	TxTimeoutsradiusAccClientExtTimeouts	The number of accounting timeouts to the server. After a timeout, the client may retry to the same server, send to a different server, or give up. A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout. A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout.
• Other Info	This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip time.
	Name	RFC4670 Name	Description
	IP Address	-	IP address and UDP port for the accounting server in question.
	State - Shows the state of the server. It takes one of the following values:Disabled:The selected server is disabled.Not Ready:The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.Ready:The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts.Dead (X seconds left): Accounting attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.
	Round-Trip Time	radiusAccClientExtRo undTripTime	The time interval (measured in milliseconds) between the most recent Response and the Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server.

The granularity of this measurement is

100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that

there hasn't been round-trip

communication with the server yet.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐ Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clear

Clears the counters for the selected server. The "Pending Requests" counter will not be cleared by this

4.11.10 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration

Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Wall-mount Managed Switch. In this case, field in the default IP Address of the Wall-mount Managed Switch with 192.168.0.100. And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at the Wall-mount Managed Switch's 802.1x system configuration – 12345678 at this case.

1. Configure the IP Address of remote RADIUS server and secret key.

RADIUS Server Configuration

Global Configuration

Timeout	5	seconds times minutes
Retransmit	3
Deadtime	0
Key
NAS-IP-Address
NAS-IPv6-Address
NAS-Identifier

Server Configuration

Delete	Hostname	Auth Port	Acct Port	Timeout	Retransmit	Key
	123	1812	1813	10	33	12345678

Add New Server

Apply | Reset

Figure 4-11-11: RADIUS Server Configuration Screenshot

2. Add New RADIUS Client on the Windows 2003 server

Internet Authentication Service File Action View Help Internet Authentication Service (Local) RADIUS Clients New RADIUS Client Remote Acces: New View Refresh Export List... Help Friendly Name Address Protocol CATest 192.168.0.5 RADIUS New Client

Figure 4-11-12: Windows Server – Add New RADIUS Client Setting

3. Assign the client IP address to the Wall-mount Managed Switch

New RADIUS Client Name and Address Type a friendly name and either an IP Address or DNS name for the client. Friendly name: 802.1x Managed Switch Client address (IP or DNS): 192.168.0.100 Verify... < Back Next > Cancel

Figure 4-11-13: Windows Server RADIUS Server Setting

1. The shared secret key should be the same as the key configured on the Wall-mount Managed Switch.

New RADIUS Client Additional Information If you are using remote access policies based on the client vendor attribute, specify the vendor of the RADIUS client. Client-Vendor: RADIUS Standard Shared secret: xxxxxx Confirm shared secret: xxxxxx Request must contain the Message Authenticator attribute < Back Finish Cancel

Figure 4-11-14: Windows Server RADIUS Server Setting

1. Configure ports attribute of 802.1X the same as "802.1X Port Configuration".

Port	Admin State	RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled	RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled	Guest VLAN Enabled	Port State	Restart
1	Port-based 802.1X	☐	☐	☐	Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize
2	Port-based 802.1X	☐	☐	☐	Globally Disabled	Reauthenticate	Reinitialize

Figure 4-11-15: 802.1x Port Configuration

1. Create user data. The establishment of the user data needs to be created on the Radius Server PC. For example, the Radius Server is founded on Win2003 Server, and then:

Security Configurati... Shortcut to Network ... Administrator Manage Your Server Command Prompt Windows Explorer Paint HyperTerminal Ethereal Internet Explor All Programs My Con Control Adminis Printers ? Help an Search Windows Catalog Windows Update Accessories Startup Internet Explorer Outlook Express Remote Assistance Administrative Tools IxChariot Ethereal Log Active Directory Domains and Trusts Active Directory Sites and Services Active Directory Users and Computers Certification Authority Cluster Administrator Component Services Computer Management Configure Your Server Wizard Data Sources (ODBC) Distributed File System DNS Domain Controller Security Policy Domain Security Policy Event Viewer Internet Authentication Service Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager Licensing Manage Your Server Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 Configuration Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 Wizards Network Load Balancing Manager Performance Remote Desktops Routing and Remote Access Services Terminal Server Licensing Terminal Services Configuration Terminal Services Manager

Figure 4-11-16: Windows 2003 AD Server Setting Path

1. Enter "Active Directory Users and Computers", create legal user data; next, right-click a user what you created to enter properties, and what to be noticed:

New Object - User Create in: ca.test.pc/Users First name: test Last name: Full name: test User logon name: test @ca.test.pc User logon name (pre-Windows 2000): CA\ test < Back Next > Cancel

Figure 4-11-17: Add User Properties Screen

New Object - User Create in: ca.test.pc/Users Password: •••••••• Confirm password: •••••••• □ User must change password at next logon ✓ User cannot change password ✓ Password never expires □ Account is disabled < Back Next > Cancel

Figure 4-11-18: Add User Properties Screen

Note

Set the Port Authenticate Status to "Force Authorized" if the port is connected to the RADIUS server or the port is an uplink port that is connected to another switch. Or once the 802.1X starts to work, the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server.

4.11.11 802.1X Client Configuration

Windows XP is originally 802.1X support. As to other operating systems (windows 98SE, ME, 2000), an 802.1X client utility is needed. The following procedures show how to configure 802.1X Authentication in Windows XP.

Please note that if you want to change the 802.1x authentication type of a wireless client, i.e. switch to EAP-TLS from EAP-MD5, you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first, and add it in again.

■ Configure Sample: EAP-MD5 Authentication

1. Go to Start > Control Panel, double-click on "Network Connections".
2. Right-click on the Local Network Connection.
3. Click "Properties" to open up the Properties setting window.

3COM 3C940 Status General Support Connection Status: Connected Duration: 03:35:37 Speed: 100.0 Mbps Activity Sent — Received Bytes: 146,938,760 | 110,212,126 Properties Disable Close

Figure 4-11-19

1. Select "Authentication" tab.
2. Select "Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X" to enable 802.1x authentication.
3. Select "MD-5 Challenge" from the drop-down list box for EAP type.

3COM 3C940 Properties General Authentication Advanced Select this option to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks. Enable IEEE 802.1x authentication for this network EAP type: Protected EAP (PEAP) MD5-Challenge Protected EAP (PEAP) Smart Card or other Certificate Authenticate as computer when computer information is available Authenticate as guest when user or computer information is unavailable OK Cancel

Figure 4-11-20

1. Click "OK".
2. When client has associated with the Wall-mount Managed Switch, a user authentication notice appears in system tray. Click on the notice to continue.

Local Area Connection 3 Click here to enter your user name and password for the network.

Figure 4-11-21: Windows Client Popup Login Request Message

1. Enter the user name, password and the logon domain that your account belongs.
2. Click "OK" to complete the validation process.

Local Area Connection 3 User name: test Password: ************ Logon domain: 1 OK Cancel

Figure 4-11-22

4.12 Security

This section is to control the access of the Wall-mount Managed Switch, includes the user access and management control.

The Security Page contains links to the following main topics:

■ Port Limit Control
■ Access Management
■ HTTPS / SSH
■ DHCP Snooping
■ IP Source Guard
■ ARP Inspection

4.12.1 Port Limit Control

This Page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings. Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port. A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID. If Limit Control is enabled on a port, the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port. If this number is exceeded, an action is taken. The action can be one of the four different actions as described below.

The Limit Control module utilizes a lower-layer module, Port Security module, which manages MAC addresses learnt on the port. The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide. The Port Limit Control Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-1 appears.

Port Security Limit Control Configuration

System Configuration

Mode Disabled Aging Enabled Aging Period 3600 seconds

Port Configuration

Port	Mode	Limit	Action		State	Re-open
*		4
1	Disabled	4	None		Disabled	Reopen
2	Disabled	4	None		Disabled	Reopen
3	Disabled	4	None		Disabled	Reopen
4	Disabled	4	None		Disabled	Reopen
5	Disabled	4	None		Disabled	Reopen

15 Disabled 4 None Disabled Reopen 16 Disabled 4 None Disabled Reopen 17 Disabled 4 None Disabled Reopen 18 Disabled 4 None Disabled Reopen 19 Disabled 4 None Disabled Reopen 20 Disabled 4 None Disabled Reopen

Figure 4-12-1: Port Limit Control Configuration Overview Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

System Configuration

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack. If globally disabled, other modules may still use the underlying functionality, but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled.
• Aging Enabled	If checked, secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period.
• Aging Period	If Aging Enabled is checked, then the aging period is controlled with this input. If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses, they may have other requirements to the aging period. Theunderlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality.The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10,000,000 seconds.To understand why aging may be desired, consider the following scenario:Suppose an end-host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub, which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled. The end-host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded. Now suppose that the end-host logs off or powers down. If it wasn't for aging, the end-host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward. To overcome this situation, enable aging. With aging enabled, a timer is started once the end-host gets secured. When the timer expires, the switch starts looking for frames from the end-host, and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period, the end-host is assumed to be disconnected, and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch.

Port Configuration

The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration below applies.
• Mode	Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port. Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect. Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port.
• Limit	The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port. This number cannot exceed 1024. If the limit is exceeded, the corresponding action is taken.The switch is "born" with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security-enabled port.Since all ports draw from the same pool, it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted, if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses.
• Action	If Limit is reached, the switch can take one of the following actions:■ None: Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port, but take no further action.■ Trap: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, send an SNMP trap. If Aging is disabled, only one SNMP trap will be sent, but with Aging enabled, new SNMP traps will be sent every time the limit gets exceeded.■ Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, shut down the port. This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port, and no new will be learned. Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port (by disconnecting the cable), the port will remain shut down. There are three ways to re-open the port:1) Boot the stack or elect a new masterthe switch,2) Disable and re-enable Limit Control on the port or the switch,3) Click the Reopen button.■ Trap & Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, both the "Trap" and the "Shutdown" actions described above will be taken.
• State	This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control's point of view. The state takes one of four values:■ Disabled: Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port.■ Ready: The limit is not yet reached. This can be shown for all actions.■ Limit Reached: Indicates that the limit is reached on this port. This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap.■ Shutdown: Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module. This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap & Shutdown.
• Re-open Button	If a port is shutdown by this module, you may reopen it by clicking this button, which will only be enabled if this is the case. For other methods, refer to Shutdown in the Action section.Note, that clicking the reopen button causes the Page to be refreshed, so non-committed changes will be lost.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page. Note that non-committed changes will be lost.

4.12.2 Access Management

Configure access management table on this Page. The maximum entry number is 16. If the application's type matches any one of the access management entries, it will allow access to the switch. The Access Management Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-2 appears.

Access Management Configuration Mode Disabled Delete VLAN ID Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP/HTTPS SNMP TELNET/SSH Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-12-2: Access Management Configuration Overview Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the access management mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable access management mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable access management mode operation.
• Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next apply .
• VLAN ID	Indicates the VLAN ID for the access management entry.
• Start IP address	Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry.
• End IP address	Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry.
• HTTP/HTTPS	Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP/HTTPS interface that the host IP address matched the entry.
• SNMP	Indicates the host can access the switch from SNMP interface that the host IP address matched the entry.
• TELNET/SSH	Indicates the host can access the switch from TELNET/SSH interface that the host IP address matched the entry.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new access management entry.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.12.3 Access Management Statistics

This Page provides statistics for access management. The Access Management Statistics screen in Figure 4-12-3 appears.

Access Management Statistics Interface Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets HTTP 0 0 0 HTTPS 0 0 0 SNMP 0 0 0 TELNET 0 0 0 SSH 0 0 0 Auto-refresh Refresh Clear

Figure 4-12-3: Access Management Statistics Overview Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Interface	The interface that allowed remote host can access the switch.
• Receive Packets	The received packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled.
• Allow Packets	The allowed packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled.
• Discard Packets	The discarded packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clears all statistics.

4.12.4 HTTPS

Configure HTTPS on this Page. The HTTPS Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-4 appears.

HTTPS Configuration Mode Enabled Automatic Redirect Disabled Apply Reset

Figure 4-12-4: HTTPS Configuration Screen Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the HTTPS mode operation. When the current connection is HTTPS, to apply HTTPS disabled mode operation will automatically redirect web browser to an HTTP connection. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable HTTPS mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable HTTPS mode operation.
• Automatic Redirect	Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation. It only significant if HTTPS mode "Enabled" is selected. Automatically redirects web browser to an HTTPS connection when both HTTPS mode and Automatic Redirect are enabled or redirects web browser to an HTTP connection when both are disabled. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.12.5 SSH

Configure SSH on this Page. This Page shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise.

The status Page is divided into two sections - one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status. The SSH Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-5 appears.

SSH Configuration Mode Enabled Apply Reset

Figure 4-12-5: SSH Configuration Screen Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Indicates the SSH mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable SSH mode operation.■ Disabled: Disable SSH mode operation.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.12.6 Port Security Status

This Page shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise.

The status Page is divided into two sections - one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status. The Port Security Status screen in Figure 4-12-6 appears.

Port Security Switch Status User Module Legend User Module Name Abbr Limit Control L 802.1X 8 Voice VLAN V Port Status Port Users State MAC Count Current Limit 1 --- Disabled - - 2 --- Disabled - - 3 --- Disabled - - 4 --- Disabled - - 5 --- Disabled - - 6 --- Disabled - - 7 --- Disabled - - 14 --- Disabled 15 --- Disabled - - 16 --- Disabled - - 17 --- Disabled - - 18 --- Disabled - - 19 --- Disabled - - 20 --- Disabled - - Auto-refresh Refresh

Figure 4-12-6: Port Security Status Screen Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

User Module Legend

The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services.

Object Description
• User Module Name	The full name of a module that may request Port Security services.
• Abbr	A one-letter abbreviation of the user module. This is used in the Users column in the port status table.

Port Status

The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the status for this particular port.
• Users	Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not. A '-' means that the corresponding user module is not enabled, whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter has enabled port security.
• State	Shows the current state of the port. It can take one of four values:■Disabled: No user modules are currently using the Port Security service.■Ready: The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module, and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive.■Limit Reached: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module, and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in.■Shutdown: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module, and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded. No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re-opened on the Limit Control configuration Web-Page.
• MAC Count(Current, Limit)	The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses (forwarding as well as blocked) and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port, respectively.If no user modules are enabled on the port, the Current column will show a dash (-).If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port, the Limit column will show a dash (-).

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

4.12.7 Port Security Detail

This Page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise. The Port Security Detail screen in Figure 4-12-7 appears.

Port Security Port Status Port 1 Port 1 MAC Address VLAN ID State Time of Addition.Age/Hold No MAC addresses attached Auto-refresh Refresh

Figure 4-12-7: Port Security Detail Screen Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• MAC Address & VLAN ID	The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port. If no MAC addresses are learned, a single row stating "No MAC addresses attached" is displayed.
• State	Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding. In the blocked state, it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic.
• Time of Addition	Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port.
• Age/Hold	● If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address, it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time (measured in seconds) expires.● If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward, and aging is enabled, the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic.● If the age period (measured in seconds) expires and no frames have been seen, the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table. Otherwise a new age period will begin.● If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely, a dash (-) will be shown.

4.12.8 DHCP Snooping

DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of DUT when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server.

DHCP Snooping Overview

graph TD
    A["DHCP Client 1"] -->|MAC 00:30:4F:11:22:33| B["Switch"]
    C["DHCP Client 2"] -->|MAC 00:11:22:55:AA:BB| B
    D["Un-Trust Port"] -->|MAC 00:50:77:66:55:44| E["Internet"]
    F["DHCP Server"] -->|MAC 192.168.0.1 00:30:4F:11:22:33| B
    G["DHCP Client 3"] -->|MAC 00:50:77:66:55:44| E
    H["VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address"] --> I["1"]
    H --> J["2"]
    H --> K["Internet"]

Configure DHCP Snooping on this Page. The DHCP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-8 appears.

DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping Mode Disabled Port Mode Configuration Port Mode * 1 Trusted 2 Trusted 3 Trusted 4 Trusted 5 Trusted 6 Trusted 14 Trusted 15 Trusted 16 Trusted 17 Trusted 18 Trusted 19 Trusted 20 Trusted Apply Reset

Figure 4-12-8: DHCP Snooping Configuration Screen Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Snooping Mode	Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes are:■ Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation. When enable DHCP snooping mode operation, the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports.■ Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.
• Port ModeConfiguration	Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode. Possible port modes are:■ Trusted: Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message.■ Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.12.9 Snooping Table

This page displays the dynamic IP assigned information after DHCP Snooping mode is disabled. All DHCP clients obtained the dynamic IP address from the DHCP server will be listed in this table except for local VLAN interface IP addresses. Entries in the Dynamic DHCP snooping Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic DHCP Snooping Table screen in Figure 4-12-9 appears.

Dynamic DHCP Snooping Table Auto-refresh □ Refresh |<< >> Start from MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-00 , VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page.

Figure 4-12-9: Dynamic DHCP Snooping Table Screen Page Screenshot

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: It will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table

|<<: To start over

4.12.10 IP Source Guard Configuration

IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host. This Page provides IP Source Guard related configuration. The IP Source Guard Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-10 appears.

IP Source Guard Configuration Mode Disabled Translate Dynamic to Static Port Mode Configuration Port Mode Max Dynamic Clients * 1 Disabled Unlimited 2 Disabled Unlimited 3 Disabled Unlimited 4 Disabled Unlimited 5 Disabled Unlimited 14 Disabled Unlimited 15 Disabled Unlimited 16 Disabled Unlimited 17 Disabled Unlimited 18 Disabled Unlimited 19 Disabled Unlimited 20 Disabled Unlimited Apply Reset

Figure 4-12-10: IP Source Guard Configuration Screen Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration	Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard. All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled.
• Port Mode Configuration	Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port.
• Max Dynamic Clients	Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients can be learned on given ports. This value can be 0, 1, 2 and unlimited. If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal 0, it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port.

Buttons

Translate Dynamic to Static

Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.12.11 IP Source Guard Static Table

This Page provides Static IP Source Guard Table. The Static IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4-12-11 appears.

Static IP Source Guard Table Delete Port VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-12-11: Static IP Source Guard Table Screen Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port	The logical port for the settings.
VLAN ID	The VLAN ID for the settings.
IP Address	Allowed Source IP address.
MAC Address	Allowed Source MAC address.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.12.12 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table

Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this Page. The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID, then by IP address, and then by IP mask. The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4-12-12 appears.

Dynamic IP Source Guard Table

Start from Port 1 , VLAN 1 and IP Address 0.0.0.0 with 20 entries per page. Port VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address No more entries Auto-refresh Refresh |<< >>

Figure 4-12-12: Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Screenshot

Navigating the ARP Inspection Table

Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table.
The "Start from port address", "VLAN", "IP address" and "IP mask" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table. Clicking the "Refresh" button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a "Refresh" button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The “>>” will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the "|<<" button to start over. The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the status for this particular port.
• VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
• IP Address	The IP address of the entry.
• MAC Address	The MAC address of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields.

Clear

Flushes all dynamic entries.

4.12.13 ARP Inspection

ARP Inspection is a secure feature. Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This feature is used to block such attacks. Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT. This Page provides ARP Inspection related configuration. The ARP Inspection Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-13 appears.

ARP Inspection Configuration Mode Disabled Translate Dynamic to Static Port Mode Configuration Port Mode Check VLAN Log Type * 1 Disabled Disabled None 2 Disabled Disabled None 3 Disabled Disabled None 4 Disabled Disabled None 5 Disabled Disabled None 6 Disabled Disabled None 15 Disabled Disabled None 16 Disabled Disabled None 17 Disabled Disabled None 18 Disabled Disabled None 19 Disabled Disabled None 20 Disabled Disabled None Apply Reset

Figure 4-12-13: ARP Inspection Configuration Screen Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration	Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection.
• Port Mode Configuration	Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port. Possible modes are:

■ Enabled: Enable ARP Inspection operation.
■ Disabled: Disable ARP Inspection operation.

If you want to inspect the VLAN configuration, you have to enable the setting of "Check VLAN". The default setting of "Check VLAN" is disabled. When the setting of "Check VLAN" is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting. And the setting of "Check VLAN" is enabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the VLAN setting. Possible setting of "Check

VLAN" are:

■ Enabled: Enable check VLAN operation.
■ Disabled: Disable check VLAN operation.

Only the Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, and the setting of "Check VLAN" is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting. There are four log types and possible types are:

■ None: Log nothing.
■ Deny: Log denied entries.
■ Permit: Log permitted entries.
■ ALL: Log all entries.

Buttons

Translate Dynamic to Static

Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.12.14 ARP Inspection Static Table

This Page provides Static ARP Inspection Table. The Static ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4-12-14 appears.

Static ARP Inspection Table Delete Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-12-14: Static ARP Inspection Table Screen Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port	The logical port for the settings.
VLAN ID	The VLAN ID for the settings.
MAC Address	Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets.
IP Address	Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.12.15 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table

Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this Page. The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries, and is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID, then by MAC address, and then by IP address. The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4-12-15 appears.

Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Start from Port 1 , VLAN 1 , MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00 and IP Address 0.0.0.0 with 20 entries per page. Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address No more entries Auto-refresh Refresh |<< >>

Figure 4-12-15: Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Screenshot

Navigating the ARP Inspection Table

Each Page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.
The "Start from port address", "VLAN", "MAC address" and "IP address" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table. Clicking the "Refresh" button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a "Refresh" button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The “>>” will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the "|<<" button to start over. The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the status for this particular port.
• VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
• MAC Address	The MAC address of the entry.
• IP Address	The IP address of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields.

Clear : Flushes all dynamic entries.

k: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.13 MAC Address Table

Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The Wall-mount Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to (based upon the DMAC address in the frame). This table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.

The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address), which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame. The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time.

4.13.1 MAC Table Configuration

The MAC Address Table is configured on this Page. Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here. The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4-13-1 appears.

graph TD
    A["Disable Automatic Aging"] --> B["300 seconds"]
    C["Aging Time"] --> B
    D["Port Members"] --> E["1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20"]
    F["Auto"] --> G["Disable"]
    F --> H["Secure"]
    I["Static MAC Table Configuration"] --> J["Delete VLAN ID MAC Address"]
    J --> K["Port Members"]
    K --> L["Add New Static Entry"]
    M["Apply Reset"] --> N["Reset"]

Figure 4-13-1: MAC Address Table Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Aging Configuration

By default, dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds. This removal is also called aging.

Object Description
Disable Automatic Aging	Enables/disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries
Aging Time	The time after which a learned entry is discarded. By default, dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds. This removal is also called aging.(Range: 10-10000000 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)

MAC Table Learning

If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out, another module is in control of the mode, so that it cannot be changed by the user. An example of such a module is the MAC-Based Authentication under 802.1X.

Object Description
• Auto	Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received.
• Disable	No learning is done.
• Secure	Only static MAC entries are learned, all other frames are dropped.Note: Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode, otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non-secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface.

Static MAC Table Configuration

The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table. The static MAC table can contain 64 entries. The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address.

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID	The VLAN ID of the entry.
MAC Address	The MAC address of the entry.
Port Members	Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry. Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry.
Adding a New Static Entry	Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table.Specify the VLAN ID, MAC address, and port members for the new entry. Click "Save".

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.13.2 MAC Address Table Status

Dynamic MAC Table

Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this Page. The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries, and is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by MAC address. The MAC Address Table screen in Figure 4-13-2 appears.

MAC Address Table

Query by:

Interface VLAN MAC Address CPU

Port Members

Type

VLAN

MAC Address

CPU

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Dynamic

1

00-30-4F-91-E6-45

Dynamic

1

00-60-6E-91-D2-CB

Static

1

33-33-00-00-00-01

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

Static

1

33-33-00-00-00-02

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

Static

1

33-33-FF-44-55-66

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

Static

1

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

Figure 4-13-2: MAC Address Table Status Page Screenshot

Navigating the MAC Table

Each Page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per Page" input field. When first visited, the web Page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table.

The "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table. Clicking the "Refresh" button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match.

In addition, the two input fields will - upon a "Refresh" button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.

The “>>” will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN/MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "no more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the "|<<" button to start over.

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Type	Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry.
• VLAN	The VLAN ID of the entry.
• MAC Address	The MAC address of the entry.
• Port Members	The ports that are members of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields.

Clear

Flushes all dynamic entries.

k<

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.14 LLDP

4.14.1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device. Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE 802.1ab standard, and can include details such as device identification, capabilities and configuration settings. LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers.

Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy, power, inventory, and device location details. LLDP and LLDP-MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology.

4.14.2 LLDP Configuration

This Page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings. The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure 4-14-1 appears.

LLDP Configuration
LLDP Parameters

Tx Interval	30	seconds
Tx Hold	4	times
Tx Delay	2	seconds
Tx Reinit	2	seconds

LLDP Port Configuration

			Optional TLVs
Port	Mode	CDP Aware	Port Description	System Name	System Description	System Capabilities	Management Address
*
1	Disabled
2	Disabled
3	Disabled
4	Disabled
5	Disabled
6	Disabled

16	Disabled	□	☑	☑	□	—	—
17	Disabled	□	☑	☑	☑	☑	☑
18	Disabled	□	☑	☑	☑	☑	☑
19	Disabled	□	☑	☑	☑	☑	☑
20	Disabled	□	☑	☑	☑	☑	☑

Figure 4-14-1: LLDP Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

LLDP Parameters

Object Description
• Tx Interval	The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up-to-date. The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 5 - 32768 seconds.Default: 30 secondsThis attribute must comply with the following rule:(Transmission Interval * Hold Time Multiplier) ≤65536, and Transmission Interval >= (4 * Delay Interval)
• Tx Hold	Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds. Valid values are restricted to 2 - 10 times.TTL in seconds is based on the following rule:(Transmission Interval * Holdtime Multiplier) ≤ 65536.Therefore, the default TTL is 4*30 = 120 seconds.
• Tx Delay	If some configuration is changed (e.g. the IP address) a new LLDP frame is transmitted, but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds. Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1/4 of the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 8192 seconds.This attribute must comply with the rule:(4 * Delay Interval) ≤Transmission Interval
• Tx Reinit	When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units, signaling that the LLDP information isn't valid anymore. Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 10 seconds.

LLDP Port Configuration

The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the Page header.

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the logical LLDP port.
• Mode	Select LLDP mode.■ Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information, but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed.■ Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors, but will send out LLDP information.■ Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information, and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors.■ Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information, and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors.
CDP Aware	Select CDP awareness.The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames (The switch doesn't transmit CDP frames). CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled.Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbours' table are decoded. All other TLVs are discarded (Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics.). CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbours' table as shown below.CDP TLV "Device ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Chassis ID" field.CDP TLV "Address" is mapped to the LLDP "Management Address" field. The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses, but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbours table.CDP TLV "Port ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Port ID" field.CDP TLV "Version and Platform" is mapped to the LLDP "System Description" field.Both the CDP and LLDP support "system capabilities", but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP. These capabilities are shown as "others" in the LLDP neighbours' table.If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbour devices. If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch.Note: When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn't removed immediately, but gets removed when the hold time is exceeded.
Port Description	Optional TLV: When checked the "port description" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
System Name	Optional TLV: When checked the "system name" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
System Description	Optional TLV: When checked the "system description" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
System Capabilities	Optional TLV: When checked the "system capability" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Management Address	Optional TLV: When checked the "management address" is included in LLDP information transmitted.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.14.3 LLDP MED Configuration

This Page allows you to configure the LLDP-MED. The LLDPMED Configuration screen in Figure 4-14-2 appears.

LLDP-MED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Fast start repeat count 4 Coordinates Location Latitude 0° North Longitude 0° East Altitude 0 Meters Map Datum WGS84 Civic Address Location Country code State County City City district Block (Neighborhood) Street Leading street direction Trailing street suffix Street suffix House no. House no. suffix Landmark Additional location info Name Zip code Building Apartment Floor Room no. Place type Postal community name P.O. Box Additional code Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service Policies Delete Policy ID Application Type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP No entries present Add New Policy Apply Reset

Figure 4-14-2: LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Fast start repeat count

Object Description

• Fast start repeat count

Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general. In addition, it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types (for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice-capable devices), both in order to conserve thelimited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy.With this in mind LLDP-MED defines an LLDP-MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol, in order to achieve these related properties. Initially, a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU. Only after an LLDP-MED Endpoint Device is detected, will an LLDP-MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP-MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port. The LLDP-MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second, when a new LLDP-MED neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP-MED information as fast as possible to new neighbours.Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbours, it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame. WithFast start repeat countit is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated. The recommended value is 4 times, given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted, when an LLDP frame with new information is received.It should be noted that LLDP-MED and the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices, and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements, including Network Connectivity Devices, or other types of links.

Coordinates Location

Object Description
• Latitude	Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits.It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator.
• Longitude	Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits.It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian.
• Altitude	Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within -32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits.It is possible to select between two altitude types (floors or meters).Meters: Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified.Floors: Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor-to-floor dimensions. An altitude = 0.0 is meaningful even outside a building, and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude. Inside a building, 0.0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance.
• Map Datum	TheMap Datumused for the coordinates given in this Option■WGS84:(Geographical 3D) - World Geodesic System 1984, CRS Code 4327, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich.■NAD83/NAVD88: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD88). This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land, not near tidal water (which would use Datum = NAD83/MLLW).■NAD83/MLLW: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water (MLLW). This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water/sea/ocean.

Civic Address Location

IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information (Civic Address LCI).

Object Description
Country code	The two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters - Example: DK, DE or US.
State	National subdivisions (state, canton, region, province, prefecture).
County	County, parish, gun (Japan), district.
City	City, township, shi (Japan) - Example: Copenhagen
City district	City division, borough, city district, ward, chou (Japan)
Block (Neighborhood)	Neighborhood, block
Street	Street - Example: Poppelvej
Leading street direction	Leading street direction - Example: N
Trailing street suffix	Trailing street suffix - Example: SW
Street suffix	Street suffix - Example: Ave, Platz
House no.	House number - Example: 21
• House no. suffix	House number suffix - Example: A, 1/2
• Landmark	Landmark or vanity address - Example: Columbia University
• Additional location info	Additional location info - Example: South Wing
• Name	Name (residence and office occupant) - Example: Flemming Jahn
• Zip code	Postal/zip code - Example: 2791
• Building	Building (structure) - Example: Low Library
• Apartment	Unit (Apartment, suite) - Example: Apt 42
• Floor	Floor - Example: 4
• Room no.	Room number - Example: 450F
• Place type	Place type - Example: Office
• Postal community name	Postal community name - Example: Leonia
• P.O. Box	Post office box (P.O. BOX) - Example: 12345
• Additional code	Additional code - Example: 1320300003

Emergency Call Service

Emergency Call Service (e.g. E911 and others), such as defined by TIA or NENA.

Object Description
• Emergency Call Service	Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. This format consists of a numerical digit string, corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling.

Policies

Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration, along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes, which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port. Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service.

Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific 'real-time' network policy requirements, such as interactive voice and/or video services.

The network policy attributes advertised are:

1. Layer 2 VLAN ID (IEEE 802.1Q-2003)
2. Layer 2 priority value (IEEE 802.1D-2004)
3. Layer 3 Diffserv code point (DSCP) value (IETF RFC 2474)

This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port. The application types specifically addressed are:

1. Voice
2. Guest Voice
3. Softphone Voice
4. Video Conferencing
5. Streaming Video
6. Control / Signaling (conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above)

A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization, and different policies per application type. LLDP-MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port, each corresponding to a different application type. Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies, based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.

It should be noted that LLDP-MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints, and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN.

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the policy. It will be deleted during the next save.
Policy ID	ID for the policy. This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the policies that shall be mapped to the specific ports.
Application Type	Intended use of the application types:■ Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.■ Voice Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy.■ Guest Voice - support a separate 'limited feature-set' voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services.■ Guest Voice Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologiesthat require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy.■ Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such as PCs or laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs, if at all, and are typically configured to use an 'untagged' VLAN or a single 'tagged' data specific VLAN. When a network policy is defined for use with an 'untagged' VLAN (see Tagged flag below), then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.■ Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.■ Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.■ Video Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy.
• Tag	Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a 'tagged' or an 'untagged' VLAN.■ Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003. In this case, both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.■ Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format, and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used, as well as the DSCP value. The tagged format includes an additional field, known as the tag header. The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
• VLAN ID	VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003
• L2 Priority	L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined by IEEE802.1D-2004. A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802.1D-2004.
• DSCP	DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values (0 through 63). A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475.
• Adding a new policy	Click Add New Policy to add a new policy. Specify the Application type, Tag, VLAN ID, L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy. Click "Save". The number of policies supported is 32

Port Policies Configuration

Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies, based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.

Object Description
• Port	The port number for which the configuration applies.
• Policy ID	The set of policies that shall apply for a given port. The set of policies is selected by checkmarking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.14.4 LLDP-MED Neighbor

This Page provides a status overview for all LLDP-MED neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected. The LLDP-MED Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4-14-3 appears. The columns hold the following information:

LLDP-MED Neighbour Information

Port 1
Device Type	Capabilities
Endpoint Class III	LLDP-MED Capabilities, Network Policy, Extended Power via MDI - PD, Inventory
Application Type	Policy	Tag	VLAN ID	Priority	DSCP
Voice	Defined	Untagged	-	-	46
Voice Signaling	Defined	Untagged	-	-	32
Auto-negotiation	Auto-negotiation status	Auto-negotiation Capabilities	MAU Type
Supported	Enabled	1000BASE-T half duplex mode, 1000BASE-X, -LX, -SX, -CX full duplex mode, Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE for full-duplex inks, Symmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links	100BaseTXFD - 2 pair category 5 UTP, full duplex mode

Figure 4-14-3: LLDP-MED Neighbor Information Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Fast start repeat count

Object Description
• Port	The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
• Device Type	LLDP-MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types: Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices.LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device DefinitionLLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices. An LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies:1. LAN Switch/Router2. IEEE 802.1 Bridge3. IEEE 802.3 Repeater (included for historical reasons)4. IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point5. Any device that supports the IEEE 802.1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA-1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method.LLDP-MED Endpoint Device DefinitionWithin the LLDP-MED Endpoint Device category, the LLDP-MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes, as defined in the following.Each LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class. Fore-example will anyLLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint (Class II) also support all aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints (Class I), and any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device (Class III) will also support all aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints (Class II) and Generic Endpoints (Class I).LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I)The LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I) definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA-1057, however do not support IP media or act as an end-user communication appliance. Such devices may include (but are not limited to) IP Communication Controllers, other communication related servers, or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA-1057.Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration, device location, network policy, power management, and inventory management.LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II)The LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II) definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user. Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class (Class I), and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming. Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include (but are not limited to) Voice / Media Gateways, Conference Bridges, Media Servers, and similar.Discovery services defined in this class include media-type-specific network layer policy discovery.LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III)The LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III) definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media. Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint (Class I) and Media Endpoint (Class II) classes, and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices. Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include (but are not limited to) end user communication appliances, such as IP Phones, PC-based softphones, or other communication appliances that directly support the end user.Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier (including ECS / E911 information), embedded L2 switch support, inventory management
• LLDP-MED Capabilities	LLDP-MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's LLDP-MED capabilities.The possible capabilities are:1. LLDP-MED capabilities2. Network Policy3. Location Identification4. Extended Power via MDI - PSE5. Extended Power via MDI - PD6. Inventory7. Reserved
Application Type	Application Type indicating the primary function of the application(s) defined for this network policy, advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device. The poosible application types are shown below.■Voice- for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.■Voice Signaling- for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media.■Guest Voice- to support a separate limited feature-set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services.■ Guest Voice Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media.■Softphone Voice- for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such as PCs or laptops.■Video Conferencing- for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.■Streaming Video- for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.■Video Signaling- for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media.
Policy	Policyindicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device. Can be either Defined or Unknown■Unknown: The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown.■Defined: The network policy is defined.
TAG	TAG is indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN. Can be Tagged ot Untagged■Untagged: The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.■Tagged: The device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format
VLAN ID	VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003. A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID. A value of 0 (Priority Tagged) is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003, meaning that only the IEEE 802.1D priority levelis significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead.
• Priority	Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. One of eight priority levels (0 through 7)
• DSCP	DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. Contain one of 64 code point values (0 through 63).
• Auto-negotiation	Auto-negotiation identifies if MAC/PHY auto-negotiation is supported by the link partner.
• Auto-negotiation status	Auto-negotiation status identifies if auto-negotiation is currently enabled at the link partner. If Auto-negotiation is supported and Auto-negotiation status is disabled, the 802.3 PMD operating mode will be determined the operational MAU type field value rather than by auto-negotiation.
• Auto-negotiation Capabilities	Auto-negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC/PHY capabilities.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.14.5 Neighbor

This Page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected. The LLDP Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4-14-4 appears.

LLDP Neighbor Information

LLDP Remote Device Summary Local Port | Chassis ID | Remote Port ID | System Name | System Capabilities | Management Address No neighbor information found Auto-refresh □ Refresh

Figure 4-14-4: LLDP Neighbor Information Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Local Port	The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
• Chassis ID	The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor's LLDP frames.
• Port ID	The Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port.
• Port Description	Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit.
• System Name	System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit.
• System Capabilities	System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's capabilities. The possible capabilities are:1. Other2. Repeater3. Bridge4. WLAN Access Point5. Router6. Telephone7. DOCSIS cable device8. Station only9. ReservedWhen a capability is enabled, the capability is followed by (+). If the capability is disabled, the capability is followed by (-).
• Management Address	Management Address is the neighbor unit's address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management. This could for instance hold the neighbor's IP address.

Buttons

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.14.6 Port Statistics

This Page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic. Two types of counters are shown. Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack, switch, while local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch. The LLDP Statistics screen in Figure 4-14-5 appears.

LLDP Global Counters

Global Counters
Neighbor entries were last changed 1970-01-01 Thu 00:00:00+00:00 (26930 secs ago)
Total Neighbors Entries Added	0
Total Neighbors Entries Deleted	0
Total Neighbors Entries Dropped	0
Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out	0

LLDP Statistics Local Counters

Local Port	Tx Frames	Rx Frames	Rx Errors	Frames Discarded	TLVs Discarded	TLVs Unrecognized	Org. Discarded	Age-Outs
1	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
2	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
3	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
4	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
5	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
				0	0	0	0	0
15	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
16	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
17	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
18	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
19	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
20	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	0

Figure 4-14-5: LLDP Statistics Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Global Counters

Object Description
Neighbor entries were last changed	It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added. It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected.
Total Neighbors Entries Added	Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot.
Total Neighbors Entries Deleted	Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot.
Total Neighbors Entries Dropped	Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full.
Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out	Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.

LLDP Statistics Local Counters

The displayed table contains a row for each port. The columns hold the following information:

Object Description
• Local Port	The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.
• Tx Frames	The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port.
• Rx Frames	The number of LLDP frames received on the port.
• Rx Errors	The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.
• Frames Discarded	If an LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has run full, the LLDP frame is counted and discarded. This situation is known as "Too Many Neighbors" in the LLDP standard. LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table. Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down, an LLDP shutdown frame is received, or when the entry ages out.
• TLVs Discarded	Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs (TLV is short for "Type Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted and discarded.
• TLVs Unrecognized	The number of well-formed TLVs, but with an unknown type value.
• Org. Discarded	The number of organizationally TLVs received.
• Age-Outs	Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid (age-out time). If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time, the LLDP information is removed, and the Age-Out counter is incremented.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the Page immediately.

Clear

Clears the local counters. All counters (including global counters) are cleared upon reboot.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the Page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.15 Network Diagnostics

This section provides the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot. The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers.

Use the Diagnostics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Wall-mount Managed Switch. Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information:

This section has the following items:

■ Ping
■ IPv6 Ping
■ Remote IP Ping
■ Cable Diagnostics

Ping

The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues. The Wall-mount Managed Switch transmit ICMP packets, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply.

Cable Diagnostics

The Cable Diagnostics performing tests on copper cables. These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions, and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted-pair cabling. There might be two statuses as follow:

If the link is established on the twisted-pair interface in 1000BASE-T mode, the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer.
If the link is established in 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T, the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are running.

After the diagnostics are finished, the link is reestablished. And the following functions are available.

■ Coupling between cable pairs.
■ Cable pair termination
■ Cable Length

4.15.1 Ping

This Page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues.

After you press "Start", 5 ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The Page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4-15-1 appears.

ICMP Ping IP Address 0.0.0.0 Ping Length 64 Start

Figure 4-15-1: ICMP Ping Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• IP Address	The destination IP Address.
• Ping Length	The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.

Be sure the target IP address is within the same network subnet of the Wall-mount Managed Switch, or you have to set up the correct gateway IP address.

Buttons

Click to transmit ICMP packets.

Click to re-start diagnostics with ping.

4.15.2 IPv6 Ping

This Page allows you to issue ICMPv6 ping packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues.

After you press "Start", 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The Page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4-15-2 appears.

ICMPv6 Ping IPv6 Address 0:0:0:0:0:0:0 Ping Length 64 Start

Figure 4-15-2: ICMPv6 Ping Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• IP Address	The destination IP Address.
• Ping Length	The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.

Buttons

Click to transmit ICMP packets.

Click to re-start diagnostics with ping.

4.15.3 Remote IP Ping Test

This Page allows you to issue ICMP ping packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on special port.

After you press "Test", 5 ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The Page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4-15-3 appears.

Remote IP Ping Test

Port	Remote IP Address	Ping Size	Ping Button	Result
1	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
2	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
3	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
4	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
5	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
6	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
7	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
8	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
9	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
10	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
11	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
12	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
13	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
14	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
15	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
16	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
17	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
18	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
19	0.0.0.0	64	Ping
20	0.0.0.0	64	Ping

Figure 4-15-3: Remote IP Ping Test Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The logical port for the settings.
• Remote IP Address	The destination IP Address.
• Ping Size	The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes.
• Result	Display the ping result.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Clears the IP Address and the result of ping value.

4.15.4 Cable Diagnostics

This Page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics.

Press to run the diagnostics. This will take approximately 5 seconds. If all ports are selected, this can take approximately 15 seconds. When completed, the Page refreshes automatically, and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table. Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 - 140 meters.

10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic. Therefore, running cable diagnostic on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete. The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the Page header. The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics screen in Figure 4-15-4 appears.

Figure 4-15-4: VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Page Screenshot

The Page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics.
• Description	Display per port description.
• Cable Status	Port:Port number.Pair:The status of the cable pair.OK - Correctly terminated pairOpen - Open pairShort - Shorted pairShort A - Cross-pair short to pair AShort B - Cross-pair short to pair BShort C - Cross-pair short to pair CShort D - Cross-pair short to pair DCross A - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair ACross B - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair BCross C - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair CCross D - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair DLength:The length (in meters) of the cable pair. The resolution is 3 meters

Buttons

Start

Click to run the diagnostics.

4.16 Power over Ethernet

Providing up to 8 PoE, in-line power interfaces, the WGS-5225-8P2S and WGS-5225-8P2SV PoE Switches can easily build a power central-controlled IP phone system, IP Camera system, AP group for the enterprise. For instance, 8 camera / AP can be easily installed around the corner in the company for surveillance demands or build a wireless roaming environment in the office. Without the power-socket limitation, the WGS-5225-8P2S and WGS-5225-8P2SV PoE Switches make the installation of cameras or WLAN AP more easily and efficiently.

Power Over Ethernet Status

The total value add from port 1 to 8 should not more than 240 watt

Local Port	PD Class	Power Used [W]	Current Used [mA]	Priority	Port Status	AF/AT Mode
1	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
2	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
3	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
4	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
5	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
6	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
7	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
8	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
Total		0 [W]	0 [mA]

Auto Refresh

Refresh

Figure 4-16-1: Power over Ethernet Status

4.16.1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device

3~5 Watts	Voice over IP phonesEnterprise can install POE VoIP Phone, ATA and otherEthernet/non-Ethernet end-devices to the central where UPS is installed for un-interrupt power system and power control system.
6~12 Watts	Wireless LAN Access PointsMuseum, Sightseeing, Airport, Hotel, Campus, Factory, Warehouse can install the Access Point any where with no hesitation.
10~12 Watts	IP SurveillanceEnterprise, Museum, Campus, Hospital, Bank, can install IP Camera without limits of install location – no need electrician to install AC sockets.
3~12 Watts	PoE SplitterPoE Splitter split the PoE 52V DC over the Ethernet cable into 5/12V DC power output. It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations, which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time.
3~25 Watts	High Power PoE SplitterHigh PoE Splitter split the PoE 526V DC over the Ethernet cable into 24/12V DC power output. It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations, which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time.
30 Watts	High Power Speed DomeThis state-of-the-art design is considerable to fit in various network environments like traffic centers, shopping malls, railway stations, warehouses, airports, and production facilities for the most demanding outdoor surveillance applications- no need electrician to install AC sockets.

Since the WGS-5225-8P2SV/WGS-5225-8P2S per PoE port supports 48\~56V DC PoE power output, please check and assure the Powered Device's (PD) acceptable DC power range is from 48\~56V DC; otherwise, it will damage the Powered Device (PD).

4.16.2 System Configuration

In a power over Ethernet system, operating power is applied from a power source (PSU-power supply unit) over the LAN infrastructure to powered devices (PDs), which are connected to ports. Under some conditions, the total output power required by PDs can exceed the maximum available power provided by the PSU. The system may a prior be planned with a PSU capable of supplying less power than the total potential power consumption of all the PoE ports in the system. In order to maintain the majority of ports active, power management is implemented.

The PSU input power consumption is monitored by measuring voltage and current .The input power consumption is equal to the system's aggregated power consumption .The power management concept allows all ports to be active and activates additional ports, as long as the aggregated power of the system is lower than the power level at which additional PDs cannot be connected .When this value is exceeded, ports will be deactivated, according to user-defined priorities. The power budget is managed according to the following user-definable parameters: maximum available power, ports priority, maximum allowable power per port.

Reserved Power determined by

There are five modes for configuring how the ports/PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports.

■ Classification mode

In this mode each port automatic determines how much power to reserve according to the class the connected PD belongs to, and reserves the power accordingly. Four different port classes exist and one for 4, 7, 15.4 and 30.8 Watts.

Class	Usage	Range of maximum power used by the PD	Class Dsecription
0	Default	0.44 to 12.95 Watts	Classification unimplement
1	Optional	0.44 to 3.84 Watts	Very low power
2	Optional	3.84 to 6.49 Watts	Low power
3	Optional	6.49 to 12.95 Watts (or to 15.4Watts)	Mid power
4	Optional	12.95 to 25.50 Watts (or to 30.8Watts)	High power

1. In this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect.
2. The PoE chip of PD69012 has designed to that Class level 0 will be assigned to 15.4 watts by AF mode and 30.8 watts by AT mode under classification power limit mode. It is hardware limited.

■ Allocation mode

In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve. The allocated/reserved power for each port/PD is specified in the Maximum Power fields. The ports are shut down when total reserved powered exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver.

In this mode the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more available power.

■ LLDP mode

In this mode the ports of PoE power is managed and determined by LLDP Media protocol.

4.16.3 Power Over Ethernet Configuration

This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE configuration settings, screen in Figure 4-16-2 appears.

Power Over Ethernet Configuration System PoE Admin Mode Enable ▼ PoE Temperature Protection Enable ▼ PoE Management Mode allocation-consumption ▼ PoE Legacy Mode Disable ▼ Power Supply Budget[W] 240 Temperature Threshold 100 Degrees C PoE Usage Threshold 85 % Apply Reset

Figure 4-16-2: PoE Configuration Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
System PoE Admin Mode	Allows user enable or disable PoE function. It will causes all of PoE ports supply or not supply power.
PoE Temperature Protection	Allows user enable or disable PoE Temperature Protection.
PoE Management Mode	There are Six modes for configuring how the ports/PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports.■ Class-Consumption mode: System offers PoE power according to PD real power consumption.■ Class-Reserved-Power mode: System reserves PoE power to PD according to PoE class level.■ Allocation-Consumption mode: System offers PoE power according to PD real power consumption.■ Allocation-Reserved-Power mode: Users allow to assign how much PoE power for per port and system will reserves PoE power to PD.■ LLDP-Consumption mode: System offers PoE power according to PD real power consumption.■ LLDP-Reserved-Power mode: System reserves PoE power to PD according to LLDP configuration.
Power Supply Budget [W]	Set limit value of the total PoE port provided power to the PDs.WGS-5225-8P2SV/WGS-5225-8P2S available maximum value is 240. (depends on power input)
Temperature Threshold	Allows setting over temperature protection threshold value. It system temperature was over it then system lower total PoE power budget automatically.
PoE Usage Threshold	Allows setting how much PoE power budget could be limited.

Buttons

: Click to apply changes

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

PD Classifications

A PD may be classified by the PSE based on the classification information provided by the PD. The intent of PD classification is to provide information about the maximum power required by the PD during operation. However, to improve power management at the PSE, the PD provides a signature about Class level.

The PD is classified based on power. The classification of the PD is the maximum power that the PD will draw across all input voltages and operational modes.

A PD will return to Class 0 to 4 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4-16-1.

Class	Usage	Range of maximum power used by the PD	Class Description
0 Default		12.95 watts (or to 15.4 watts for AF mode)25.5 watts (or to 30.8 watts for AT mode)	Mid power or High power
1	Optional	0.44 to 3.84 watts	Very low power
2	Optional	3.84 to 6.49 watts	Low power
3	Optional	6.49 to 12.95 watts (or to 15.4 watts)	Mid power
4	Optional	12.95 to 25.50 watts (or to 30.8 watts)	High power

Table 4-16-1 Device Class

4.16.4 Port Sequential

This page allows the user to configure the PoE Ports started up interval time. The PoE Port will start up one by one as Figure 4-16-3 shows.

Port Sequential Power up Interval

Sequential Power up Option Enable Sequential Power up Interval 5 (3 ~ 30) seconds Sequential Power up Port Option By port Apply Reset

Figure 4-16-3: PoE Port Sequential Power Up Interval Configuration Screenshot

The PoE port will start up after the whole system program has finished running.

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Sequential Power up Option	Allows user to enable or disable Sequential Power up function.
Sequential Power up Interval	Allows user to configure the PoE Port Start Up interval time.
Sequential Power up Port Option	There are two modes for Starting Up the PoE PortBy Port: The PoE Port will start up by following Port number.By Priority: The PoE Port will start up by following the PoE Priority.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.16.5 Port Configuration

This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings as Figure 4-16-4 shows.

Power Over Ethernet Configuration

Port	PoE Mode	Schedule	AF/AT Mode	Priority	Power Allocation[W]
*
1	Enable	Profile 1	802.3at	High		36
2	Enable	Profile 1	802.3at	High		36
3	Enable	Profile 1	802.3at	High		36
4	Enable	Profile 1	802.3at	High		36
5	Enable	Profile 1	802.3at	High		36
6	Enable	Profile 1	802.3at	High		36
7	Enable	Profile 1	802.3at	High		36
8	Enable	Profile 1	802.3at	High		36

Apply Reset

Figure 4-16-4: Power over Ethernet Configuration Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
PoE Mode	There are three modes for PoE mode.■ Enable: enable PoE function..■ Disable: disable PoE function.■ Schedule: enable PoE function in schedule mode.
Schedule	Indicates the schedule profile mode. Possible profiles are:■ Profile1■ Profile2■ Profile3■ Profile4
AF/AT Mode	Allows user to select 802.3at or 802.3af compatibility mode. The default vaule is 802.3at mode.This function wil affect PoE power reservation on Classification power limit mode only, as 802.3af mode, system is going to reserve 15.4W maximum for PD that supported Class3 level. As IEEE 802.3at mode, system is going to reserve 30.8Watts for PD that support Class4 level.From class1 to class3 level on the 802.3at mode will be reserved the same PoE power with 802.3af mode.
Priority	The Priority represents PoE ports priority. There are three levels of power prioritynamed Low, High and Critical.The priority is used in the case when total power consumption has been over total power budget. In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turn off, and offer power for the port of higher priority.
• Power Allocation	It can limit the port PoE supply watts. Per port maximum value must less than 30.8W watts, total ports values must less than the Power Reservation value.Once power overload detected, the port will auto shut down and keep on detection mode until PD's power consumption lower than the power limit value

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.16.6 PoE Status

This page allows the user to inspect the total power consumption, total power reserved and current status for all PoE ports. The screen in Figure 4-16-5 appears.

Power Over Ethernet Status

The total value add from port 1 to 8 should not more than 240 watt

Local Port	PD Class	Power Used [W]	Current Used [mA]	Priority	Port Status	AF/AT Mode
1	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
2	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
3	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
4	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
5	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
6	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
7	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
8	0	0	0	High	PoE Search	--
Total		0 [W]	0 [mA]

Auto Refresh

Refresh

Figure 4-16-5: PoE Status Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Current Power Consumption	Shows the total watts usage of Managed PoE Switch.
• Total Power Reserved	Shows how much the total power be reserved for all PDs.
• Temperature	Displays the current operating temperature of first PoE chip unit.
• Local Port	This is the logical port number for this row.
• PD Class	Displays the class of the PD attached to the port, as established by the classification process. Class 0 is the default for PDs. The PD is powered based on PoE Class level if system working on Classification mode. A PD will return Class to 0 to 4 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4-16-1.
• Power Used [W]	The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using.
• Current Used [mA]	The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using.
• Priority	The Priority shows the port's priority configured by the user.
• Port Status	The Port Status shows the port's status.
• AF / AT Mode	Displays per PoE port operate at 802.3af or 802.3at mode.
• Total	Shows the total power and current usage of all PDs.

Buttons

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.16.7 PoE Schedule

This page allows the user to define PoE schedule and schedule power recycle.

PoE Schedule

Besides being used as an IP Surveillance, the Managed PoE switch is certainly applicable to construct any PoE network including VoIP and Wireless LAN. Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to the environmental protection on the Earth, the Managed PoE switch can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power. The "PoE schedule" function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMB or Enterprise saving power and money.

graph TD
    A["8AM"] --> B["Sun"]
    B --> C["5PM"]
    D["Power On 6 Watts"] --> E["Device"]
    F["Power On 6 Watts"] --> E
    G["Power On 12 Watts"] --> E
    H["Power On 12 Watts"] --> E
    E --> I["Total consumption of 36watts / hr"]

graph TD
    A["SPM"] --> B["Switch"]
    C["8AM"] --> B
    B --> D["Power Off: 6 Watts"]
    B --> E["Power Off: 6 Watts"]
    B --> F["Power Off: 12 Watts"]
    B --> G["Power On: 12 Watts"]
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    note right of D "Saves 24watts / hr during off-business hours"
    note right of G "* Total Saved = 10800watts / month"

1000Base-T UTP with PoE

Scheduled Power Recycling

The Managed PoE switch allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras to reboot in a specific time each week. Therefore, it will reduce the chance of IP camera crash resulting from buffer overflow.

graph TD
    A["Automatically Reboot Every Monday 03:00"] --> B["CPU/Buffer Load 10%"]
    C["Automatically Reboot Every Friday 23:00"] --> D["CPU/Buffer Load 85%"]
    B --> E["Switch"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["Allow per port scheduled power recycle"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

The screen in Figure 4-16-6 appears.

Figure 4-16-6: PoE Schedule Screenshot

Please press Add New Rule button to start set PoE Schedule function. You have to set PoE schedule to profile then go back to PoE Port Configuration, and select "Schedule" mode from per port "PoE Mode" option then you can indicate which schedule profile could be apply to the PoE port.

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Profile	Set the schedule profile mode. Possible profiles are:Profile1Profile2Profile3Profile4
• Week Day	Allows user to set week day for defining PoE function should be enabled on the day.
• Start Hour	Allows user to set what hour does PoE function enables.
• Start Min	Allows user to set what minute does PoE function enables.
• End Hour	Allows user to set what hour does PoE function disables.
• End Min	Allows user to set what minute does PoE function disables.
• Reboot Enable	Allows user to enable or disable whole PoE port reboot by PoE reboot schedule.Please be noticed that if you want to PoE schedule and PoE reboot schedule work at the same time, please use this function, and don't useReboot Onlyfunction.This function offers administrator to reboot PoE device at indicate time if administrator has this kind of requirement.
• Reboot Only	Allows user to reboot PoE function by PoE reboot schedule. Please be noticed that if administrator enable this function, PoE schedule will not to set time to profile. This function just ony for PoE port reset on the indicate time.
• Reboot Hour	Allows user to set what hour PoE reboots. This function only for PoE reboot schedule.
• Reboot Min	Allows user to set what minute PoE reboots. This function only for PoE reboot schedule.

Buttons

Add New Rule

click to add new rule.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Delete

Check to delete the entry.

4.16.8 LLDP PoE Neighbours

This page provides a status overview for all LLDP PoE neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP PoE neighbor is detected. The columns hold the following information: The screen in Figure 4-16-7 appears.

LLDP Neighbor Power Over Ethernet Information

Local Port | Power Type | Power Source | Power Priority | Maximum Power 1 PD Device Unknown Unknown 6.3 [W] Auto-refresh ✓ Refresh

Figure 4-16-7: LLDP PoE Neighbour Screenshot

Please be noticed that administrator has to enable LLDP port from LLDP configuration, please refer to following example (The screen in Figure 4-16-8 appears.) we enabled LLDP function from port1 ro port3, administrator has to plug a PD that supported PoE LLDP function, and then administrator is going to see the PoE information of the PD form LLDP.

LLDP Port Configuration

Optional TLVs
Port	Mode	CDP Aware	Port Description	System Name	System Description	System Capabilities	Management Address
*
1	Enabled
2	Enabled
3	Disabled

Figure 4-16-9: LLDP Configuration Screenshot

4.16.10 PoE Alive Check Configuration

The WGS-5225 PoE Switch can be configured to monitor connected PD's status in real-time via ping action. Once the PD stops working and without response, the WGS-5225 PoE Switch is going to restart PoE port port power, and bring the PD back to work. It will greatly enhance the reliability and reduces administrator management burden.

Step 1

PD Status Good!! PT PoE Camera Ping Request Ping Echo

Step 2

No Response...... Ping Request check alive status for 3 times

Step 3

Alarm Notification PoE ON OFF Restart PoE device if without response

Step 4

graph LR
    A["PD Alive!!"] -->|ON| B["Terminal Device"]
    B -->|POE| C["Data Flow Arrow"]
    C --> D["Red Arrow Down"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

This page provides you with how to configure PD Alive Check. The screen in Figure 4-16-10 appears.

PD Ping Alive Check

Port	Mode	Ping PD IP Address	Interval Time(10~300s)		Retry Count(1~5)		Action		Reboot Time(30~180 s)
+	✓						✓
1	Disable -	0.0.0.0		30		2	None	✓		90
2	Disable -	0.0.0.0		30		2	None	✓		90
3	Disable -	0.0.0.0		30		2	None	✓		90
4	Disable -	0.0.0.0		30		2	None	✓		90
5	Disable -	0.0.0.0		30		2	None	✓		90
6	Disable -	0.0.0.0		30		2	None	✓		90
7	Disable -	0.0.0.0		30		2	None	✓		90
8	Disable -	0.0.0.0		30		2	None	✓		90

Apply Reset

Figure 4-16-10: PD Alive Check Configuration Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Mode	Allows user to enable or disable per port PD Alive Check function.As default value all ports are disabled.
• Ping PD IP Address	This coulumn allows user to set PoE device IP address here for system making ping to the PoE device. Please note that the PD's IP address must be set to the samenetwork segment with WGS-5225 PoE Switch.
Interval Time (10~300s)	This column allows user to set how long system should issue a ping request to PD for detecting whether PD is alive or dead.Interval time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Retry Count (1~5)	This column allows user to set how many times system should issue ping to PD.For example, if we set count 2, the meaning is that if system retries ping to the PD and if the PD doesn't response continuously, the PoE port will be reset.
Action	Allows user to set which action will be applied if the PD is without any response.WGS-5225 PoE Switch offers 3 actions shown as follows:PD Reboot: It means system will reset the PoE port that is connected to the PD.Reboot & Alarm: It means system will reset the PoE port and issue an alarm message via Syslog, SMTP.Alarm: It means system will issue an alarm message via Syslog, SMTP.
Reboot Time (30~180s)	This column allows user to set the PoE device rebooting time, as there are so many kinds of PoE devices on the market and they have different rebooting times. The PD alive-check is not a defining standard, so the PoE device on the market doesn't report reboots done information to WGS-5225 PoE Switch, so user has to make sure how long it takes the PD to finish the booting time, and then set the time value to this column. System is going to check the PD again according to the reboot time. If you are not sure about the precise booting time, we suggest you to set it longer.

Buttons

Apply

: Click to apply changes

Reset

: Click it to reset configuration which has not been saved yet.

4.17 Loop Protection

This chapter describes when loop protection function is enabled, you can prevent broadcast loops in Wall-mount Managed Switch.

4.17.1 Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations, and possibly change them as well; screen in

Figure 4-17-1 appears.

Loop Protection Configuration General Settings Global Configuration Enable Loop Protection Transmission Time Shutdown Time Disable 5 180 seconds seconds Port Configuration Port Enable Action Tx Mode * □ 1 ✓ Shutdown Port Enable ✓ 2 ✓ Shutdown Port Enable ✓ 3 ✓ Shutdown Port Enable ✓ 4 ✓ Shutdown Port Enable ✓ 15 ✓ Shutdown Port Enable ✓ 16 ✓ Shutdown Port Enable ✓ 17 ✓ Shutdown Port Enable ✓ 18 ✓ Shutdown Port Enable ✓ 19 ✓ Shutdown Port Enable ✓ 20 ✓ Shutdown Port Enable ✓ Apply Reset

Figure 4-17-1: Loop Protection Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

General Settings

Object Description
• Enable Loop Protection	Controls whether loop protections is enabled (as a whole).
• Transmission Time	The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port. Valid values are 1 to 10 seconds.
• Shutdown Time	The period (in seconds) for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected (and the port action shuts down the port). Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds (7 days). A value of zero will keep a port disabled (until next device restart).

Port Configuration

Object Description
• Port	The switch port number of the port.
• Enable	Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port.
• Action	Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port. Valid values are Shutdown Port, Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only.
• Tx Mode	Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU's, or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU's.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.17.2 Loop Protection Status

This page displays the loop protection port status of the switch; screen in Figure 4-17-2 appears.

Loop Protection Status Auto-refresh □ Refresh Port Action Transmit Loops Status Loop Time of Last Loop No ports enabled

Figure 4-16-2: Loop Protection Status Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	The Wall-mount Managed Switch port number of the logical port.
• Action	The currently configured port action.
• Transmit	The currently configured port transmit mode.
• Loops	The number of loops detected on this port.
• Status	The current loop protection status of the port.
• Loop	Whether a loop is currently detected on the port.
• Time of Last Loop	The time of the last loop event detected.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

4.18 RMON

RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP. RMON is a set of MIB definitions, used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces, enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors. RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets.

MID of RMON consists of 10 groups. The switch supports the most frequently used groups 1, 2, 3 and 9:

■ Statistics: Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent.
■ History: Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics.
- Alarm: Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for RMON Agent records.
■ Event: A list of all events generated by RMON Agent.

Alarm depends on the implementation of Event. Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics. Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network, and provide some alerts upon abnormal events (sending Trap or record in logs).

4.18.1 RMON Alarm Configuration

Configure RMON Alarm table on this page. The entry index key is ID.; screen in Figure 4-18-1 appears.

RMON Alarm Configuration Delete ID Interval Variable Sample Value Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-18-1: RMON Alarm Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object	Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID	Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Interval	Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold. The range is from 1 to 2^31-1 .
Variable	Indicates the particular variable to be sampled; the possible variables are:InOctets:The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.InUcastPkts:The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.■ InNUcastPkts: The number of broadcast and multi-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.■ InDiscards: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal.■ InErrors: The number of inbound packets that contain errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.■ InUnknownProtos: the number of the inbound packets that are discarded because of the unknown or un-support protocol.■ OutOctets: The number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.■ OutUcastPkts: The number of uni-cast packets that request to transmit.■ OutNUcastPkts: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets that request to transmit.■ OutDiscards: The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the packets is normal.■ OutErrors: The The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.■ OutQLen: The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
• Sample Type	The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds; the possible sample types are:■ Absolute: Get the sample directly.■ Delta: Calculate the difference between samples (default).
• Value	The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
• Startup Alarm	The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds; the possible sample types are:■ RisingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold.■ FallingTrigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold.■ RisingOrFallingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling threshold (default).
• Rising Threshold	Rising threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647).
• Rising Index	Rising event index (1-65535).
• Falling Threshold	Falling threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647)
• Falling Index	Falling event index (1-65535).

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new community entry.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.18.2 RMON Alarm Status

This page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Alarm table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Alarm table. The first displayed one will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table; screen in Figure 4-18-2 appears.

RMON Alarm Overview Auto-refresh □ Refresh |<< >> Start from Control Index 0 with 20 entries per page. ID Interval Variable Sample Value Startup Alarm Rising Threshold Rising Index Falling Threshold Falling Index No more entries

Figure 4-18-2: RMON Alarm Overview Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• ID	Indicates the index of Alarm control entry.
• Interval	Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold.
• Variable	Indicates the particular variable to be sampled
• Sample Type	The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds.
• Value	The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
• Startup Alarm	The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid.
• Rising Threshold	Rising threshold value.
• Rising Index	Rising event index.
• Falling Threshold	Falling threshold value.
• Falling Index	Falling event index.

Buttons

Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

<<: Updates the table, starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.18.3 RMON Event Configuration

Configure RMON Event table on this page. The entry index key is ID; screen in Figure 4-18-3 appears.

RMON Event Configuration Delete ID Desc Type Community Event Last Time Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-18-3: RMON Event Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID	Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Desc	Indicates this event, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string.
Type	Indicates the notification of the event; the possible types are:■none:The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.■log:The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.■snmptrap:The number of broadcast and multi-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.■logandtrap:The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal.
Community	Specify the community when trap is sent, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is "public".
Event Last Time	Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an event.

Buttons

Add New Entry: Click to add a new community entry.

Apply: Click to apply changes

Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.18.4 RMON Event Status

This page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Event table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Event table. The first displayed one will be the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in the Event table table; screen in Figure 4-18-4 appears.

RMON Event Overview Auto-refresh Refresh << >> Start from Control Index 0 and Sample Index 0 with 20 entries per page. Event Index LogIndex LogTime LogDescription No more entries

Figure 4-18-4: RMON Event Overview Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Event Index	Indicates the index of the event entry.
• Log Index	Indicates the index of the log entry.
• LogTime	Indicates Event log time.
• LogDescription	Indicates the Event description.

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest ID.

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.18.5 RMON History Configuration

Configure RMON History table on this page. The entry index key is ID; screen in Figure 4-18-5 appears.

RMON History Configuration Delete ID Data Source Interval Buckets Buckets Granted Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-18-5: RMON History Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID	Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Data Source	Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored. If in stacking switch, the value must add 1000*(switch ID-1), for example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is 2005.
Interval	Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data.The range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 1800 seconds.
Buckets	Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON.The range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 50.
Buckets Granted	The number of data shall be saved in the RMON.

Buttons

Add New Entry

Click to add a new community entry.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.18.6 RMON History Status

This page provides a detail of RMON history entries; screen in Figure 4-18-6 appears.

RMON History Overview Auto-refresh □ Refresh |<< >> Start from Control Index 0 and Sample Index 0 with 20 entries per page. History Index Sample Index Sample Start Drop Octets Pkts Broadcast Multi-cast CRC Errors Under-size Over-size Frag. Jabb. Coll. Utilization No more entries

Figure 4-18-6: RMON History Overview Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
History Index	Indicates the index of History control entry.
Sample Index	Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry.
Sample Start	The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.
Drop	The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.
Octets	The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network.
Pkts	The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.
Broadcast	The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.
Multicast	The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
CRC Errors	The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize	The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.
Oversize	The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.
Frag.	The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Jabb.	The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Coll.	The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
• Utilization	The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval is in the hundredths of a percent.

Buttons

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table, starting from the first entry in the History table, i.e., the entry with the lowest History Index and Sample Index

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.18.7 RMON Statistics Configuration

Configure RMON Statistics table on this page. The entry index key is ID; screen in Figure 4-18-7 appears.

RMON Statistics Configuration Delete ID Data Source Add New Entry Apply Reset

Figure 4-18-7: RMON Statistics Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID	Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Data Source	Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored. If in stacking switch, the value must add 1000*(switch ID-1), for example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is 2005

Buttons

Entry: Click to add a new community entry.

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.18.8 RMON Statistics Status

This page provides an overview of RMON Statistics entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Statistics table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Statistics table. The first displayed one will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Statistics table; screen in Figure 4-18-8 appears.

RMON Statistics Status Overview Auto-refresh □ Refresh |<< >> Start from Control Index 0 with 20 entries per page. ID Data Source (ifIndex) Drop Octets Pkts Broad-cast Multi-cast CRC Errors Under-size Over-size Frag. Jabb. Coll. 64 Bytes 65 ~ 127 128 ~ 255 256 ~ 511 512 ~ 1023 1024 ~ 1588 No more entries

Figure 4-18-8: RMON Statistics Status Overview Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• ID	Indicates the index of Statistics entry.
• Data Source (ifIndex)	The port ID which wants to be monitored.
• Drop	The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.
• Octets	The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network.
• Pkts	The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.
• Broadcast	The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.
• Multicast	The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
• CRC Errors	The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets.
• Undersize	The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.
• Oversize	The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.
• Frag.	The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
• Jabb.	The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
• Coll.	The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
• 64 Bytes	The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length.
• 65~127	The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length.
• 128~255	The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length.
• 256~511	The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length.
• 512~1023	The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length.
• 1024~1518	The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 to 1518 octets in length.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Updates the table, starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.19 PTP

The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is a protocol used to synchronize clocks throughout a computer network. On a local area network, it achieves clock accuracy in the sub-microsecond range, making it suitable for measurement and control systems. PTP was originally defined in the IEEE 1588-2002 standard, officially entitled "Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems" and published in 2002. In 2008 a revised standard, IEEE 588-2008 was released. This new version, also known as PTP Version 2, improves accuracy, precision and robustness but is not backwards compatible with the original 2002 version.

"IEEE 1588 is designed to fill a niche not well served by either of the two dominant protocols, NTP and GPS. IEEE 1588 is designed for local systems requiring accuracies beyond those attainable using NTP. It is also designed for applications that cannot bear the cost of a GPS receiver at each node, or for which GPS signals are inaccessible."

4.19.1 PTP Configuration

This page allows the user to configure and inspect the current PTP clock settings. Screen in Figure 4-19-1 appears.

PTP Clock Configuration Port List Delete Clock Instance Device Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 No Clock Instances Present Delete Clock Instance Device Type 2 Step Flag Clock Identity One Way Protocol VLAN Tag Enable VID PCP Delete 0 E2eTransp True 00:01:c1.ff.fe:00:00:00 False Ethernet 1 0 Add New PTP Clock Apply Reset

Figure 4-19-1: PTP Configuration Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	Check this box and click on 'Save' to delete the clock instance.
Clock Instance	Indicates the Instance of a particular Clock Instance [0..3].Click on the Clock Instance number to edit the Clock details
Device Type	Indicates the Type of the Clock Instance. There are five Device Types.■ Ord-Bound - clock's Device Type is Ordinary-Boundary Clock.■ P2p Transp - clock's Device Type is Peer to Peer Transparent Clock.■ E2e Transp - clock's Device Type is End to End Transparent Clock.■ Master Only - clock's Device Type is Master Only.■ Slave Only - clock's Device Type is Slave Only
• 2 Step Flag	Static member: defined by the system, true if two-step Sync events and Pdelay_Resp events are used.
• Clock Identity	It shows unique clock identifier.
• One Way	If true, one-way measurements are used. This parameter applies only to a slave.In one-way mode no delay measurements are performed, i.e. this is applicable only if frequency synchronization is needed. The master always responds to delay requests.
• Protocol	Transport protocol used by the PTP protocol engineethernet PTP over Ethernet multicastip4multi PTP over IPv4 multicastip4uni PTP over IPv4 unicastNote : IPv4 unicast protocol only works in Master only and Slave only clocksSee parameter Device TypeIn a unicast Slave only clock you also need configure which master clocksto request Announce and Sync messages from. See: Unicast Slave configuration
■ VLAN TagEnable	Enables the VLAN tagging for the PTP frames.Note: Packets are only tagged if the port is configured for vlan tagging.i.e:Port Type != Unaware and PortVLAN mode == None, and the port is member of the VLAN.
• VID	VLAN Identifier used for tagging the PTP frames.
• PCP	Priority Code Point value used for PTP frames.

Buttons

Add New PTP Clock

: Click to create a new clock instance.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Local Clock Current Time

Object Description
• PTP Time	Shows the actual PTP time with nanosecond resolution.
• Clock Adjustment Method	Shows the actual clock adjustment method. The method depends on the available hardware.
Synchronize to System Clock	Activate this button to synchronize the System Clock to PTP Time.
Ports Configuration	Click to edit the port data set for the ports assigned to this clock instance.

Clock Default Data Set

Object Description
• Clock ID	An internal instance id (0..3)
• Device Type	Indicates the Type of the Clock Instance. There are five Device Types.■ Ord-Bound - clock's Device Type is Ordinary-Boundary Clock.■ P2p Transp - clock's Device Type is Peer to Peer Transparent Clock.■ E2e Transp - clock's Device Type is End to End Transparent Clock.■ Master Only - clock's Device Type is Master Only.Slave Only - clock's Device Type is Slave Only
• 2 Step Flag	Static member: defined by the system, true if two-step Sync events and Pdelay_Resp events are used
• Ports	The total number of physical ports in the node
• Clock Identity	It shows unique clock identifier
• Dom	Clock domain [0..127].
• Clock Quality	The clock quality is determined by the system, and holds 3 parts: Clock Class, Clock Accuracy and OffsetScaledLog Variance as defined in IEEE1588.The Clock Accuracy values are defined in IEEE1588 table 6 (Currently the clock Accuracy is set to 'Unknown' as default).
• Pri1	Clock priority 1 [0..255] used by the BMC master select algorithm.
• Pri2	Clock priority 2 [0..255] used by the BMC master select algorithm.
• Protocol	Transport protocol used by the PTP protocol engineethernet PTP over Ethernet multicastip4multi PTP over IPv4 multicastip4uni PTP over IPv4 unicast
• One-Way	If true, one way measurements are used. This parameter applies only to a slave.In one-way mode no delay measurements are performed, i.e. this is applicable only if frequency synchronization is needed. The master always responds to delay requests.
• VLAN Tag Enable	Enables the VLAN tagging for the PTP frames.
• VID	VLAN Identifier used for tagging the VLAN packets.
• PCP	Priority Code Point value used for PTP frames.

Clock Current Data Set

Object Description
• stpRm	Steps Removed: It is the number of PTP clocks traversed from the grandmaster to the local slave clock.
• Offset from master	Time difference between the master clock and the local slave clock, measured in ns.
• Mean Path Delay	The mean propagation time for the link between the master and the local slave

Clock Parent Data Set

Object Description
• Parent Port Identity	Clock identity for the parent clock, if the local clock is not a slave, the value is the clocks own id.
• Port	Port Id for the parent master port
• P Stat	Parents Stats (always false).
• Var	It is observed parent offset scaled log variance
• Change Rate	Observed Parent Clock Phase Change Rate. i.e. the slave clocks rate offset compared to the master. (unit = ns per s).
• Grand Master Identity	Clock identity for the grand master clock, if the local clock is not a slave, the value is the clocks own id.
• Grand Master Clock Quality	The clock quality announced by the grand master (See description of Clock Default DataSet:Clock Quality)
• Pri1	Clock priority 1 announced by the grand master
• Pri2	Clock priority 2 announced by the grand master

Servo Parameters

Object Description
• Display	If true then Offset From Master, MeanPathDelay and clockAdjustment are logged on the debug terminal
• P-enable	If true the P part of the algorithm is included
• I-enable	If true the I part of the algorithm is included
• D-enable	If true the D part of the algorithm is included
‘P’ constant	[1..1000] see above
‘I’ constant	[1..1000] see above
‘D’ constant	[1..1000] see above

Unicast Slave Configuration

Object Description
• Duration	The number of seconds a master is requested to send Announce/Sync messages. The request is repeated from the slave each Duration/4 seconds.
• Ip-address	IPv4 Address of the Master clock
• grant	The granted repetition period for the sync message
• Comm State	The state of the communication with the master, possible values are:IDLE: The entry is not in use.INIT: Announce is sent to the master (Waiting for a response).CONN: The master has responded.SELL: The assigned master is selected as current master.SYNC: The master is sending Sync messages.

Buttons

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.19.2 PTP Status

This page provides a status overview for PTP status. The PTP Status screen in Figure 4-19-2 appears.

PTP Clock Configuration

		Port List
Clock Instance	Device Type	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10	11	12	13	14	15	16	17	18	19	20
Q E2eTransp

Figure 4-19-2: PTP Status Page Screenshot

4.20 Ring

ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet Ring protection switching (ERPS) is a link layer protocol applied on Ethernet loop protection to provide sub-50ms protection and recovery switching for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology.

ERPS provides a faster redundant recovery than Spanning Tree topology. The action is similar to STP or RSTP, but the algorithms between them are not the same. In the Ring topology, every switch should be enabled with Ring function and two ports should be assigned as the member ports in the ERPS. Only one switch in the Ring group would be set as the RPL owner switch that one port would be blocked, called owner port, and PRL neighbour switch has one port that one port would be blocked, called neighbour port that connect to owner port directly and this link is called the Ring Protection Link or RPL. Each switch will sends ETH-CCM message to check the link status in the ring group. When the failure of network connection occurs, the nodes block the failed link and report the signal failure message, the RPL owner switch will automatically unblocks the PRL to recover from the failure.

graph TD
    subgraph_Normal_LinkStatus["Normal Link Status"]
        A["Ethernet Node1"] -->|ETH-CCM| B["Ethernet Node4"]
        C["Ethernet Node2"] -->|RPL Neighbour| D["Ethernet Node3"]
        E["RPL Owner"] --> A
        E --> C
        F["RPL Neighbour"] --> C
    end

    subgraph_Fault_LinkStatus["Fault Link Status"]
        G["Ethernet Node1"] -->|RPL Owner| H["Ethernet Node4"]
        I["Ethernet Node2"] -->|RPL Neighbour| J["Ethernet Node3"]
        K["Ethernet Node3"] -->|RPL Neighbour| L["Ethernet Node4"]
        M["RPL Owner"] --> N["Link Failure"]
        O["SF"] --> P["Switch"]
        Q["SF"] --> R["Switch"]
        S["SF"] --> T["Switch"]
        U["SF"] --> V["Switch"]
        W["SF"] --> X["Switch"]
        Y["SF"] --> Z["Switch"]
        AA["SF"] --> AB["Switch"]
        AC["SF"] --> AD["Switch"]
        AE["SF"] --> AF["Switch"]
        AG["SF"] --> AH["Switch"]
        AI["SF"] --> AJ["Switch"]
        AK["SF"] --> AL["Switch"]
        AM["SF"] --> AN["Switch"]
        AO["SF"] --> AP["Switch"]
        AQ["SF"] --> AR["Switch"]
        AS["SF"] --> AT["Switch"]
        AU["SF"] --> AV["Switch"]
        AW["SF"] --> AX["Switch"]
        AY["Ring Protection Link"] --> Z
        AZ["Signal failure (SF)"] --> AA
        BA["Data Path"] --> AC
    end

4.20.1 MEP Configuration

The Maintenance Entity Point instances are configured here; screen in Figure 4-20-1 appears.

Maintenance Entity Point Note: 1.Please make sure the DHCP client function has been disabled. 2.Please be noticed that the ring port can not be applied to spanning tree function at the same time. Refresh Delete Instance Domain Mode Direction Residence Port Level Flow Instance Tagged VID This MAC Alarm Add New MEP Save Reset

Figure 4-20-1: MEP configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	This box is used to mark a MEP for deletion in next Save operation.
Instance	The ID of the MEP. Click on the ID of a MEP to enter the configuration page.
Domain	Port: This is a MEP in the Port Domain. 'Flow Instance' is a Port.Esp: Future useEvc: This is a MEP in the EVC Domain. 'Flow Instance' is a EVCMpls: Future use
Mode	MEP: This is a Maintenance Entity End Point.MIP: This is a Maintenance Entity Intermediate Point.
Direction	Ingress: This is a Ingress (down) MEP - monitoring ingress traffic on 'Residence Port'.Egress: This is a Egress (up) MEP - monitoring egress traffic on 'Residence Port'.
Residence Port	The port where MEP is monitoring - see 'Direction'.
Level	The MEG level of this MEP.
Flow Instance	The MEP is related to this flow - See 'Domain'.
Tagged VID	Port MEP: An outer C/S-tag (depending on VLAN Port Type) is added with this VID.Entering '0' means no TAG added.
This MAC	The MAC of this MEP - can be used by other MEP when unicast is selected (Info only).
Alarm	There is an active alarm on the MEP.

Buttons

Add New MEP

Click to add a new MEP entry

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Save

Click to save changes.

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.20.2 Detailed MEP Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current MEP Instance.; screen in Figure 4-20-2 appears.

MEP Configuration

Refresh

Instance Data

Instance	Domain	Mode	Direction	Residence Port	Flow Instance	Tagged VID	EPS Instance	This MAC
1	Port	Mep	Down	1	1	0	0	00-01-C1-00-00-01

Instance Configuration

Level

Format

Domain Name

MEC ID

MEP ID

Tagged VID

cLevel

cMEG

cMEP

cAIS

cLCK

cSSF

aBLK

aTSF

0

ITU ICC

ICC000MEG0000

1

0

Peer MEP Configuration

Delete	Peer MEP ID	Unicast Peer MAC		cLOC	cRDI	cPeriod	cPriority
No Peer MEP Added

Add New Peer MEP

Functional Configuration

Continuity Check				APS Protocol
Enable	Priority	Frame rate		Enable	Priority	Cast	Type	Last Octet
□	0	1 f/sec		□	0	Multi▼	R-APS▼	1

Apply Reset

Figure 4-20-2: Detail MEP configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Instance Data:

Object Description
Instance	The ID of the MEP.
Domain	See help on MEP create WEB.
Mode	See help on MEP create WEB.
Direction	See help on MEP create WEB.
Residence Port	See help on MEP create WEB.
Flow Instance	See help on MEP create WEB.
Tagged VID	See help on MEP create WEB.
This MAC	See help on MEP create WEB.

Instance Configuration:

Object Description
• Level	See help on MEP create WEB.
• Format	This is the configuration of the two possible Maintenance Association Identifier formats.ITU ICC: This is defined by ITU. 'ICC' can be max. 6 char. 'MEG id' can be max. 7 char.IEEE String: This is defined by IEEE. 'Domain Name' can be max. 8 char. 'MEG id' can be max. 8 char.
• Domain Name	This is either ITU ICC (MEG ID value[1-6]) or IEEE Maintenance Domain Name - depending on 'Format'. See 'Format'.
• MEG Id	This is either ITU UMC (MEG ID value[7-13]) or IEEE Short MA Name - depending on 'Format'. See 'Format'. In case of ITU ICC format this can be max. 7 char. If only 6 char. is entered the MEG ID value[13] will become NULL.
• MEP Id	This value will become the transmitted two byte CCM MEP ID.
• cLevel	Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a lower level than the configured for this MEP.
• cMEG	Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a MEG ID different from configured for this MEP.
• cMEP	Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a MEP ID different from all 'Peer MEP ID' configured for this MEP.
• cAIS	Fault Cause indicating that AIS PDU is received.
• cLCK	Fault Cause indicating that LCK PDU is received.
• cSSF	Fault Cause indicating that server layer is indicating Signal Fail.
• aBLK	The consequent action of blocking service frames in this flow is active.
• aTSF	The consequent action of indicating Trail Signal Fail to-wards protection is active.
• Delete	This box is used to mark a Peer MEP for deletion in next Save operation.
• Peer MEP ID	This value will become an expected MEP ID in a received CCM - see 'cMEP'.
• Unicast Peer MAC	This MAC will be used when unicast is selected with this peer MEP. Also this MAC is used to create HW checking of receiving CCM PDU (LOC detection) from this MEP.
• cLOC	Fault Cause indicating that no CCM has been received (in 3,5 periods) - from thispeer MEP.
• cRDI	Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with Remote Defect Indication - from this peer MEP.
• cPeriod	Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a period different what is configured for this MEP - from this peer MEP.
• cPriority	Fault Cause indicating that a CCM is received with a priority different what is configured for this MEP - from this peer MEP.

Buttons

Add New Peer MEP

Click to add a new peer MEP.

Functional Configuration

Continuity Check:

Object Description
Enable	Continuity Check based on transmitting/receiving CCM PDU can be enabled/disabled. The CCM PDU is always transmitted as Multi-cast Class 1.
Priority	The priority to be inserted as PCP bits in TAG (if any). In case of enable of Continuity Check and Loss Measurement both implemented on SW based CCM, 'Priority' has to be the same.
Frame rate	Selecting the frame rate of CCM PDU. This is the inverse of transmission period as described in Y.1731. This value has the following uses:* The transmission rate of the CCM PDU.* Fault Cause cLOC is declared if no CCM PDU has been received within 3.5 periods - see 'cLOC'.* Fault Cause cPeriod is declared if a CCM PDU has been received with different period - see 'cPeriod'.Selecting 300f/sec or 100f/sec will configure HW based CCM (if possible). Selecting other frame rates will configure SW based CCM. In case of enable of Continuity Check and Loss Measurement both implemented on SW based CCM, 'Frame Rate' has to be the same.

APS Protocol:

Object Description
• Enable	Automatic Protection Switching protocol information transportation based ontransmitting/receiving R-APS/L-APS PDU can be enabled/disabled. Must be enabled to support ERPS/ELPS implementing APS. This is only valid with one Peer MEP configured.
• Priority	The priority to be inserted as PCP bits in TAG (if any).
• Cast	Selection of APS PDU transmitted unicast or multi-cast. The unicast MAC will be taken from the 'Unicast Peer MAC' configuration. Unicast is only valid for L-APS - see 'Type'. The R-APS PDU is always transmitted with multi-cast MAC described in G.8032.
• Type	R-APS: APS PDU is transmitted as R-APS - this is for ERPS.L-APS: APS PDU is transmitted as L-APS - this is for ELPS.
• Last Octet	This is the last octet of the transmitted and expected RAPS multi-cast MAC. In G.8031 (03/2010) a RAPS multi-cast MAC is defined as 01-19-A7-00-00-XX. In current standard the value for this last octet is '01' and the usage of other values is for further study.

Buttons

Fault Management

Click to go to Fault Management page.

Performance Monitoring

Click to go to Performance Monitor page.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Save

Click to save changes.

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.20.3 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch

The Ethernet Ring Protection Switch instances are configured here; screen in Figure 4-20-3 appears.

Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Note: 1.Please make sure the DHCP client function has been disabled. 2.Please be noticed that the ring port can not be applied to spanning tree function at the same time. Refresh Delete ERPS ID Port 0 Port 1 Port 0 APS MEP Port 1 APS MEP Port 0 SF MEP Port 1 SF MEP Ring Type Major Ring ID Alarm Add New Protection Group Save Reset

Figure 4-20-3: Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Delete	This box is used to mark an ERPS for deletion in next Save operation.
Port 0	This will create a Port 0 of the switch in the ring.
Port 1	This will create "Port 1" of the switch in the Ring. As interconnected sub-ring will have only one ring port, "Port 1" is configured as "0" for interconnected sub-ring. "0" in this field indicates that no "Port 1" is associated with this instance
Port 0 SF MEP	The Port 0 Signal Fail reporting MEP.
Port 1 SF MEP	The Port 1 Signal Fail reporting MEP. As only one SF MEP is associated with interconnected sub-ring without virtual channel, it is configured as "0" for such ring instances. "0" in this field indicates that no Port 1 SF MEP is associated with this instance.
Port 0 APS MEP	The Port 0 APS PDU handling MEP.
Port 1 APS MEP	The Port 1 APS PDU handling MEP. As only one APS MEP is associated with interconnected sub-ring without virtual channel, it is configured as "0" for such ring instances. "0" in this field indicates that no Port 1 APS MEP is associated with this instance.
Ring Type	Type of Protecting ring. It can be either major ring or sub-ring.
Major Ring ID	Major ring group ID for the interconnected sub-ring. It is used to send topology change updates on major ring. If ring is major, this value is same as the protection group ID of this ring.
Alarm	There is an active alarm on the ERPS.

Buttons

Add New Protection Group

Click to add a new Protection group entry.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Save

Click to save changes.

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.20.4 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current ERPS Instance; screen in Figure 4-20-4 appears.

ERPS Configuration 1 Auto-refresh □ Refresh Instance Data ERPS ID Port 0 Port 1 Port 0 SF MEP Port 1 SF MEP Port 0 APS MEP Port 1 APS MEP Ring Type 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 Major Ring Instance Configuration Configured Guard Time WTR Time Hold Off Time_VERSION_Revertive VLAN config 500 1min 0 ✓2 ✓ VLAN Config RPL Configuration RPL Role RPL Port Clear None None □ Instance Command Command Port None None Instance State Protection Port Port Transmit Port U Receive Port 1 Receive WTR RPL No APS Port U Block Port 1 Block FOP State Port 0 Port 1 APS APS APS Remaining Un-blocked Received Status Status Alarm Protected SF SF SF DNF BPRO 0 Blocked Blocked Save Reset

Figure 4-20-4: Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Instance Data:

Object Description
• ERPS ID	The ID of the Protection group.
• Port 0	See help on ERPS create WEB.
• Port 1	See help on ERPS create WEB.
• Port 0 SF MEP	See help on ERPS create WEB.
• Port 1 SF MEP	See help on ERPS create WEB.
• Port 0 APS MEP	See help on ERPS create WEB.
• Port 1 APS MEP	See help on ERPS create WEB.
• Ring Type	Type of Protecting ring. It can be either major ring or sub-ring.

Instance Configuration:

Object Description
Configuration	Red: This ERPS is only created and has not yet been configured - is not active.Green: This ERPS is configured - is active.
• Guard Time	Guard timeout value to be used to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R-APS messages.The period of the guard timer can be configured in 10 ms steps between 10 ms and 2 seconds, with a default value of 500 ms
• WTR Time	The Wait To Restore timing value to be used in revertive switching.The period of the WTR time can be configured by the operator in 1 minute steps between 5 and 12 minutes with a default value of 5 minutes.
• Hold Off Time	The timing value to be used to make persistent check on Signal Fail before switching.The range of the hold off timer is 0 to 10 seconds in steps of 100 ms
• Version	ERPS Protocol Version - v1 or v2
• Revertive	In Revertive mode, after the conditions causing a protection switch has cleared, the traffic channel is restored to the working transport entity, i.e., blocked on the RPL.In Non-Revertive mode, the traffic channel continues to use the RPL, if it is not failed, after a protection switch condition has cleared.
• VLAN Config	VLAN configuration of the Protection Group. Click on the "VLAN Config" link to confure VLANs for this protection group.

PRL Configuration:

Object Description
PRL Role	It can be either RPL owner or RPL Neighbour.
PRL Port	This allows to select the east port or west port as the RPL block.
Clear	If the owner has to be changed, then the clear check box allows to clear the RPL owner for that ERPS ring.

Instance Command:

Object Description
• Command	Administrative command. A port can be administratively configured to be in either manual switch or forced switch state.
• Port	Port selection - Port0 or Port1 of the protection Group on which the command is applied.

Instance State:

Object Description
• Protection State	ERPS state according to State Transition Tables in G.8032.
• Port 0	OK: State of East port is okSF: State of East port is Signal Fail
• Port 1	OK: State of West port is okSF: State of West port is Signal Fail
• Transmit APS	The transmitted APS according to State Transition Tables in G.8032.
• Port 0 Receive APS	The received APS on Port 0 according to State Transition Tables in G.8032.
• Port 1 Receive APS	The received APS on Port 1 according to State Transition Tables in G.8032.
• WTR Remaining	Remaining WTR timeout in milliseconds.
• RPL Un-blocked	APS is received on the working flow.
• No APS Received	RAPS PDU is not received from the other end.
• Port 0 Block Status	Block status for Port 0 (Both traffic and R-APS block status). R-APS channel is never blocked on sub-rings without virtual channel.
• Port 1 Block Status	Block status for Port 1 (Both traffic and R-APS block status). R-APS channel is never blocked on sub-rings without virtual channel.
• FOP Alarm	Failure of Protocol Defect(FOP) status. If FOP is detected, red LED glows; else green LED glows.

Buttons

Save

Click to save changes.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 6 seconds.

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.20.5 Ring Wizard

This page allows the user to configure the ERPS by wizard; screen in Figure 4-20-4 appears.

Ring Wizard Note: 1. Please make sure the DHCP client function has been disabled. 2. Please be noticed that the ring port can not be applied to spanning tree function at the same time. ALL Switch Number ( 3 ~ 30): 3 Number ID: 1 Next Configuration Switch-3 Mep:6 Port 1 (Owner) Switch-1 Port 2 (Neighbour) Mep:1 Mep:2 Mep:3 Switch-2 Vlan 3001 Set Show Topology

Figure 4-20-5: Ring Wizard page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• All Switch Numbers	Set all the switch numbers for the ring group. The default number is 3 and maximum number is 30.
• Number ID	The switch where you are requesting ERPS.
• Port	Configures the port number for the MEP.
• VLAN	Set the ERPS VLAN.

Buttons

Click to configure ERPS.

Click to save changes.

Click to show the ring topology.

4.20.6 Ring Wizard Example:

graph TD
    Switch1["Switch 1"] -->|RPL: None\nPort 1\nMEP:1\nVLAN:3001| Switch3["Switch 3"]
    Switch1 -->|RPL: Owner\nPort 2\nMEP:2\nVLAN:3001| Switch2["Switch 2"]
    Switch3 -->|RPL: None\nPort 1\nMEP:6\nVLAN:3001| Switch2
    Switch3 -->|RPL: None\nPort 2\nMEP:5\nVLAN:3001| Switch2
    Switch2 -->|RPL: None\nPort 1\nMEP:4\nVLAN:3001| Switch3
    Switch2 -->|RPL: Neighbour\nPort 2\nMEP:3\nVLAN:3001| Switch2
    Switch1 -.->|×| Switch2
    Switch2 -.->|×| Switch3

Figure 4-20-6: Ring Example Diagram

The above topology often occurs on using ERPS protocol. The multi switch constitutes a single ERPS ring; all of the switches only are configured as an ERPS in VLAN 3001, thereby constituting a single MRPP ring.

Switch ID	Port	MEP ID	RPL Type	VLAN Group
Switch 1	Port 1 1	None 300	1
	Port 2	2	Owner	3001
Switch 2	Port 1 4	None 300	1
	Port 2	3	Neighbour	3001
Switch 3	Port 1 6	None 300	1
	Port 2 5	None 300	1

Table 4-2: ERPS Configuration Table

The scenario is described as follows:

1. Disable DHCP client and set proper static IP for Switch 1, 2 & 3. In this example, switch 1 is 192.168.0.101; switch 2 is 192.168.0.102 and switch 3 is 192.168.0.103.
2. On switch 1, 2 & 3, disable spanning tree protocol to avoid confliction with ERPS.

Setup steps

Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 1

Connect PC to switch 1 directly; don't connect to port 1 & 2

Logging on to the Switch 1 and click "Ring > Ring Wizard"

Set "All Switch Number" = 3 and "Number ID" = 1; click "Next" button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 1.

ALL Switch Number (3 \~ 30): 3

Number ID:

Next

Set "MEP1" = Port1, "MEP2" = Port2 and VLAN ID = 3001; click "Set" button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 1.

graph LR
    A["Switch-3"] -->|Mep:6| B["(Owner) Switch-1"]
    B -->|Port 1| C["(Owner) Switch-1"]
    B -->|Mep:2| D["(Neighbour) Switch-2"]
    B -->|Mep:3| E["(Neighbour) Switch-2"]
    B -->|Vlan 3001| F["Vlan 3001"]

Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 2

Connect PC to switch 2 directly; don't connect to port 1 & 2

Logging on to the Switch 2 and click "Ring > Ring Wizard"

Set "All Switch Number" = 3 and "Number ID" = 2; click "Next" button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 2.

ALL Switch Number (3 \~ 30):

Number ID:

Next

Set "MEP3" = Port2, "MEP4" = Port1 and VLAN ID = 3001; click "Set" button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 2.

graph LR
    A["(Owner) Switch-1"] -->|Mep:2| B["(Neighbour) Switch-2"]
    B -->|Mep:4| C["(Switch-3)"]
    B -->|Mep:3| D["Vlan 3001"]
    B -->|Port 2| E["Port 1"]
    B -->|Mep:5| F["Port 5"]

Set ERPS Configuration on Switch 3

Connect PC to switch 3 directly; don't connect to port 1 & 2

Logging on to the Switch 3 and click "Ring > Ring Wizard"

Set "All Switch Number" = 3 and "Number ID" = 3; click "Next" button to set the ERPS configuration for Switch 3.

ALL Switch Number (3 \~ 30):

Number ID:

Next

Set "MEP5" = Port2, "MEP6" = Port1 and VLAN ID = 3001; click "Set" button to save the ERPS configuration for Switch 3.

graph LR
    A["(Neighbour) Switch-2"] -->|Mep:4| B["Port 2"]
    B -->|Mep:5| C["Switch-3"]
    C -->|Vlan 3001| D["Port 1"]
    D -->|Mep:6| E["Switch-1"]
    E -->|Mep:1| F["(Owner) Switch-1"]

To avoid loop, please don't connect Switches 1, 2 and 3 together in the ring topology before configuring the end of ERPS.

Follow the configuration or ERPS wizard to connect Switches 1, 2 and 3 together to establish ERPS application:

MEP2 MEP3 = Switch1 / Port2 Switch2 / Port2

MEP4 MEP5 = Switch2 / Port1 Switch3 / Port2

MEP1 MEP6 = Switch1 / Port1 Switch3 / Port1

4.21 LCD

4.21.1 LCD Management

This page offers many options for you to manage LCD control panel.

LCD Management LCD Enable ▼ Touch Screen Enable ▼ Backlight Timeout Enable ▼ Backlight Timeout Time 10 Sec Read Only Mode Disable ▼ Default Screen Main Menu ▼ Time Interval 10 Sec Color Scheme Dark Light Pin Number 1234 Apply Reset

Figure 4-21-1: LCD Management Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
LCD	Enable: allows user to enable LCD panel. Disable: allows user to disable LCD panel.
Touch Screen	Enable: allows user to enable touch screen feature. Disable: allows user to disable touch screen feature.
Backlight Timeout	Enable: allows user to enable panel backlight timeout time feature. Disable: allows user to disable panel backlight timeout time feature.
Backlight Timeout Time	All user to setup backlight timeout duration. Default setting is 300 seconds.
Read Only Mode	Enable: allows user to enable "read only" mode feature to protect someone change or read information from LCD panel. Disable: allows user to disable "read only" mode feature.
Default Screen	Allows user to choose what screen will be display on the LCD when system has booted done. Please note that user needs to save configuration and new screen will be display in next time system rebooting.
Time Interval	Allows user to input time interval for page refresh. Please note that shorter time interval will cause high CPU load so we suggest using default setting 10 seconds.
Color Scheme	Allows user to replace LCD background color. Uses this feature user has to save configuration and reboot system.
Pin Number	It is password. For security reason, when user changes configuration from LCD, user has to input password then configuration will be saved and executed.

Buttons

Click to apply changes

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.22 ONVIF

ONVIF (Open Network Video Interface Forum) is a global and open industry forum with the goal of facilitating the development and use of a global open standard for the interface of physical IP-based security products – or, in other words, to create a standard for how IP products within video surveillance and other physical security areas can communicate with each other. The ONVIF specification aims to achieve interoperability between network video products regardless of manufacturer.

4.22.1 ONVIF Device Search

Entries in the ONVIF Devices Table are shown on this page. The ONVIF Devices Table can be sorted first by VLAN ID, Model, MAC Address and then by IP Address. The ONVIF Devices Table screen in Figure 4-22-1 appears.

ONVIF Device Search
Query by:

VLAN Model MAC Address IP Address Refresh

Please click "Search" to query or update the current list

Port Device Type Device Name Manufacturer Model IP address MAC address VLAN Select Device 16 IP camera ICA-3250 PLANET ICA-3250 192.168.0.127 00-30-4F-BB-9A-4E 1 Auto Search Search Apply Please Select the ONVIF Device and click "Apply" for adding into "ONVIF Device List"

Figure 4-22-1: ONVIF Devices Table Status Page Screenshot

Navigating the ONVIF Devices Table

The "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN", "Model", "MAC Address" and "IP Address" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the ONVIF Devices Table. Clicking the "Refresh" button will update the displayed table which matches the ONVIF Devices Table.
The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Port	This is the logical port number for this row.
• Device Type	The ONVIF Device's Type of the entry.
• Device Name	The ONVIF Device's Name of the entry.
• Manufacturer	The ONVIF Device's Manufacturer of the entry.
• Model	The ONVIF Device's Model Name of the entry.
• IP Address	The ONVIF Device's IP Address of the entry.
• MAC Address	The ONVIF Device's MAC address of the entry.
• VLAN	The ONVIF Device's VLAN ID of the entry.
• Select Device	Allows to tick for selecting ONVIF Devices for adding to ONVIF List Table.

Buttons

Search

Click to search the connecting ONVIF devices.

Apply

Click to apply changes

Reset

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-search

Automatic search occurs every 60 seconds.

4.22.2 ONVIF Device List

This page provides an overview of ONVIF Device entries. Each page shows up to 10 entries from the ONVIF Device List table, default being 10, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 10 entries from the beginning of the ONVIF Device List table; screen in Figure 4-22-2 appears.

ONVIF Device List Query by: Login(Optional) User name Password Please click "Refresh" to query or update the current list 10 entries per page. Port Status Device Type Device Name Manufacturer Model IP address MAC address Power Used[W] Action 16 IP camera ICA-3250 PLANET ICA-3250 192.168.0.127 00-30-4F-BB-9A-4E 5.4 Auto Refresh Refresh |<< << >> >>|

Figure 4-22-2: ONVIF Device List Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
Login(Optional)	Allows for filling one set of User name and Password.
Port	This is the logical port number for this row.
Status	Red: The ONVIF device is not active.Green: The ONVIF device is active. The ONVIF Device's Type of the entry.
Device Type	The ONVIF Device's Type of the entry.
Device Name	The ONVIF Device's Name of the entry.
Manufacturer	The ONVIF Device's Manufacturer of the entry.
Model	The ONVIF Device's Model Name of the entry.
IP Address	The ONVIF Device's IP Address of the entry.
MAC Address	The ONVIF Device's MAC address of the entry.
Power Used [W]	The Power Used shows how much power the ONVIF device currently is using.
Action	There are three actions:Access: Click for access to the ONVIF device's WEBUI.Reboot: Click for rebooting the ONVIF device.Delete: Click for deleting the ONVIF device from ONVIF Device List.

Buttons

Refresh

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh ☐: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 30 seconds.

kk

Updates the ONVIF device entries, press to the first page.

<<

Updates the ONVIF device entries, press to the front page.

Updates the ONVIF device entries, press to the next page.

|

Updates the ONVIF device entries, press to the final page.

4.22.3 Map Upload / Edit

This page allows the clients for uploading e-MAP; the file size cannot be over 151k; screen in Figure 4-22-3 appears.

Upload Map MAP Select MAP1 ▼ Description: asd File size: 28521Byte File: Choose File No file chosen Upload Preview Map Current Map

Figure 4-22-3: Map Upload / Edit Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• MAP Select	Allows to select Map1/2/3 for uploading Map.
• Description	Indicates the map's description.
• File size	Shows Map's size.
• File	Allows to choose and browse specific map file from laptop device.
• Preview Map	The Preview use of Map.
• Current Map	The Current use of Map.

Buttons

Choose File

Click to choose the file.

Upload

Click to upload the file.

4.22.4 Floor Map

This page allows the clients for planning the ONVIF devices with the uploaded e-Map. It can select the ONVIF devices from Device List and it also can modify the e-Map's Zoom and Scale; screen in Figure 4-22-4 appears.

Summary Information Number Online ONVIF Camera Offline ONVIF Camera Map Control Location MAP1 Zoom Scale Device List I S Description A Select/Deselect All

Figure 4-22-4: Floor Map Page Screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description
• Summary Information	Shows the number of Online and Offline ONVIF cameras.
• Map Control	Allows to choose Location of Map1/2/3 and zoom in/out of Map.
• Device List	Allows to select ONVIF devices.

5. SWITCH OPERATION

5.1 Address Table

The Wall-mount Managed Switch is implemented with an address table. This address table is composed of many entries. Each entry is used to store the address information of some nodes in network, including MAC address, port no., etc. This information comes from the learning process of Wall-mount Managed Switch.

5.2 Learning

When one packet comes in from any port, the Wall-mount Managed Switch will record the source address, port no. and the other related information in address table. This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets.

5.3 Forwarding & Filtering

When one packet comes from some port of the Wall-mount Managed Switch, it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning. The Wall-mount Managed Switch will look up the address table for the destination address. If not found, this packet will be forwarded to the other ports except the port, which this packet comes in. And these ports will transmit this packet to the network if connected. If found, and the destination address is located at a different port from this packet comes in, the Wall-mount Managed Switch will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table. But, if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in, then this packet will be filtered, thereby increasing the network throughput and availability.

5.4 Store-and-Forward

Store-and-Forward is one type of packet-forwarding techniques. The Store-and-Forward Wall-mount Managed Switch stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer and does the complete error checking before transmission. Therefore, no error packets will occur. It is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability.

The Wall-mount Managed Switch scans the destination address from the packet-header, searches the routing table provided for the incoming port and forwards the packet, only if required. The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network, thereby increasing throughput and availability. However, the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs, which nearly always improve the overall performance. An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to significantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters.

Due to the learning function of the Wall-mount Managed Switch, the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table. This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address. This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network.

The Wall-mount Managed Switch performs "Store and Fforward"; therefore, no error packets occur. More reliably, it reduces the re-transmission rate. No packet loss will occur.

5.5 Auto-Negotiation

The STP ports on the Switch have built-in "Auto-negotiation". This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device (usually at Power On or Reset). This is done by detecting the modes and speeds at the second of both devices that are connected and capable of. Both 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX devices can connect with the port in either Half- or Full-Duplex mode. 1000BASE-T can be only connected in Full-duplex mode.

6. TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter contains information to help you solve issues. If the Wall-mount Managed Switch is not functioning properly, make sure the Wall-mount Managed Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual.

■ The Link LED is not lit

Solution:

Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Wall-mount Managed Switch

■ Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port

Solution:

Please check the VLAN settings, trunk settings, or port enabled / disabled status.

■ Performance is bad

Solution:

Check the full duplex status of the Wall-mount Managed Switch. If the Wall-mount Managed Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex, then the performance will be poor. Please also check the in/out rate of the port.

■ Why the Switch doesn't connect to the network

Solution:

1. Check the LNK/ACT LED on the switch
2. Try another port on the Switch
3. Make sure the cable is installed properly
4. Make sure the cable is the right type
5. Turn off the power. After a while, turn on power again

■ 1000BASE-T port link LED is lit, but the traffic is irregular

Solution:

Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex. Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes. Auto-negotiation may not recognize this type of full-duplex setting.

■ Switch does not power up

Solution:

1. AC power cord not inserted or faulty
2. Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly
3. Replace the power cord if the cord is inserted correctly; check that the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch.
4. If that device works, refer to the next step.
5. If that device does not work, check the AC power

APPENDIX A: Networking Connection

A.1 Switch's Data RJ45 Pin Assignments - 1000Mbps, 1000BASE-T

PIN NO	MDI	MDI-X
1 BI_DA+	BI_DB+
2 BI_DA-	BI_DB-
3 BI_DB+	BI_DA+
4 BI_DC+	BI_DD+
5 BI_DC-	BI_DD-
6 BI_DB-	BI_DA-
7 BI_DD+	BI_DC+
8 BI_DD-	BI_DC-

Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted-pair cable, or at a wiring panel, while not expressly forbidden, is beyond the scope of this standard.

A.2 10/100Mbps, 10/100BASE-TX

When connecting your Switch to another Fast Ethernet switch, a bridge or a hub, a straight or crossover cable is necessary. Each port of the Switch supports auto-MDI/MDI-X detection. That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable. The following table and diagram show the standard RJ45 receptacle/ connector and their pin assignments:

RJ45 Connector pin assignment
PIN NO	MDIMedia Dependant Interface	MDI-XMedia Dependant Interface-Cross
1	Tx + (transmit) Rx + (receive)
2	Tx - (transmit)	Rx - (receive)
3	Rx + (receive)	Tx + (transmit)
4, 5	Not used
6	Rx - (receive)	Tx - (transmit)
7, 8	Not used

The standard cable, RJ45 pin assignment

6 3 2 1 2 3 6 6 3 2 1

The standard RJ45 receptacle/connector

There are 8 wires on a standard UTP/STP cable and each wire is color-coded. The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection:

Straight Cable		SIDE 1	SIDE 2
	SIDE 1	1 = White / Orange	1 = White / Orange
		2 = Orange	2 = Orange
		3 = White / Green	3 = White / Green
		4 = Blue	4 = Blue
		5 = White / Blue	5 = White / Blue
		6 = Green	6 = Green
		7 = White / Brown	7 = White / Brown
	SIDE 2	8 = Brown	8 = Brown
Crossover Cable		SIDE 1	SIDE 2
	SIDE 1	1 = White / Orange	1 = White / Green
		2 = Orange	2 = Green
		3 = White / Green	3 = White / Orange
		4 = Blue	4 = Blue
		5 = White / Blue	5 = White / Blue
		6 = Green	6 = Orange
		7 = White / Brown	7 = White / Brown
	SIDE 2	8 = Brown	8 = Brown

Figure A-1: Straight-through and Crossover Cable

Please make sure your connected cables are with the same pin assignment and color as the above picture before deploying the cables into your network.

APPENDIX B : GLOSSARY

A

ACE

ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry. It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID.

There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). The ACE also contains many detailed, different parameter options that are available for individual application.

ACL

ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects, such as a process or a program.

Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights.

ACL implementations can be quite complex, for example, when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation. In networking, the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server, each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic, and in this context, they are similar to firewalls.

There are 3 web-Pages associated with the manual ACL configuration:

ACL|Access Control List: The web Page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way, highest (top) to lowest (bottom). Default the table is empty. An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs. The first matching ACE will take action (permit/deny) on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented. An ACE can be associated with a Policy, 1 ingress port, or any ingress port (the whole switch). If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the "Ports" web-Page. There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE. Read the Web Page help text to get further information for each of them. The maximum number of ACEs is 64.

ACL|Ports: The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port. This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules. Traffic Policy is created under the "Access Control List" - Page. You can you also set up specific traffic properties (Action / Rate Limiter / Port copy, etc) for each ingress port. They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched. In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented. See the Web Page help text for each specific port property.

ACL|Rate Limiters: Under this Page you can configure the rate limiters. There can be 15 different rate limiters, each

ranging from 1-1024K packets per seconds. Under "Ports" and "Access Control List" web-Pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE(s) or ingress port(s).

AES

AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard. The encryption key protocol is applied in 802.1i standard to improve WLAN security. It is an encryption standard by the U.S. government, which will replace DES and 3DES. AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128, 192, or 256 bits.

AMS

AMS is an acronym for Auto Media Select. AMS is used for dual media ports (ports supporting both copper (cu) and fiber (SFP) cables. AMS automatically determines if a SFP or a CU cable is inserted and switches to the corresponding media. If both SFP and cu cables are inserted, the port will select the preferred media.

APS

APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching. This protocol is used to secure that switching is done bidirectional in the two ends of a protection group, as defined in G.8031.

Aggregation

Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability.

(Also Port Aggregation, Link Aggregation).

ARP

ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address, such as an Ethernet address. ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known. Before using IP, the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system.

ARP Inspection

ARP Inspection is a secure feature. Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This feature is used to block such attacks. Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device.

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link.

C

CC

CC is an acronym for Continuity Check. It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP.

CCM

CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message. It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to its peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality.

CDP

CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol.

D

DEI

DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator. It is a 1-bit field in the VLAN tag.

DES

DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard. It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting (enciphering) and decrypting (deciphering) binary coded information.

Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher. Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext. The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key.

DHCP

DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network.

DHCP used by networked computers (clients) to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway, subnet mask, and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server.

The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique, for example, no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client's assignment is valid (its lease has not expired). Therefore, IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator.

Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task. This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address.

DHCP Relay

DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.

The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies. Specifically the option works by setting two sub-options: Circuit ID (option 1) and Remote ID (option2). The Circuit ID sub-option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on. The Remote ID sub-option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit.

The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is "vlan_id" "module_id" "port_no". The parameter of "vlan_id" is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID. The parameter of "module_id" is the third byte for the module ID (in standalone switch it always equal 0, in stackable switch it means switch ID). The parameter of "port_no" is the fourth byte and it means the port number.

The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length, and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address.

DHCP Snooping

DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server.

DNS

DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System. It stores and associates many types of information with domain names. Most importantly, DNS translates human-friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer-friendly IP addresses. For example, the domain name www.example.com might translate to 192.168.0.1.

DoS

DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service. In a denial-of-service (DoS) attack, an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services. By targeting at network sites or network connection, an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email, web sites, online accounts (banking, etc.), or other services that rely on the affected computer.

Dotted Decimal Notation

Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets.

An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x.y.z.w, where x, y, z, and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255.

DSCP

DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point. It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes.

E

EEE

EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802.3az.

EPS

EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU/T G.8031.

Ethernet Type

Ethernet Type, or EtherType, is a field in the Ethernet MAC header, defined by the Ethernet networking standard. It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame.

F

FTP

FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol. It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and provides file writing and reading. It also provides directory service and security features.

Fast Leave

IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding-table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface. The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message. Fast-leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network, even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously.

H

HTTP

HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol. It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web (WWW).

HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted, and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands. For example, when you enter a URL in your browser, this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web Page. The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML, which covers how Web Pages are formatted and displayed.

Any Web server machine contains, in addition to the Web Page files it can serve, an HTTP daemon, a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive. The Web browser is an HTTP client, sending requests to server machines. An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

connection to a particular port on a remote host (port 80 by default). An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message.

HTTPS

HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer. It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection.

HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security-sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons.

HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape's Secure Socket Layer (SSL) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering. (HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer, TCP/IP.) SSL uses a 40-bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange.

ICMP

ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol. It is a protocol that generated the error response, diagnostic or routing purposes. ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time-stamp or echo transactions. For example, the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection.

IEEE 802.1X

IEEE 802.1X is an IEEE standard for port-based Network Access Control. It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port, establishing a point-to-point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails. With 802.1X, access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network.

IGMP

IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships. It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification, like ICMP for unicast connections. IGMP can be used for online video and gaming, and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses.

IGMP Querier

A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link. This router is called the Querier.

IMAP

IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol. It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages

from a mail server.

IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers, and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server.

The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4. It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3), but offers additional and more complex features. For example, the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer. If you wish to remove your messages from the server, you must use your mail client to generate local folders, copy messages to your local hard drive, and then delete and expunge the messages from the server.

IP

IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol. It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network.

IP is a "best effort" system, which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent. Each device connected to a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN) is given an Internet Protocol address, and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network.

The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4, which has 32-bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses. This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks, the bulk of which remain unused. There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol, IPv6, which would have 128-bits Internet Protocol addresses. This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty-nine zeroes after it. However, IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet.

IPMC

IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast.

IP Source Guard

IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host.

L

LACP

LACP is an IEEE 802.3ad standard protocol. The Link Aggregation Control Protocol, allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port.

LLDP

LLDP is an IEEE 802.1ab standard protocol.

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol(LLDP) specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise, to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN, the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station, the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities, and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities. The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base (MIB), making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System (NMS) using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

LLDP-MED

LLDP-MED is an extension of IEEE 802.1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association (TIA-1057).

LOC

LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network. Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS

M

MAC Table

Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to (based upon the DMAC address in the frame). This table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.

The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address), which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame. The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time.

MEP

MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group (ITU-T Y.1731).

MD5

MD5 is an acronym for Message-Digest algorithm 5. MD5 is a message digest algorithm, used cryptographic hash function with a 128-bit hash value. It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991. MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 - The MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm.

Mirroring

For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic, the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port. (In this context, mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame.)

Both incoming (source) and outgoing (destination) frames can be mirrored to the mirror port.

MLD

MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6. MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link, much as IGMP is used in IPv4. The protocol is embedded in ICMPv6 instead of using a separate protocol.

MVR

Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is a protocol for Layer 2 (IP)-networks that enables multicast-traffic from a source. VLAN to be shared with subscriber-VLANs.

The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network, instead the stream(s) are received on the MVR-VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it/them(Wikipedia).

N

NAS

NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server. The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source. A client connects to the NAS, and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client's supplied credentials are valid. Based on the answer, the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource. An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802.1X.

NetBIOS

NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input/Output System. It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network (LAN), and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network (WAN).

The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name, provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model.

NFS

NFS is an acronym for Network File System. It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems.

NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network, providing authorized users continuous access to them, which means NFS supports sharing of files, printers, and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network.

NTP

NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. NTP uses UDP (datagrams) as transport layer.

0

OAM

OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance.

It is a protocol described in ITU-T Y.1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality. MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this.

Optional TLVs.

A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs

For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame. These TLVs are known as optional TLVs. If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame.

OUI

OUI is the organizationally unique identifier. An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE. You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address.

P

PCP

PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point. It is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame. It is also known as User Priority.

PD

PD is an acronym for Powered Device. In a PoE> system the power is delivered from a PSE (power sourcing equipment) to a remote device. The remote device is called a PD.

PHY

PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer (IEEE-802.3).

PING

ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer. The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets. Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected.

ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets. The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer, and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target.

Policer

A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames. It is located in front of the ingress queue.

POP3

POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3. It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server.

POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it. However, some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time. POP can be thought of as a "store-and-forward" service.

An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP). IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e-mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server. IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server.

POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e-mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). You send e-mail with SMTP, and a mail handler receives it on your recipient's behalf. Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP. IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e-mail retrieval. Virtually all modern e-mail clients and servers support both.

PPPoE

PPPoE is an acronym for Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet.

It is a network protocol for encapsulating Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) frames inside Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver (modem) over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks (Wikipedia).

Private VLAN

In a private VLAN, communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted. A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN.

PTP

PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems.

Q

QCE

QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry. It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID.

There are six QCE frame types: Ethernet Type, VLAN, UDP/TCP Port, DSCP, TOS, and Tag Priority. Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes: "Low", "Normal", "Medium", and "High" for individual application.

QCL

QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List. It is the list table of QCEs, containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects.

Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL. The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class.

QL

QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source. This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port.

QoS

QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service. It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols.

A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data, including high-quality video and delay-sensitive data such as real-time voice. Networks must provide secure, predictable, measurable, and sometimes guaranteed services.

Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end-to-end business solution. Therefore, QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources.

QoS class

Every incoming frame is classified to a QoS class, which is used throughout the device for providing queuing, scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class. There is a one to one mapping between QoS class, queue and priority. A QoS class of 0 (zero) has the lowest priority.

R

RARP

RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a

given hardware address, such as an Ethernet address. RARP is the complement of ARP.

RADIUS

RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service. It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access, authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service.

RDI

RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication. It is a OAM functionality that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP

Router Port

A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device.

RSTP

In 1998, the IEEE with document 802.1w introduced an evolution of STP: the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. Standard IEEE 802.1D-2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP, while at the same time being backwards-compatible with STP.

S

SAMBA

Samba is a program running under UNIX-like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines. Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows, IBM OS/2, and other SMB client machines. Samba uses the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol and Common Internet File System (CIFS), which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking.

Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms, including Linux, most common Unix platforms, OpenVMS, and IBM OS/2.

Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows "Neighborhood Network".

SHA

SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm. It designed by the National Security Agency (NSA) and published by the NIST as a U.S. Federal Information Processing Standard. Hash algorithms compute a fixed-length digital representation (known as a message digest) of an input data sequence (the message) of any length.

Shaper

A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames. It is located after the ingress queues.

SMTP

SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. It is a text-based protocol that uses the Transmission Control

Protocol (TCP) and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service. SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail.

SNAP

The SubNetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) is a mechanism for multiplexing, on networks using IEEE 802.2 LLC, more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8-bit 802.2 Service Access Point (SAP) fields. SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values; it also supports vendor-private protocol identifier.

SNMP

SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol for network management. SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture. It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP.

SNTP

SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. SNTP uses UDP (datagrams) as transport layer.

SPROUT

Stack Protocol using ROUTing Technology. An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch. SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack.

SSID

Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802.11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach. A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs, and can choose one to connect to based on pre-configuration, or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one (wikipedia).

SSH

SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell. It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices. The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network. The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin, TELNET and rsh protocols, which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality (Wikipedia).

SSM

SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication.

STP

Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer-2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN. The original STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP.

SyncE

SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet. This functionality is used to make a network 'clock frequency' synchronized. Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized (IEEE 1588).

T

TACACS+

TACACS+ is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus. It is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers, network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers. TACACS+ provides separate authentication, authorization and accounting services.

Tag Priority

Tag Priority is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame.

TCP

TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol. It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) to exchange the messages between computers.

The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in-order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications (for example, Web server and e-mail server) running on the same host.

The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another. It is known as a connection-oriented protocol, which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged. TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end.

Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web (WWW), e-mail, and File Transfer Protocol (FTP).

TELNET

TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork. It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client.

TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network. To start a Telnet session, the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password. Then, the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console.

TFTP

TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol. It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and provides file writing and reading, but it does not provide directory service and security features.

ToS

ToS is an acronym for Type of Service. It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control. It is fully decoded to determine the priority from the 6-bit ToS field in the IP header. The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities, and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4 ToS priority control bit (0\~63).

TLV

TLV is an acronym for Type Length Value. A LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information. Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV.

TKIP

TKIP is an acronym for Temporal Key Integrity Protocol. It used in WPA to replace WEP with a new encryption algorithm. TKIP comprises the same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm defined for WEP. The key used for encryption in TKIP is 128 bits and changes the key used for each packet.

U

UDP

UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol. It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) to exchange the messages between computers.

UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) that uses the Internet Protocol (IP). Unlike TCP, UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams, and UDP doesn't provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets. This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order. Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP.

UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer. It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and, optionally, a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact.

Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System (DNS), streaming media applications such as IPTV, Voice over IP (VoIP), and Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP).

UPnP

UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play. The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home (data sharing, communications, and entertainment) and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components

User Priority

User Priority is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame.

V

VLAN

Virtual LAN. A method to restrict communication between switch ports. VLANs can be used for the following applications:

VLAN unaware switching: This is the default configuration. All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1. This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1, and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags.

VLAN aware switching: This is based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard. All ports are VLAN aware. Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames. Other ports are members of one VLAN, set up with this Port VLAN ID, and transmit untagged frames.

Provider switching: This is also known as Q-in-Q switching. Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware, members of one VLAN, and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID. Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware, members of multiple VLANs, and set up to tag all frames. Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag. Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag.

VLAN ID

VLAN ID is a 12-bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs.

Voice VLAN

Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic. By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN, we can perform QoS-related configuration for voice data, ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality.

W

WEP

WEP is an acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy. WEP is a deprecated algorithm to secure IEEE 802.11 wireless networks. Wireless networks broadcast messages using radio, so are more susceptible to eavesdropping than wired networks. When introduced in 1999, WEP was intended to provide confidentiality comparable to that of a traditional wired network (Wikipedia).

WiFi

WiFi is an acronym for Wireless Fidelity. It is meant to be used generically when referring of any type of 802.11 network, whether 802.11b, 802.11a, dual-band, etc. The term is promulgated by the Wi-Fi Alliance.

WPA

WPA is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Access. It was created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous system, Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802.11i standard, and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802.11i was prepared. WPA is specifically designed to also work with pre-WPA wireless network interface cards (through firmware upgrades), but not necessarily with first generation wireless access points. WPA2 implements the full standard, but will not work with some older network cards (Wikipedia).

WPA-PSK

WPA-PSK is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Access - Pre Shared Key. WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks. There are two flavors of WPA: enterprise and personal. Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802.1X authentication server, which distributes different keys to each user. Personal WPA utilizes less scalable 'pre-shared key' (PSK) mode, where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase. In PSK mode, security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase. The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802.11i standard (Wikipedia)

WPA-Radius

WPA-Radius is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Access - Radius (802.1X authentication server). WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks. There are two flavors of WPA: enterprise and personal. Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802.1X authentication server, which distributes different keys to each user. Personal WPA utilizes less scalable 'pre-shared key' (PSK) mode, where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase. In PSK mode, security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase. The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802.11i standard (Wikipedia)

WPS

WPS is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Setup. It is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless home network. The goal of the WPS protocol is to simplify the process of connecting any home device to the wireless network (Wikipedia).

WRES

WRED is an acronym for Weighted Random Early Detection. It is an active queue management mechanism that provides preferential treatment of higher priority frames when traffic builds up within a queue. A frame's DP level is used as input to WRED. A higher DP level assigned to a frame results in a higher probability that the frame is dropped during times of congestion.

WTR

WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore. This is the time a fail on a resource has to be 'not active' before restoration back to this (previously failing) resource is done.